View M38203M4-126FP_548222.PDF datasheet online --- IC-ON-LINE

Datasheet File OCR Text:

ADVANCED AND EVER ADVANCING
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI 8-BIT SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER 740 FAMILY / 38000 SERIES
3820
Group
User's Manual
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Keep safety first in your circuit designs! Mitsubishi Electric Corporation puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage. Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of non-flammable material or (iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap. Notes regarding these materials These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Mitsubishi semiconductor product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or a third party. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any third-party's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts or circuit application examples contained in these materials. All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams and charts, represent information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are subject to change by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation without notice due to product improvements or other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or an authorized Mitsubishi Semiconductor product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or an authorized Mitsubishi Semiconductor product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use. The prior written approval of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials. If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination. Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the country of destination is prohibited. Please contact Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or an authorized Mitsubishi Semiconductor product distributor for further details on these materials or the products contained therein.
REVISION DESCRIPTION LIST
Rev. No. 1.0 First Edition
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
Revision Description Rev. date 970901
(1/1)
Preface
This user's manual describes Mitsubishi's CMOS 8bit microcomputers 3820 Group. After reading this manual, the user should have a through knowledge of the functions and features of the 3820 Group, and should be able to fully utilize the product. The manual starts with specifications and ends with application examples. For details of software, refer to the "SERIES 740 USER'S MANUAL."
BEFORE USING THIS USER'S MANUAL
This user's manual consists of the following three chapters. Refer to the chapter appropriate to your conditions, such as hardware design or software development.
1. Organization
q CHAPTER 1 HARDWARE This chapter describes features of the microcomputer, operation of each peripheral function and electric characteristics. q CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION This chapter describes usage and application examples of peripheral functions, based mainly on setting examples of related registers. q CHAPTER 3 APPENDIX This chapter includes precautions for systems development using the microcomputer, a list of control registers, the masking confirmation forms (mask ROM version), ROM programming confirmation forms (One Time PROM version) and mark specification forms which are to be submitted when ordering.
2. Structure of register
The figure of each register structure describes its functions, contents at reset, and attributes as follows :
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 1
Bit attributes (Note 2) Bits (Note 1) Values immediately after reset release
CPU mode register (CPUM) [Address:3B 16] B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stack page selection bit Fix this bit to "1." Port XC switch bit Main clock (XIN-XOUT) stop bit Main clock division ratio selection bit Internal system clock selection bit
0 : I/O port 1 : XCIN, XCOUT 0 : Oscillating 1 : Stopped 0 : f(XIN)/2 (high-speed mode) (high-speed mode) 1 : f(XIN)/8 (middle-speed mode) 0 : XIN-XOUT selected (middle-/high-speed mode) 1 : XCIN-XCOUT selected (low-speed mode)
Name Processor mode bits
b1b0
Functions
00: Single-chip mode 01: 10: Not available 11: 0 : 0 page 1 : 1 page
At reset
RW
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
!
7
: Bit in which nothing is allocated
: Bit that is not used for control of the corresponding function
Notes 1: Values immediately after reset release 0******"0" at reset release 1******"1" at reset release ?******Undefined or reset release 2: Bit attributes******The attributes of control register bits are classified into 3 types : read-only, write-only and read and write. In the figure, these attributes are represented as follows : W******Write R******Read ******Write enabled ******Read enabled ! ******Write disabled ! ******Read disabled V ******Only "0" write enabled 0 ******Fixed to "0" 0 ******Fix to "0" 1 ******Fixed to "1" 1 ******Fix to "1"
Table of contents
Table of contents
CHAPTER 1. HARDWARE
DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................ 1-2 FEATURES ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2 APPLICATIONS .............................................................................................................................. 1-2 PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW) ........................................................................................... 1-3 FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM (Package: 80P6N-A) .......................................................... 1-4 PIN DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 1-5 PART NUMBERING ....................................................................................................................... 1-7 GROUP EXPANSION .................................................................................................................... 1-8 GROUP EXPANSION (EXTENDED OPERATING TEMPERATURE VERSION) ..................... 1-9 GROUP EXPANSION (LOW POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE VERSION) ............................... 1-10 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1-11 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ...............................................................................................1-11 CPU Mode Register ................................................................................................................1-11 MEMORY ....................................................................................................................................... 1-12 Special Function Register (SFR) Area ................................................................................... 1-12 RAM ........................................................................................................................................1-12 ROM ....................................................................................................................................... 1-12 Interrupt Vector Area .............................................................................................................. 1-12 Zero Page ...............................................................................................................................1-12 Special Page ..........................................................................................................................1-12 I/O PORTS ....................................................................................................................................1-14 Direction Registers (ports P2, P41-P47, and P5-P7) ............................................................. 1-14 Direction Registers (ports P0 and P1) .................................................................................... 1-14 Ports P3 and P40 ................................................................................................................................................. 1-14 Pull-up/Pull-down Control ....................................................................................................... 1-14 INTERRUPTS ................................................................................................................................ 1-19 Interrupt Control ......................................................................................................................1-19 Interrupt Operation .................................................................................................................1-19 Notes on Use ..........................................................................................................................1-19 Key Input Interrupt (Key-on Wake up) .................................................................................... 1-21 TIMERS .........................................................................................................................................1-22 Timer X ...................................................................................................................................1-23 Timer X Write Control ............................................................................................................. 1-23 Note on CNTR0 Interrupt Active Edge Selection .................................................................... 1-23 Real Time Port Control ...........................................................................................................1-23 Timer Y ...................................................................................................................................1-24 Note on CNTR1 Interrupt Active Edge Selection .................................................................... 1-24 Timer 1, Timer 2, Timer 3 ....................................................................................................... 1-25 Timer 2 Write Control ............................................................................................................. 1-25 Timer 2 Output Control ...........................................................................................................1-25 Note on Timer 1 to Timer 3..................................................................................................... 1-25 SERIAL I/O1 ................................................................................................................................. 1-26 Clock Synchronous Serial I/O Mode ....................................................................................... 1-26 Serial I/O1 Control Register (SIO1CON) 001A16 .................................................................................... 1-28 UART Control Register (UARTCON) 001B16 ........................................................................................... 1-28 Serial I/O1 Status Register (SIO1STS) 001916 ........................................................................................ 1-28 Transmit Buffer/Receive Buffer Register (TB/RB) 001816 ................................................................... 1-28 Baud Rate Generator (BRG) 001C16 ........................................................................................................... 1-28 SERIAL I/O2 ................................................................................................................................. 1-30 Serial I/O2 Control Register (SIO2CON) 001D16 .................................................................................... 1-30
i
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
Table of contents
LCD DRIVE CONTROL CIRCUIT .............................................................................................. 1-32 Bias Control and Applied Voltage to LCD Power Input Pins .................................................. 1-34 Common Pin and Duty Ratio Control ..................................................................................... 1-34 LCD Display RAM ...................................................................................................................1-35 LCD Drive Timing ...................................................................................................................1-35 WATCHDOG TIMER .................................................................................................................... 1-38 Initial Value of Watchdog Timer.............................................................................................. 1-38 Watchdog Timer Operation .................................................................................................... 1-38 CLOCK OUTPUT FUNCTION .................................................................................................1-39 RESET CIRCUIT .......................................................................................................................... 1-40 CLOCK GENERATING CIRCUIT ............................................................................................... 1-42 Frequency Control ..................................................................................................................1-42 Oscillation Control ..................................................................................................................1-42 NOTES ON PROGRAMMING ..................................................................................................... 1-45 Processor Status Register ...................................................................................................... 1-45 Interrupt .................................................................................................................................. 1-45 Decimal Calculations .............................................................................................................. 1-45 Timers..................................................................................................................................... 1-45 Multiplication and Division Instructions ................................................................................... 1-45 Ports .......................................................................................................................................1-45 Serial I/O................................................................................................................................. 1-45 Instruction Execution Time ..................................................................................................... 1-45 DATA REQUIRED FOR MASK ORDERS ................................................................................ 1-46 ROM PROGRAMMIG METHOD ................................................................................................. 1-46 Absolute maximum ratings ....................................................................................................... 1-47 Recommended operating conditions ...................................................................................... 1-47 Electrical characteristics ........................................................................................................... 1-49 Timing requirements 1 .............................................................................................................. 1-51 Timing requirements 2 .............................................................................................................. 1-51 Switching characteristics 1 ...................................................................................................... 1-52 Switching characteristics 2 ...................................................................................................... 1-52 Absolute maximum ratings (Extended operating temperature version) .......................... 1-53 Recommended operating conditions (Extended operating temperature version) .......................................... 1-53 Electrical characteristics (Extended operating temperature version) ............................... 1-55 Timing requirements 1 (Extended operating temperature version) .................................. 1-57 Timing requirements 2 (Extended operating temperature version) .................................. 1-57 Switching characteristics 1 (Extended operating temperature version) .......................... 1-58 Switching characteristics 2 (Extended operating temperature version) .......................... 1-58 Absolute maximum ratings (Low power source voltage version) ................................... 1-59 Recommended operating conditions (Low power source voltage version) ....................................................1-59 Electrical characteristics (Low power source voltage version) ........................................ 1-61 Timing requirements 1 (Low power source voltage version) ........................................... 1-63 Timing requirements 2 (Low power source voltage version) ........................................... 1-63 Switching characteristics 1 (Low power source voltage version) ................................... 1-64 Switching characteristics 2 (Low power source voltage version) ................................... 1-64 Timing diagram ........................................................................................................................... 1-65 STANDARD CHARACTERISTICS .............................................................................................. 1-66 Power Source Current Characteristic Examples (ICC-VCC characteristics) ............................ 1-66 Power Source Frequency Characteristic Examples .................................................................. 1-68 Port Standard Characteristic Examples ...................................................................................... 1-69
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
ii
Table of contents CHAPTER 2. APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins .................................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.1 I/O ports ........................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.2 Function pins ...................................................................................................................2-7 2.1.3 Application examples....................................................................................................... 2-8 2.1.4 Notes on use .................................................................................................................2-12 2.2 Interrupts ...............................................................................................................................2-15 2.2.1 Explanation of operations .............................................................................................. 2-15 2.2.2 Control ........................................................................................................................... 2-19 2.2.3 Related registers ...........................................................................................................2-22 2.2.4 INT interrupts .................................................................................................................2-28 2.2.5 Key input interrupt .........................................................................................................2-29 2.2.6 Notes on use .................................................................................................................2-31 2.3 Timer X and timer Y ..........................................................................................................2-32 2.3.1 Explanation of timer X operations.................................................................................. 2-32 2.3.2 Explanation of timer Y operations.................................................................................. 2-42 2.3.3 Related registers ...........................................................................................................2-50 2.3.4 Register setting example ...............................................................................................2-66 2.3.5 Application examples..................................................................................................... 2-75 2.3.6 Notes on use .................................................................................................................2-82 2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3 .......................................................................................... 2-85 2.4.1 Explanation of operations .............................................................................................. 2-85 2.4.2 Related registers ...........................................................................................................2-90 2.4.3 Register setting example ...............................................................................................2-99 2.4.4 Application example .................................................................................................... 2-100 2.4.5 Notes on use ...............................................................................................................2-102 2.5 Serial I/O1 ........................................................................................................................... 2-103 2.5.1 Explanation of operations ............................................................................................ 2-103 2.5.2 Pins .............................................................................................................................. 2-120 2.5.3 Related registers .........................................................................................................2-121 2.5.4 Register setting example .............................................................................................2-129 2.5.5 Notes on use ...............................................................................................................2-139 2.6 Serial I/O2 ........................................................................................................................... 2-141 2.6.1 Explanation of operations ............................................................................................ 2-141 2.6.2 Pins .............................................................................................................................. 2-148 2.6.3 Related registers .........................................................................................................2-149 2.6.4 Register setting example .............................................................................................2-152 2.6.5 Notes on use ...............................................................................................................2-154 2.7 LCD drive control circuit .................................................................................................2-155 2.7.1 Explanation of operations ............................................................................................ 2-155 2.7.2 Pins .............................................................................................................................. 2-156 2.7.3 Related registers .........................................................................................................2-159 2.7.4 Register setting example .............................................................................................2-166 2.7.5 Application examples................................................................................................... 2-168 2.7.6 Notes on use ...............................................................................................................2-172 2.8 Watchdog timer ..................................................................................................................2-173 2.8.1 Explanation of operations ............................................................................................ 2-173 2.8.2 Related register......................................................................................................... 2-175 2.9 Standby function ...............................................................................................................2-176 2.9.1 Stop mode ...................................................................................................................2-176 2.9.2 Wait mode ...................................................................................................................2-181 2.9.3 State transitions of internal clock ...................................................................................... 2-184
iii
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
Table of contents
2.10 Reset ..................................................................................................................................2-185 2.10.1 Explanation of operations .......................................................................................... 2-185 2.10.2 Internal state of the microcomputer immediately after reset release ......................... 2-187 2.10.3 Reset circuit ...............................................................................................................2-188 2.10.4 Notes on the RESET pin ........................................................................................... 2-189 2.11 Oscillation circuit ............................................................................................................. 2-190 2.11.1 Oscillation circuit........................................................................................................2-190 2.11.2 Internal clock ..........................................................................................................2-192 2.11.3 Oscillating operation ..................................................................................................2-194 2.11.4 Oscillation stabilizing time ......................................................................................... 2-197
CHAPTER 3. APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version .......................................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.1 Product expansion ........................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.2 Performance overview ..................................................................................................... 3-4 3.1.3 Pin configuration ..............................................................................................................3-5 3.1.4 Functional block diagram ................................................................................................ 3-8 3.1.5 Notes on use ...................................................................................................................3-9 3.2 Countermeasures against noise ....................................................................................... 3-11 3.2.1 Shortest wiring length .................................................................................................... 3-11 3.2.2 Connection of a bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the VCC line ....................... 3-12 3.2.3 Oscillator concerns ........................................................................................................ 3-13 3.2.4 Installing an oscillator away from signal lines where potential levels change frequently............................ 3-14 3.2.5 Oscillator protection using VSS pattern .......................................................................... 3-14 3.2.6 Set up for I/O ports ........................................................................................................ 3-14 3.2.7 Providing of watchdog timer function by software ......................................................... 3-15 3.3 Control registers ..................................................................................................................3-16 3.4 List of instruction codes ................................................................................................... 3-29 3.5 Machine instructions ........................................................................................................... 3-30 3.6 Mask ROM ordering method ............................................................................................. 3-40 3.7 Mark specification form ..................................................................................................... 3-52 3.8 Package outlines ................................................................................................................. 3-54 3.9 SFR allocation ...................................................................................................................... 3-56 3.10 Pin configuration ............................................................................................................... 3-57
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
iv
List of figures
List of figures
CHAPTER 1. HARDWARE
Fig. 1 Pin configuration of M38203M4-XXXFP .................................................................................. 1-2 Fig. 2 Pin configuration of M38203M4-XXXGP/HP ........................................................................... 1-3 Fig. 3 Function block diagram ...........................................................................................................1-4 Fig. 4 Part numbering ........................................................................................................................1-7 Fig. 5 Memory expansion plan (1) .....................................................................................................1-8 Fig. 6 Memory expansion plan (2) .....................................................................................................1-9 Fig. 7 Memory expansion plan (3) ................................................................................................... 1-10 Fig. 8 Structure of CPU mode register ............................................................................................ 1-11 Fig. 9 Memory map diagram ............................................................................................................ 1-12 Fig. 10 Memory map of special function register (SFR) .................................................................. 1-14 Fig. 11 Structure of PULL register A and PULL register B .............................................................. 1-15 Fig. 12 Port block diagram (1) ......................................................................................................... 1-16 Fig. 13 Port block diagram (2) ......................................................................................................... 1-17 Fig. 14 Port block diagram (3) ......................................................................................................... 1-18 Fig. 15 Interrupt control ................................................................................................................... 1-20 Fig. 16 Structure of interrupt-related registers ................................................................................. 1-21 Fig. 17 Connection example when using key input interrupt and port P2 block diagram ................ 1-21 Fig. 18 Timer block diagram ............................................................................................................ 1-22 Fig. 19 Structure of timer X mode register ....................................................................................... 1-23 Fig. 20 Structure of timer Y mode register ....................................................................................... 1-24 Fig. 21 Structure of timer 123 mode register ................................................................................... 1-25 Fig. 22 Block diagram of clock synchronous serial I/O1 .................................................................. 1-26 Fig. 23 Operation of clock synchronous serial I/O1 function ........................................................... 1-26 Fig. 24 Block diagram of UART serial I/O1 ...................................................................................... 1-27 Fig. 25 Operation of UART serial I/O1 function ............................................................................... 1-27 Fig. 26 Structure of serial I/O1 control registers .............................................................................. 1-29 Fig. 27 Structure of serial I/O2 control register ................................................................................ 1-29 Fig. 28 Block diagram of serial I/O2 function ................................................................................... 1-30 Fig. 29 Timing of serial I/O2 function ............................................................................................... 1-31 Fig. 30 Structure of segment output enable register and LCD mode register ................................. 1-32 Fig. 31 Block diagram of LCD controller/driver ................................................................................ 1-33 Fig. 32 Example of circuit at each bias ............................................................................................ 1-34 Fig. 33 LCD display RAM map ........................................................................................................ 1-35 Fig. 34 LCD drive waveform (1/2 bias) ............................................................................................ 1-36 Fig. 35 LCD drive waveform (1/3 bias) ............................................................................................ 1-37 Fig. 36 Watchdog timer block diagram ............................................................................................ 1-38 Fig. 37 Structure of watchdog timer control register ........................................................................ 1-38 Fig. 38 Structure of output control register ................................................................................... 1-39 Fig. 39 Example of reset circuit ....................................................................................................... 1-40 Fig. 40 Internal state of microcomputer immediately after reset ...................................................... 1-40 Fig. 41 Reset sequence ................................................................................................................... 1-41 Fig. 42 Ceramic resonator circuit ..................................................................................................... 1-42 Fig. 43 External clock input circuit ................................................................................................... 1-42 Fig. 44 Clock generating circuit block diagram ................................................................................ 1-43 Fig. 45 State transitions of internal clock ............................................................................................... 1-44 Fig. 46 Programming and testing of One Time PROM version ....................................................... 1-46 Fig. 47 Circuit for measuring output switching characteristics ........................................................ 1-64 Fig. 48 Timing diagram .................................................................................................................... 1-65 Fig. 49 ICC-VCC characteristic example (f(XIN = 8 MHz)) ................................................................ 1-66 Fig. 50 ICC-VCC characteristic example (f(XIN = 4 MHz)) ................................................................ 1-66 Fig. 51 ICC-VCC characteristic example (f(XIN) = 32 kHz, oscillator used) ...................................... 1-67 Fig. 52 ICC-f(XIN) characteristic example (VCC = 3.0 V) .................................................................. 1-68
i
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
List of figures
Fig. 53 ICC-f(XIN) characteristic example (VCC = 5.0 V) .................................................................. 1-68 Fig. 54 IOH-VOH characteristic example of CMOS output port at P-channel drive (P0, P1, P3) ..... 1-69 Fig. 55 IOL-VOL characteristic example of CMOS output port at N-channel drive (P0, P1, P3) ...... 1-69 Fig. 56 IOH-VOH characteristic example of CMOS output port at P-channel drive (P2, P5, P6, P7) ... 1-70 Fig. 57 IOL-VOL characteristic example of CMOS output port at N-channel drive (P2, P5, P6, P7) .... 1-70
CHAPTER 2. APPLICATION
Fig. 2.1.1 I/O port write and read ....................................................................................................... 2-2 Fig. 2.1.2 Structure of port Pi (i = 2, 4 to 7) direction register ............................................................ 2-3 Fig. 2.1.3 Structure of ports P0 and P1 direction registers ................................................................ 2-4 Fig. 2.1.4 Port direction register setting example .............................................................................. 2-5 Fig. 2.1.5 Structure of PULL register A ..............................................................................................2-6 Fig. 2.1.6 Structure of PULL register B ..............................................................................................2-6 Fig. 2.1.7 Connection example 1 for key input .................................................................................. 2-8 Fig. 2.1.8 Key input control procedure 1 ............................................................................................ 2-8 Fig. 2.1.9 Timing diagram 1 where switch A is pressed .................................................................... 2-9 Fig. 2.1.10 Connection example 2 for key input .............................................................................. 2-10 Fig. 2.1.11 Key input control procedure 2 ........................................................................................ 2-10 Fig. 2.1.12 Timing diagram 2 where switch A is pressed ................................................................ 2-11 Fig. 2.2.1 Interrupt operation diagram ............................................................................................. 2-15 Fig. 2.2.2 Changes of stack pointer and program counter upon acceptance of interrupt request ... 2-17 Fig. 2.2.3 Processing time up to execution of interrupt processing routine ..................................... 2-18 Fig. 2.2.4 Timing after acceptance of interrupt request ................................................................... 2-18 Fig. 2.2.5 Interrupt control diagram ................................................................................................. 2-19 Fig. 2.2.6 Example of multiple interrupts ......................................................................................... 2-21 Fig. 2.2.7 Memory allocation of interrupt-related registers .............................................................. 2-22 Fig. 2.2.8 Structure of interrupt edge selection register ................................................................... 2-22 Fig. 2.2.9 Structure of interrupt request register 1 ........................................................................... 2-23 Fig. 2.2.10 Structure of interrupt request register 2 ......................................................................... 2-24 Fig. 2.2.11 Structure of interrupt control register 1 .......................................................................... 2-25 Fig. 2.2.12 Structure of interrupt control register 2 .......................................................................... 2-26 Fig. 2.2.13 Structure of processor status register ............................................................................ 2-27 Fig. 2.2.14 Structure of interrupt edge selection register ................................................................. 2-28 Fig. 2.2.15 Connection example when key input interrupt is used, and port P2 block diagram ................................... 2-29 Fig. 2.2.16 Setting values (corresponding to Figure 2.2.15) of key input interrupt-related registers ............................ 2-30 Fig. 2.2.17 Register setting example ............................................................................................... 2-31 Fig. 2.3.1 Timer mode operation example ....................................................................................... 2-33 Fig. 2.3.2 Pulse output mode operation example ............................................................................ 2-35 Fig. 2.3.3 Event counter mode operation example .......................................................................... 2-37 Fig. 2.3.4 Pulse width measurement mode operation example ....................................................... 2-39 Fig. 2.3.5 Timer mode operation example with real time port function ............................................ 2-41 Fig. 2.3.6 Timer mode operation example ....................................................................................... 2-43 Fig. 2.3.7 Period measurement mode operation example ............................................................... 2-45 Fig. 2.3.8 Event counter mode operation example .......................................................................... 2-47 Fig. 2.3.9 Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode operation example ............................ 2-49 Fig. 2.3.10 Memory allocation of timer X- and the timer Y-related registers ................................... 2-50 Fig. 2.3.11 Structure of port P5 direction register ............................................................................ 2-51 Fig. 2.3.12 Structure of port P6 direction register ............................................................................ 2-52 Fig. 2.3.13 Structure of timer X latch ............................................................................................... 2-53 Fig. 2.3.14 Structure of timer X counter ........................................................................................... 2-54 Fig. 2.3.15 Structure of timer Y latch ............................................................................................... 2-55 Fig. 2.3.16 Structure of timer Y counter ........................................................................................... 2-56 Fig. 2.3.17 Structure of timer X mode register ................................................................................. 2-57 Fig. 2.3.18 Structure of timer Y mode register ................................................................................. 2-60 Fig. 2.3.19 Structure of interrupt request register 1 ......................................................................... 2-62 Fig. 2.3.20 Structure of interrupt request register 2 ......................................................................... 2-63 Fig. 2.3.21 Structure of interrupt control register 1 .......................................................................... 2-64
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
ii
List of figures
Fig. 2.3.22 Structure of interrupt control register 2 .......................................................................... 2-65 Fig. 2.3.23 Example of setting registers for using timer mode ........................................................ 2-66 Fig. 2.3.24 Example of setting registers for using pulse output mode ............................................. 2-67 Fig. 2.3.25 Example of setting registers for using event counter mode ........................................... 2-68 Fig. 2.3.26 Example of setting registers for using pulse width measurement mode ....................... 2-69 Fig. 2.3.27 Example of setting registers for using RTP ................................................................... 2-70 Fig. 2.3.28 Example of setting registers for using timer mode ........................................................ 2-71 Fig. 2.3.29 Example of setting registers for using period measurement mode ............................... 2-72 Fig. 2.3.30 Example of setting registers for using event counter mode ........................................... 2-73 Fig. 2.3.31 Example of setting registers for using pulse width HL continuously measurement mode .......................... 2-74 Fig. 2.3.32 Example of peripheral circuit ......................................................................................... 2-75 Fig. 2.3.33 Connection of timer and setting of division ratio ............................................................ 2-75 Fig. 2.3.34 Setting of related registers ............................................................................................. 2-76 Fig. 2.3.35 Control procedure ..........................................................................................................2-76 Fig. 2.3.36 Example of peripheral circuit ......................................................................................... 2-77 Fig. 2.3.37 Setting of related registers ............................................................................................. 2-77 Fig. 2.3.38 Ringer signal waveform ................................................................................................. 2-78 Fig. 2.3.39 Operation timing when ringing pulse is input ................................................................. 2-78 Fig. 2.3.40 Control procedure ..........................................................................................................2-79 Fig. 2.3.41 Application connection example when RTP is used ...................................................... 2-80 Fig. 2.3.42 RTP output example ...................................................................................................... 2-80 Fig. 2.3.43 Timer X interrupt processing procedure example when RTP is used ........................... 2-81 Fig. 2.4.1 Timer mode operation example ....................................................................................... 2-86 Fig. 2.4.2 Rewriting example of counter and latch corresponding to timers 1 or 3 .......................... 2-87 Fig. 2.4.3 Rewriting example of timer 2 counter and timer 2 latch (Writing in timer 2 latch only) .... 2-88 Fig. 2.4.4 Pulse output example ...................................................................................................... 2-89 Fig. 2.4.5 Memory allocation of timer-related registers ................................................................... 2-90 Fig. 2.4.6 Structure of latches ..........................................................................................................2-91 Fig. 2.4.7 Structure of timer counters .............................................................................................. 2-92 Fig. 2.4.8 Structure of timer 123 mode register ............................................................................... 2-93 Fig. 2.4.9 Structure of interrupt request register 1 ........................................................................... 2-95 Fig. 2.4.10 Structure of interrupt request register 2 ......................................................................... 2-96 Fig. 2.4.11 Structure of interrupt control register 1 .......................................................................... 2-97 Fig. 2.4.12 Structure of interrupt control register 2 .......................................................................... 2-98 Fig. 2.4.13 Example of setting registers for timers 1, 2, and 3 ........................................................ 2-99 Fig. 2.4.14 Setting of related registers ........................................................................................... 2-100 Fig. 2.4.15 Control procedure ........................................................................................................2-101 Fig. 2.5.1 External connection example in clock synchronous mode ............................................ 2-103 Fig. 2.5.2 Shift clock ......................................................................................................................2-104 Fig. 2.5.3 Transmit operation in clock synchronous mode ............................................................ 2-107 Fig. 2.5.4 Transmit timing example in clock synchronous mode ................................................... 2-108 Fig. 2.5.5 Receive operation in clock synchronous mode ............................................................. 2-110 Fig. 2.5.6 Receive timing example in clock synchronous mode .................................................... 2-110 Fig. 2.5.7 Transmit/receive timing example in clock synchronous mode ...................................... 2-111 Fig. 2.5.8 External connection example in UART mode ................................................................ 2-112 Fig. 2.5.9 Transfer data format in UART mode .............................................................................2-114 Fig. 2.5.10 All transfer data formats in UART mode ......................................................................2-115 Fig. 2.5.11 Transmit timing example in UART mode ..................................................................... 2-117 Fig. 2.5.12 Receive timing example in UART mode ......................................................................2-119 Fig. 2.5.13 Memory allocation of serial I/O1-related registers ....................................................... 2-121 Fig. 2.5.14 Structure of transmit/receive buffer register ................................................................ 2-121 Fig. 2.5.15 Structure of serial I/O1 status register ......................................................................... 2-122 Fig. 2.5.16 Structure of serial I/O1 control register ........................................................................ 2-124 Fig. 2.5.17 Structure of UART control register .............................................................................. 2-127 Fig. 2.5.18 Transmitting method in clock synchronous mode (1) .................................................. 2-129 Fig. 2.5.19 Transmitting method in clock synchronous mode (2) .................................................. 2-130 Fig. 2.5.20 Receiving method in clock synchronous mode (1) ...................................................... 2-131 Fig. 2.5.21 Receiving method in clock synchronous mode (2) ...................................................... 2-132
iii
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
List of figures
Fig. 2.5.22 Transmitting method in UART mode (1) ......................................................................2-133 Fig. 2.5.23 Transmitting method in UART mode (2) ......................................................................2-134 Fig. 2.5.24 Receiving method in UART mode (1) .......................................................................... 2-135 Fig. 2.5.25 Receiving method in UART mode (2) .......................................................................... 2-136 Fig. 2.6.1 External connection example of serial I/O2 ................................................................... 2-141 Fig. 2.6.2 Shift clock ......................................................................................................................2-142 Fig. 2.6.3 Transmit operation of serial I/O2 ...................................................................................2-144 Fig. 2.6.4 Transmit timing example of serial I/O2 .......................................................................... 2-144 Fig. 2.6.5 Receive operation of serical I/O2 ..................................................................................2-146 Fig. 2.6.6 Receive timing example of serial I/O2 ........................................................................... 2-146 Fig. 2.6.7 Transmit/receive timing example of serial I/O2 (P53/SRDY2 pin is used) ....................... 2-147 Fig. 2.6.8 Memory allocation of serial I/O2-related registers ......................................................... 2-149 Fig. 2.6.9 Structure of serial I/O2 control register .......................................................................... 2-149 Fig. 2.6.10 Structure of serial I/O2 register ....................................................................................2-151 Fig. 2.6.11 Transmitting method of serial I/O2 .............................................................................. 2-152 Fig. 2.6.12 Receiving method of serial I/O2 ..................................................................................2-153 Fig. 2.7.1 Memory allocation of LCD display-related registers ...................................................... 2-159 Fig. 2.7.2 Structure of segment output enable register ................................................................. 2-160 Fig. 2.7.3 Structure of LCD mode register ..................................................................................... 2-162 Fig. 2.7.4 Structure of port P0 direction register ............................................................................2-163 Fig. 2.7.5 Structure of port P1 direction register ............................................................................2-164 Fig. 2.7.6 Structure of PULL register A ..........................................................................................2-165 Fig. 2.7.7 Example of setting registers for LCD display (1) ........................................................... 2-166 Fig. 2.7.8 Example of setting registers for LCD display (2) ........................................................... 2-167 Fig. 2.7.9 8-segment LCD panel display pattern example when the duty ratio number is 4 ......... 2-168 Fig. 2.7.10 LCD panel example .....................................................................................................2-169 Fig. 2.7.11 Segment allocation example ....................................................................................... 2-169 Fig. 2.7.12 LCD display RAM setting example .............................................................................. 2-169 Fig. 2.7.13 Setting of related registers ........................................................................................... 2-170 Fig. 2.7.14 Control procedure ........................................................................................................2-171 Fig. 2.8.1 Internal reset signal output timing ..................................................................................2-173 Fig. 2.8.2 Structure of watchdog timer control register .................................................................. 2-175 Fig. 2.9.1 Oscillation stabilizing time at restoration by reset input ................................................. 2-177 Fig. 2.9.2 Execution sequence example at restoration by occurrence of INT0 interrupt request .. 2-179 Fig. 2.9.3 Reset input time .............................................................................................................2-182 Fig. 2.9.4 State transitions of internal clock ......................................................................................... 2-184 Fig. 2.10.1 Internal reset state hold/release timing ........................................................................ 2-185 Fig. 2.10.2 Internal processing sequence immediately after reset release ................................... 2-186 Fig. 2.10.3 Internal state of microcomputer immediately after reset release ................................. 2-187 Fig. 2.10.4 Poweron reset conditions ............................................................................................ 2-188 Fig. 2.10.5 Poweron reset circuit examples ...................................................................................2-188 Fig. 2.11.1 Oscillation circuit example using ceramic resonators .................................................. 2-190 Fig. 2.11.2 External clock input circuit example ............................................................................2-191 Fig. 2.11.3 Clock generating circuit block diagram ........................................................................ 2-192 Fig. 2.11.4 Structure of output control register ........................................................................... 2-193 Fig. 2.11.5 State transitions of internal clock ...................................................................................... 2-196 Fig. 2.11.6 Oscillation stabilizing time at poweron ......................................................................... 2-197 Fig. 2.11.7 Oscillation stabilizing time at reoscillation of XIN ....................................................................... 2-198
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
iv
List of figures CHAPTER 3. APPENDIX
Fig. 3.1.1 Pin configuration of EPROM version (top view) ................................................................ 3-5 Fig. 3.1.2 Pin configuration of One Time PROM version (top view) (1) ............................................. 3-6 Fig. 3.1.3 Pin configuration of One Time PROM version (top view) (2) ............................................. 3-7 Fig. 3.1.4 Functional block diagram of built-in PROM version ........................................................... 3-8 Fig. 3.1.5 Programming and testing of One Time PROM version (shipped in blank) ...................... 3-10 Fig. 3.2.1 Wiring for the RESET input pin ........................................................................................ 3-11 Fig. 3.2.2 Wiring for clock I/O pins ................................................................................................... 3-11 Fig. 3.2.3 Wiring for the VPP pin of the One Time PROM and the EPROM version ........................ 3-12 Fig. 3.2.4 Bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the VCC line ................................................... 3-12 Fig. 3.2.5 Analog signal line and a resistor and a capacitor ............................................................ 3-13 Fig. 3.2.6 Wiring for a large current signal line ................................................................................ 3-13 Fig. 3.2.7 Wiring to a signal line where potential levels change frequently ..................................... 3-14 Fig. 3.2.8 VSS pattern on the underside of an oscillator .................................................................. 3-14 Fig. 3.2.9 Setup for I/O ports ........................................................................................................... 3-14 Fig. 3.2.10 Watchdog timer by software .......................................................................................... 3-15 Fig. 3.3.1 Structure of port P0 and P1 direction registers ................................................................ 3-16 Fig. 3.3.2 Structure of port Pi (i = 2, 4 to 7) direction registers ........................................................ 3-16 Fig. 3.3.3 Structure of PULL register A ............................................................................................ 3-17 Fig. 3.3.4 Structure of PULL register B ............................................................................................ 3-17 Fig. 3.3.5 Structure of serial I/O1 status register ............................................................................. 3-18 Fig. 3.3.6 Structure of serial I/O1 control register ............................................................................ 3-19 Fig. 3.3.7 Structure of UART control register .................................................................................. 3-20 Fig. 3.3.8 Structure of serial I/O2 control register ............................................................................ 3-20 Fig. 3.3.9 Structure of timer X mode register ................................................................................... 3-21 Fig. 3.3.10 Structure of timer Y mode register ................................................................................. 3-22 Fig. 3.3.11 Structure of timer 123 mode register ............................................................................. 3-23 Fig. 3.3.12 Structure of output control register ............................................................................. 3-23 Fig. 3.3.13 Structure of watchdog timer control register .................................................................. 3-24 Fig. 3.3.14 Structure of segment output register ............................................................................. 3-24 Fig. 3.3.15 Structure of LCD mode register ..................................................................................... 3-25 Fig. 3.3.16 Structure of interrupt edge selection register ................................................................. 3-26 Fig. 3.3.17 Structure of CPU mode register .................................................................................... 3-26 Fig. 3.3.18 Structure of interrupt request register 1 ......................................................................... 3-27 Fig. 3.3.19 Structure of interrupt request register 2 ......................................................................... 3-27 Fig. 3.3.20 Structure of interrupt control register 1 .......................................................................... 3-28 Fig. 3.3.21 Structure of interrupt control register 2 .......................................................................... 3-28
v
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
List of tables
List of tables
CHAPTER 1. HARDWARE
Table 1 Pin description (1) ................................................................................................................. 1-5 Table 2 Pin description (2) ................................................................................................................. 1-6 Table 3 List of supported products (1) ............................................................................................... 1-8 Table 4 List of supported products (2) ............................................................................................... 1-9 Table 5 I/O ports functions .............................................................................................................. 1-15 Table 6 Interrupt vector addresses and priority ............................................................................... 1-19 Table 7 Maximum number of display pixels at each duty ratio ........................................................ 1-32 Table 8 Bias control and applied voltage to VL1-VL3 ........................................................................................ 1-34 Table 9 Duty ratio control and common pins used .......................................................................... 1-34 Table 10 Programming adapter ....................................................................................................... 1-46 Table 11 Absolute maximum ratings ...............................................................................................1-47 Table 12 Recommended operating conditions (1) ........................................................................... 1-47 Table 13 Recommended operating conditions (2) ........................................................................... 1-48 Table 14 Electrical characteristics (1) .............................................................................................. 1-49 Table 15 Electrical characteristics (2) .............................................................................................. 1-50 Table 16 Timing requirements 1 ...................................................................................................... 1-51 Table 17 Timing requirements 2 ...................................................................................................... 1-51 Table 18 Switching characteristics 1 ...............................................................................................1-52 Table 19 Switching characteristics 2 ...............................................................................................1-52 Table 20 Absolute maximum ratings (Extended operating temperature version) ............................ 1-53 Table 21 Recommended operating conditions (Extended operating temperature version) (1) ....... 1-53 Table 22 Recommended operating conditions (Extended operating temperature version) (2) ....... 1-54 Table 23 Electrical characteristics (Extended operating temperature version) (1) .......................... 1-55 Table 24 Electrical characteristics (Extended operating temperature version) (2) .......................... 1-56 Table 25 Timing requirements 1 (Extended operating temperature version) .................................. 1-57 Table 26 Timing requirements 2 (Extended operating temperature version) .................................. 1-57 Table 27 Switching characteristics 1 (Extended operating temperature version) ............................ 1-58 Table 28 Switching characteristics 2 (Extended operating temperature version) ............................ 1-58 Table 29 Absolute maximum ratings (Low power source voltage version) ..................................... 1-59 Table 30 Recommended operating conditions (Low power source voltage version) (1) ................. 1-59 Table 31 Recommended operating conditions (Low power source voltage version) (2) ................. 1-60 Table 32 Electrical characteristics (Low power source voltage version) (1) .................................... 1-61 Table 33 Electrical characteristics (Low power source voltage version) (2) .................................... 1-62 Table 34 Timing requirements 1 (Low power source voltage version) ............................................ 1-63 Table 35 Timing requirements 2 (Low power source voltage version) ............................................ 1-63 Table 36 Switching characteristics 1 (Low power source voltage version) ..................................... 1-64 Table 37 Switching characteristics 2 (Low power source voltage version) ..................................... 1-64
CHAPTER 2. APPLICATION
Table 2.1.1 Memory allocation of port registers ................................................................................ 2-3 Table 2.1.2 Memory allocation of port direction registers .................................................................. 2-4 Table 2.1.3 I/O ports which either pull-up or pull-down is controlled by software .............................. 2-5 Table 2.1.4 Termination of unused pins .......................................................................................... 2-14 Table 2.2.1 Interrupt sources and interrupt request generating conditions ..................................... 2-16 Table 2.2.2 List of interrupt bits for individual interrupt sources ...................................................... 2-20 Table 2.3.1 Real time ports and bits for storing data ....................................................................... 2-40 Table 2.3.2 Relation between timer X operating mode bits and operating modes .......................... 2-58 Table 2.3.3 Relation between timer Y operating mode bits and operating modes .......................... 2-61 Table 2.3.4 Table example for timer X setting value ....................................................................... 2-81 Table 2.3.5 Table example for RTP setting value ........................................................................... 2-81
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
i
List of tables
Table 2.4.1 Relation between timer 2 count source selection bit and count sources ...................... 2-94 Table 2.4.2 Relation between timer 3 count source selection bit and count sources ...................... 2-94 Table 2.4.3 Relation between timer 1 count source selection bit and count sources ...................... 2-94 Table 2.5.1 Baud rate selection table (reference values) .............................................................. 2-113 Table 2.5.2 Each bit function of UART transmit data .................................................................... 2-114 Table 2.5.3 Control contents of transmit enable bit ....................................................................... 2-125 Table 2.5.4 Control contents of receive enable bit ........................................................................ 2-126 Table 2.5.5 Relation between UART control register and transfer data formats ........................... 2-128 Table 2.6.1 Relation between internal synchronization clock selection bit and synchronizing clock ......................... 2-150 Table 2.7.1 Pin functions by setting segment output enable register ............................................ 2-156 Table 2.7.2 Pin functions by setting the corresponding registers when they are not used as segment output pins .. 2-157 Table 2.7.3 Setting of segment output pins for LCD display ......................................................... 2-157 Table 2.7.4 Setting of input port P3 and I/O ports P0, P1 ............................................................. 2-158 Table 2.7.5 Setting of pull-down pins ............................................................................................ 2-158 Table 2.8.1 Program runaway detection time (maximum) ............................................................. 2-173 Table 2.9.1 State in stop mode ...................................................................................................... 2-176 Table 2.9.2 State in wait mode ...................................................................................................... 2-181 Table 2.10.1 Timers 1 and 2 at reset ............................................................................................. 2-186
CHAPTER 3. APPENDIX
Table 3.1.1 Product expansion of built-in PROM version .................................................................. 3-3 Table 3.1.2 Performance overview of built-in PROM version ............................................................ 3-4
ii
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
CHAPTER 1 HARDWARE
DESCRIPTION FEATURES APPLICATIONS PIN CONFIGURATION FUNCTIONAL BLOCK PIN DESCRIPTION PART NUMBERING GROUP EXPANSION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION NOTES ON PROGRAMMING DATA REQUIRED FOR MASK ORDERS ROM PROGRAMMING METHOD
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 3820 Group Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
DESCRIPTION
The 3820 group is the 8-bit microcomputer based on the 740 family core technology. The 3820 group has the LCD drive control circuit and the serial I/ O as additional functions. The various microcomputers in the 3820 group include variations of internal memory size and packaging. For details, refer to the section on part numbering. For details on availability of microcomputers in the 3820 group, refer to the section on group expansion.
* LCD drive control circuit
Bias ................................................................................... 1/2, 1/3 Duty ............................................................................ 1/2, 1/3, 1/4 Common output .......................................................................... 4 Segment output ......................................................................... 40 2 Clock generating circuit Clock (XIN-XOUT) .................................. Internal feedback resistor Sub-clock (XCIN-XCOUT) .......... Without internal feedback resistor (connect to external ceramic resonator or quartz-crystal oscillator) Watchdog timer ............................................................. 15-bit ! 1 Power source voltage In high-speed mode .................................................... 4.0 to 5.5 V (at 8MHz oscillation frequency and high-speed selected) In middle-speed mode ................................................ 2.5 to 5.5 V (at 8MHz oscillation frequency and middle-speed selected) In low-speed mode ...................................................... 2.5 to 5.5 V (Extended operating temperature version: 3.0 V to 5.5 V) Power dissipation In high-speed mode ........................................................... 32 mW (at 8 MHz oscillation frequency) In low-speed mode .............................................................. 45 W (at 32 kHz oscillation frequency, at 3 V power source voltage) Operating temperature range ................................... - 20 to 85C (Extended operating temperature version: -40 to 85C)
*
* *
FEATURES
* Basic machine-language instructions ....................................... 71 * The minimum instruction execution time ............................ 0.5 s
(at 8MHz oscillation frequency)
* Memory size * * * * * *
ROM .................................................................. 4 K to 32 K bytes RAM ................................................................. 192 to 1024 bytes Programmable input/output ports ............................................. 43 Software pull-up/pull-down resistors (Ports P0-P7 except Port P40) Interrupts .................................................. 16 sources, 16 vectors (includes key input interrupt) Timers ........................................................... 8-bit ! 3, 16-bit ! 2 Serial I/O1 ..................... 8-bit ! 1 (UART or Clock-synchronized) Serial I/O2 .................................... 8-bit ! 1 (Clock-synchronized)
*
*
APPLICATIONS
Household appliances, consumer electronics, etc.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
P30/SEG16 P31/SEG17 P32/SEG18 P33/SEG19 P34/SEG20 P35/SEG21 P36/SEG22 P37/SEG23 P00/SEG24 P01/SEG25 P02/SEG26 P03/SEG27 P04/SEG28 P05/SEG29 P06/SEG30 P07/SEG31 P10/SEG32 P11/SEG33 P12/SEG34 P13/SEG35 P14/SEG36 P15/SEG37 P16/SEG38 P17/SEG39
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9 SEG8 VCC SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1
65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
40 39 38 37 36 35 34
M38203M4-XXXFP M38203M4-XXXFP
33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 VSS XOUT XIN P70/XCOUT P71/XCIN RESET P40 P41/
Fig. 1 Pin configuration of M38203M4-XXXFP
1-2
SEG0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 VL3 VL2 VL1 P61/RTP1 P60/INT3/RTP0 P57/INT2 P56/TOUT P55/CNTR1 P54/CNTR0 P53/SRDY2 P52/SCLK2 P51/SOUT2 P50/SIN2 P47/SRDY1 P46/SCLK1 P45/TXD P44/RXD P43/INT1 P42/INT0
Package type : 80P6N-A 80-pin plastic-molded QFP
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
P32/SEG18 P33/SEG19 P34/SEG20 P35/SEG21 P36/SEG22 P37/SEG23 P00/SEG24 P01/SEG25 P02/SEG26 P03/SEG27 P04/SEG28 P05/SEG29 P06/SEG30 P07/SEG31 P10/SEG32 P11/SEG33 P12/SEG34 P13/SEG35 P14/SEG36 P15/SEG37
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
P31/SEG17 P30/SEG16 SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9 SEG8 VCC SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 COM3
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
M38203M4-XXXGP M38203M4-XXXHP
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
P16/SEG38 P17/SEG39 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 VSS XOUT XIN P70/XCOUT P71/XCIN RESET P40 P41/ P42/INT0 P43/INT1
Package type : 80P6S-A/80P6D-A 80-pin plastic-molded QFP
Fig. 2 Pin configuration of M38203M4-XXXGP/ HP
COM2 COM1 COM0 VL3 VL2 VL1 P61/RTP1 P60/INT3/RTP0 P57/INT2 P56/TOUT P55/CNTR1 P54/CNTR0 P53/SRDY2 P52/SCLK2 P51/SOUT2 P50/SIN2 P47/SRDY1 P46/SCLK1 P45/TXD P44/RXD
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-3
RTP0,RTP1
XCIN P5(8) P4(8) P3(8)
INT0,INT1
Real time port function
INT2
Key-on wake up
1-4
Reset input RESET (5V) VCC
73 32
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM (Package : 80P6N-A)
Clock input XIN (0V) VSS
27
Clock output XOUT
30 28
31 29
Fig. 3 Functional block diagram
1
Data bus
Clock generating circuit CPU A ROM X Y S PCH Timer X(16) Timer Y(16) Timer 1(8) Timer 3(8) Timer 2(8) PS PCL LCD display RAM (20 bytes) RAM
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
VL1 VL2 VL3 LCD drive control circuit COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3
XCIN Subclock input
XCOUT Subclock output
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM (Package : 80P6N-A)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
SI/O2(8) TOUT CNTR0,CNTR1 SI/O1(8) P2(8) P1(8)
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Watchdog timer
RESET
SEG0 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 SEG7 SEG8 SEG9 SEG10 SEG11 SEG12 SEG13 SEG14 SEG15
XCOUT
P7(2)
P6(2)
P0(8) P0(8)
28 29
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
I/O port P7
I/O port P6
I/O port P5
I/O port P4
Input port P3
I/O port P2
I/O port P1
I/O port P0
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
PIN DESCRIPTION
Table 1. Pin description (1) Pin VCC VSS RESET XIN XOUT Reset input Clock input Clock output * Reset input pin for active "L" * Input and output pins for the main clock generating circuit. * Feedback resistor is built in between XIN pin and XOUT pin. * Connect a ceramic resonator or a quartz-crystal oscillator between the XIN and XOUT pins to set the oscillation frequency. * If an external clock is used, connect the clock source to the XIN pin and leave the XOUT pin open. * This clock is used as the oscillating source of system clock. * Input 0 VL1 VL2 VL3 VCC voltage * Input 0 - VL3 voltage to LCD * LCD common output pins * COM2 and COM3 are not used at 1/2 duty ratio. * COM3 is not used at 1/3 duty ratio. * LCD segment output pins 8-bit I/O port CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output structure I/O direction register allows each port to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-down control is enabled. * * * * 8-bit I/O port CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output structure I/O direction register allows each port to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-down control is enabled. 8-bit I/O port CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output structure I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled. * 8-bit Input port * CMOS compatible input level * Pull-down control is enabled. * 1-bit input pin * CMOS compatible input level * * * * 7-bit I/O port CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output structure I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled. * clock output pin * Interrupt input pins * Serial I/O1 function pins * * * * * Key input (key-on wake up) interrupt input pins * * * * * LCD segment pins Name Power source Function * Apply voltage of 2.5 V to 5.5 V to VCC, and 0 V to VSS. (Extended operating temperature version : 3.0 V to 5.5 V) Function except a port function
VL1 - VL3 COM0 - COM3
LCD power source Common output
SEG0 - SEG15 P00/SEG24 - P07/SEG31
Segment output I/O port P0
P10/SEG32 - P17/SEG39
I/O port P1
P20 - P27
I/O port P2
P30/SEG16 - P37/SEG23 P40 P41/ P42/INT0, P43/INT1 P44/RXD, P45/TXD, P46/SCLK1, P47/SRDY1
Input port P3
* LCD segment pins
Input port P4 I/O port P4
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-5
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 2. Pin description (2) Pin P50/SIN2, P51/SOUT2, P52/SCLK2, P53/SRDY2 P54/CNTR0, P55/CNTR1 P56/TOUT P57/INT2 P60/INT3/RTP0 P61/RTP1 I/O port P6 2-bit I/O port CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output structure I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled. * * * * 2-bit I/O port CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output structure I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled. * * * * Name I/O port P5 * * * * Function Function except a port function 8-bit I/O port CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output structure I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually programmed as either input or output. * Pull-up control is enabled. * Serial I/O2 function pins
* Timer function pins * Timer output pin * Interrupt input pin * Interrupt input pins(P60) * Real time port function pin
P70/XCOUT, P71/XCIN
I/O port P7
* Sub-clock generating circuit input pins (Connect a resonator. External clock cannot be used.)
1-6
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
PART NUMBERING
Product M3820 3 M 4 - XXX FP Package type FP : 80P6N-A package GP : 80P6S-A package HP : 80P6D-A package FS : 80D0 package ROM number Omitted in some types. Normally, using hyphen When electrical characteristic, or division of quality identification code using alphanumeric character - : standard D : Extended operating temperature version ROM/PROM size 1 : 4096 bytes 2 : 8192 bytes 3 : 12288 bytes 4 : 16384 bytes 5 : 20480 bytes 6 : 24576 bytes 7 : 28672 bytes 8 : 32768 bytes The first 128 bytes and the last 2 bytes of ROM are reserved areas ; they cannot be used. Memory type M : Mask ROM version E : EPROM or One Time PROM version RAM size 0 : 192 bytes 1 : 256 bytes 2 : 384 bytes 3 : 512 bytes 4 : 640 bytes 5 : 768 bytes 6 : 896 bytes 7 : 1024 bytes
Fig. 4 Part numbering
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-7
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
GROUP EXPANSION
Mitsubishi plans to expand the 3820 group as follows: (1) Support for mask ROM, One Time PROM, and EPROM versions (2) ROM/PROM size .......................................... 8 K to 32 K bytes RAM size ..................................................... 512 to 1024 bytes
(3) Packages 80P6N-A ............................. 0.8 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP 80P6S-A ........................... 0.65 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP 80P6D-A ............................. 0.5 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP 80D0 ................ 0.8 mm-pitch ceramic LCC (EPROM version)
Memory Expansion Plan
ROM size (bytes) 32K New product M38207M8/E8
28K
24K
20K Mass product 16K M38203M4/E4
12K
8K
4K
192 256
384
512 RAM size (bytes)
640
768
896
1024
Products under development: the development schedule and specification may be revised without notice. Fig. 5 Memory expansion plan (1) Currently supported products are listed below. Table 3. List of supported products (1) Product M38203M4-XXXFP M38203E4-XXXFP M38203E4FP M38203M4-XXXGP M38203E4-XXXGP M38203E4GP M38203M4-XXXHP M38203E4-XXXHP M38203E4HP M38203E4FS M38207M8-XXXFP M38207E8-XXXFP M38207E8FP M38207M8-XXXGP M38207E8-XXXGP M38207E8GP M38207M8-XXXHP M38207E8-XXXHP M38207E8HP M38207E8FS (P) ROM size (bytes) ROM size for User in ( ) RAM size (bytes) Package Remarks Mask ROM version One Time PROM version One Time PROM version (blank) Mask ROM version One Time PROM version One Time PROM version (blank) Mask ROM version One Time PROM version One Time PROM version (blank) EPROM version Mask ROM version One Time PROM version One Time PROM version (blank) Mask ROM version One Time PROM version One Time PROM version (blank) Mask ROM version One Time PROM version One Time PROM version (blank) EPROM version
As of April 1995
80P6N-A
16384 (16254)
512
80P6S-A
80P6D-A 80D0 80P6N-A
32768 (32638)
1024
80P6S-A
80P6D-A 80D0
1-8
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
GROUP EXPANSION (EXTENDED OPERATING TEMPERATURE VERSION)
Mitsubishi plans to expand the 3820 group (extended operating temperature version) as follows: (1) Support for mask ROM, One Time PROM, and EPROM versions
(2) ROM size ................................................... 16 K to 32 K bytes RAM size ..................................................... 512 to 1024 bytes (3) Packages 80P6N-A ............................. 0.8 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP
Memory Expansion Plan
ROM size (bytes) 32K New product M38207M8D
28K
24K
20K New product 16K M38203M4D
12K
8K
4K
192 256
384
512 RAM size (bytes)
640
768
896
1024
Products under development: the development schedule and specification may be revised without notice. Fig. 6 Memory expansion plan (2)
Currently supported products are listed below. Table 4. List of supported products (2) Product M38203M4DXXXFP M38207M8DXXXFP ROM size (bytes) ROM size for User in ( ) 16384(16254) 32768(32638) RAM size (bytes) 512 1024 Package 80P6N-A 80P6N-A Mask ROM version Mask ROM version Remarks As of April 1995
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-9
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
(3) Packages 80P6N-A ............................. 0.8 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP 80P6S-A ........................... 0.65 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP 80P6D-A ............................. 0.5 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP 80D0 ................ 0.8 mm-pitch ceramic LCC (EPROM version)
GROUP EXPANSION (LOW POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE VERSION)
Mitsubishi plans to expand the 3820 group (low power source voltage version) as follows: (1) Support for mask ROM, One Time PROM, and EPROM versions (2) ROM/PROM size .......................................... 8 K to 32 K bytes RAM size ..................................................... 512 to 1024 bytes
Memory Expansion Plan
ROM size (bytes) 32K
28K
24K
20K New product 16K M38203M4L
12K New product 8K M38203M2L
4K
192 256
384
512 RAM size (bytes)
640
768
896
1024
Products under development: the development schedule and specification may be revised without notice. Fig. 7 Memory expansion plan (3)
Currently supported products are listed below. Table 5. List of supported products (3) Product M38203M2L-XXXFP M38203M2L-XXXGP M38203M2L-XXXHP M38203M4L-XXXFP M38203M4L-XXXGP M38203M4L-XXXHP ROM size (bytes) ROM size for User in ( ) 8192 (8062) 512 16384 (16254) RAM size (bytes) Package 80P6N-A 80P6S-A 80P6D-A 80P6N-A 80P6S-A 80P6D-A Mask ROM version Mask ROM version Mask ROM version Mask ROM version Mask ROM version Mask ROM version Remarks As of April 1995
1-10
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Central Processing Unit (CPU)
The 3820 group uses the standard 740 family instruction set. Refer to the table of 740 family addressing modes and machine instructions or the SERIES 740 User's Manual for details on the instruction set. Machine-resident 740 family instructions are as follows: The FST and SLW instruction cannot be used. The STP, WIT, MUL, and DIV instruction can be used.
CPU Mode Register
The CPU mode register is allocated at address 003B16. The CPU mode register contains the stack page selection bit and the internal system clock selection bit.
7
0
CPU mode register
(CPUM (CM) : address 003B16)
Processor mode bits b1 b0 0 0 : Single-chip mode 0 1: 1 0 : Not available 1 1: Stack page selection bit 0 : 0 page 1 : 1 page Not used (returns "1" when read) (Do not write "0" to this bit) Port XC switch bit 0 : I/O port 1 : XCIN, XCOUT Main clock ( X IN-XOUT) stop bit 0 : Oscillating 1 : Stopped Main clock division ratio selection bit 0 : f(XIN)/2 (high-speed mode) 1 : f(XIN)/8 (middle-speed mode) Internal system clock selection bit 0 : XIN-XOUT selected (middle-/high-speed mode) 1 : XCIN-XCOUT selected (low-speed mode)
Fig. 8 Structure of CPU mode register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-11
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
MEMORY Special Function Register (SFR) Area
The Special Function Register area in the zero page contains control registers such as I/O ports and timers.
Zero Page
The 256 bytes from addresses 000016 to 00FF16 are called the zero page area. The internal RAM and the special function registers (SFR) are allocated to this area. The zero page addressing mode can be used to specify memory and register addresses in the zero page area. Access to this area with only 2 bytes is possible in the zero page addressing mode.
RAM
RAM is used for data storage and for stack area of subroutine calls and interrupts.
Special Page ROM
The first 128 bytes and the last 2 bytes of ROM are reserved for device testing and the rest is user area for storing programs. The 256 bytes from addresses FF0016 to FFFF16 are called the special page area. The special page addressing mode can be used to specify memory addresses in the special page area. Access to this area with only 2 bytes is possible in the special page addressing mode.
Interrupt Vector Area
The interrupt vector area contains reset and interrupt vectors.
RAM area
RAM size (bytes) Address XXXX16
000016
SFR area Zero page
192 256 384 512 640 768 896 1024
00FF16 013F16 01BF16 023F16 02BF16 033F16 03BF16 043F16
004016 LCD display RAM area 005416 010016
RAM
XXXX16 Reserved area 044016
ROM area
ROM size (bytes) Address YYYY16 Address ZZZZ16
Not used YYYY16
4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768
F00016 E00016 D00016 C00016 B00016 A00016 900016 800016
F08016 E08016 D08016 C08016 B08016 A08016 908016 808016
Reserved ROM area
(128 bytes)
ZZZZ16
ROM FF0016 FFDC16 Interrupt vector area FFFE16 FFFF16 Reserved ROM area Special page
Fig. 9 Memory map diagram
1-12
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
000016 000116 000216 000316 000416 000516 000616 000716 000816 000916 000A16 000B16 000C16 000D16 000E16 000F16 001016 001116 001216 001316 001416 001516 001616 001716 001816 001916 001A16 001B16 001C16 001D16 001E16 001F16
Port P0 (P0) Port P0 direction register (P0D) Port P1 (P1) Port P1 direction register (P1D) Port P2 (P2) Port P2 direction register (P2D) Port P3 (P3)
002016 002116 002216 002316 002416 002516 002616 002716
Timer X (low-order) (TXL) Timer X (high-order) (TXH) Timer Y (low-order) (TYL) Timer Y (high-order) (TYH) Timer 1 (T1) Timer 2 (T2) Timer 3 (T3) Timer X mode register (TXM) Timer Y mode register (TYM) Timer 123 mode register (T123M) output control register (CKOUT)
Port P4 (P4) Port P4 direction register (P4D) Port P5 (P5) Port P5 direction register (P5D) Port P6 (P6) Port P6 direction register (P6D) Port P7 (P7) Port P7 direction register (P7D)
002816 002916 002A16 002B16 002C16 002D16 002E16 002F16 003016 003116 003216 003316 003416 003516
PULL register A (PULLA) PULL register B (PULLB) Transmit/Receive buffer register (TB/RB) Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS) Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON) UART control register (UARTCON) Baud rate generator (BRG) Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON)
003616 003716 003816 003916 003A16 003B16 003C16 003D16 003E16 Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON) Segment output enable register (SEG) LCD mode register (LM) Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE) CPU mode register (CPUM) Interrupt request register 1(IREQ1) Interrupt request register 2(IREQ2) Interrupt control register 1(ICON1) Interrupt control register 2(ICON2)
Serial I/O2 register (SIO2)
003F16
Fig. 10 Memory map of special function register (SFR)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-13
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
I/O PORTS Direction Registers (ports P2, P41-P47, and P5-P7)
The 3820 group has 43 programmable I/O pins arranged in seven I/O ports (ports P0-P2 and P4-P7). The I/O ports P2, P41-P47, and P5-P7 have direction registers which determine the input/output direction of each individual pin. Each bit in a direction register corresponds to one pin, each pin can be set to be input port or output port. When "0" is written to the bit corresponding to a pin, that pin becomes an input pin. When "1" is written to that bit, that pin becomes an output pin. If data is read from a pin set to output, the value of the port output latch is read, not the value of the pin itself. Pins set to input are floating. If a pin set to input is written to, only the port output latch is written to and the pin remains floating.
7
0 PULL register A (PULLA : address 0016 16) P00-P07 pull-down P10-P17 pull-down P20-P27 pull-up P30-P37 pull-down P70, P71 pull-up Not used (return "0" when read)
7
0 PULL register B (PULLB : address 0017 16) P41-P43 pull-up P44-P47 pull-up P50-P53 pull-up P54-P57 pull-up P60, P61 pull-up Not used (return "0" when read) 0 : No pull-up (no pull-down) 1 : Pull-up (pull-down) Note : For ports set for the output mode, pull-up or pull-down is impossible.
Direction Registers (ports P0 and P1)
Ports P0 and P1 have direction registers which determine the input /output direction of each individual port. Each port in a direction register corresponds to one port, each port can be set to be input or output. When "0" is written to the bit 0 of a direction register, that port becomes an input port. When "1" is written to that port, that port becomes an output port. Bits 1 to 7 of ports P0 and P1 direction registers are not used.
Fig. 11 Structure of PULL register A and PULL register B
Ports P3 and P40
These ports are only for input.
Pull-up/Pull-down Control
By setting the PULL register A (address 001616) or the PULL register B (address 001716), ports except for port P40 can control either pull-down or pull-up (pins that are shared with the segment output pins for LCD are pull-down; all other pins are pull-up) with a program. However, the contents of PULL register A and PULL register B do not affect ports programmed as the output ports.
1-14
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 6. I/O ports functions Pin P00/SEG24- P07/SEG31 P10/SEG32- P17/SEG39 Name Port P0 Input/Output Input/output, individual ports Input/output, individual ports Input/output, individual bits I/O Format CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output CMOS compatible input level CMOS compatible input level clock output PULL register B output control register PULL register B Interrupt edge selection register PULL register B Serial I/O1 control register Serial I/O1 status register UART control register PULL register B Serial I/O2 control register PULL register B Timer X mode register PULL register B Timer Y mode register PULL register B Timer 123 mode register PULL register B Interrupt edge selection register PULL register B Timer X mode register Interrupt edge selection register PULL register B Timer X mode register PULL register A CPU mode register LCD mode register Non-Port Function LCD segment output Related SFRs PULL register A Segment output enable register PULL register A Segment output enable register PULL register A Interrupt control register 2 PULL register A Segment output enable register Diagram No.
(1)
Port P1
LCD segment output Key input(Key-on wake up) interrupt input LCD segment output
P20 - P27
Port P2
(2)
P30/SEG16- P37/SEG23 P40
Port P3
Input
(3)
Input
(4)
P41/
(5)
P42/INT0, P43/INT1 P44/RXD P45/TXD P46/SCLK1 P47/SRDY1 P50/SIN2 P51/SOUT2 P52/SCLK2 P53/SRDY2 P54/CNTR0
Port P4
Input/output, individual bits
CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output
External interrupt input
(2) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (10) (15)
Serial I/O1 function I/O
Serial I/O2 function I/O
Port P5 P55/CNTR1 P56/TOUT
Input/output, individual bits
CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output
Timer I/O Timer I/O Timer output
P57/INT2
External interrupt input
(2)
P60/INT3/RTP0 Port P6 P61/RTP1 P70/XCOUT Port P7 P71/XCIN COM0-COM3 SEG0-SEG15 Common Segment Input/output, individual bits
CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output
External interrupt input Real time port function output Real time port function output Sub-clock generating circuit I/O
(16)
Input/output, individual bits output output
CMOS compatible input level CMOS 3-state output LCD common output LCD segment output
(17) (18) (19) (20)
Note : Make sure that the input level at each pin is either 0 V or VCC during execution of the STP instruction. When an input level is at an intermediate potential, a current will flow from VCC to VSS through the input-stage gate.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-15
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
(1)Ports P0,P1
VL2/VL3
(2)Ports P2,P42,P43,P57
Pull-up control VL1/VSS
Segment output enable bit
(Note) Direction register Direction register
Data bus Data bus Port latch
Port latch
Key input (Key-on wake up) interrupt input INT0-INT2 interrupt input Pull-down control Segment output enable bit Note. Bit 0 of port P0 direction register and port P1 direction register.
(3)Ports P30-P37
VL2/VL3
(4)Port P40
Data bus VL1/VSS Data bus Pull-down control Segment output enable bit
(5)Port P41
Pull-up control
(6)Port P44
Pull-up control Serial I/O1 enable bit Reception enable bit
Direction register Direction register
Data bus
Port latch Data bus Port latch
output control bit Serial I/O1 input
(7)Port P45
(8)Port P46
Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit Serial I/O1 enable bit Serial I/O1 mode selection bit Serial I/O1 enable bit
Direction register
Pull-up control P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit Serial I/O1 enable bit Transmission enable bit
Direction register
Pull-up control
Data bus
Port latch
Data bus
Port latch
Serial I/O1 output
Serial I/O1 clock output Serial I/O1 clock input
Fig. 12 Port block diagram (1)
1-16
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
(9) Port P47
Pull-up control
(10) Ports P50,P55
Pull-up control
Serial I/O1 mode selection bit Serial I/O1 enable bit SRDY1 output enable bit
Direction register
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Data bus
Port latch
Serial I/O1 ready output
Serial I/O2 input CNTR1 interrupt input
(11) Port P51
(12) Port P52
Internal synchronization clock select bits Serial I/O2 port selection bit
Direction register Direction register
Pull-up control Serial I/O2 transmit completion signal Serial I/O2 port selection bit
Pull-up control
Data bus
Port latch
Data bus
Port latch
Serial I/O2 output
Serial I/O2 clock output Serial I/O2 clock input
(13) Port P53
Pull-up control SRDY2 output enable bit
Direction register
(14) Port P54
Pull-up control
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Data bus
Port latch
Serial I/O2 ready output
Timer X operating mode bit (Pulse output mode selection) Timer output CNTR0 interrupt input
(15) Port P56
Pull-up control
(16) Ports P60, P61
Pull-up control
Direction register
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Data bus
Port latch
TOUT output control bit Timer output
Real time port control bit Data for real time port INT3 interrupt input Except P61
Fig. 13 Port block diagram (2)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-17
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
(17) Port P70
Port selection/Pull-up control Port XC switch bit
Direction register
(18) Port P71
Port selection/Pull-up control Port XC switch bit
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Data bus
Port latch
Oscillation circuit Port P71 Port XC switch bit Sub-clock generating circuit input
(19) COM0 -COM3
(20) SEG0 - SEG15
VL2/VL3
VL3 VL1/VSS VL2 VL1
The gate input signal of each transistor is controlled by the LCD duty ratio and the bias value.
The voltage applied to the sources of P-channel and N-channel transistors is the controlled voltage by the bias value.
VSS
Fig. 14 Port block diagram (3)
1-18
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
INTERRUPTS
Interrupts occur by sixteen sources: seven external, eight internal, and one software.
Interrupt Operation
When an interrupt is received, the contents of the program counter and processor status register are automatically stored into the stack. The interrupt disable flag is set to inhibit other interrupts from interfering.The corresponding interrupt request bit is cleared and the interrupt jump destination address is read from the vector table into the program counter.
Interrupt Control
Each interrupt is controlled by an interrupt request bit, an interrupt enable bit, and the interrupt disable flag except for the software interrupt set by the BRK instruction. An interrupt occurs if the corresponding interrupt request and enable bits are "1" and the interrupt disable flag is "0". Interrupt enable bits can be set or cleared by software. Interrupt request bits can be cleared by software, but cannot be set by software. The BRK instruction cannot be disabled with any flag or bit. The I (interrupt disable) flag disables all interrupts except the BRK instruction interrupt.
Notes on Use
When the active edge of an external interrupt (INT0-INT3, CNTR0, or CNTR1) is changed, the corresponding interrupt request bit may also be set. Therefore, please take following sequence; (1) Disable the external interrupt which is selected. (2) Change the active edge selection. (3) Clear the interrupt request bit which is selected to "0". (4) Enable the external interrupt which is selected.
Table 7. Interrupt vector addresses and priority Interrupt Source Reset (Note 2) INT0 INT1 Serial I/O1 receive Serial I/O1 transmit Timer X Timer Y Timer 2 Timer 3 CNTR0 CNTR1 Timer 1 INT2 INT3 Key input (Key-on wake up) Serial I/O2 BRK instruction Priority 1 2 3 4 Vector Addresses (Note 1) Low High FFFC16 FFFD16 FFFB16 FFF916 FFF716 FFFA16 FFF816 FFF616 Interrupt Request Generating Conditions At reset At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT0 input At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT1 input At completion of serial I/O1 data reception At completion of serial I/O1 transmit shift or when transmit buffer register is empty At timer X underflow At timer Y underflow At timer 2 underflow At timer 3 underflow At detection of either rising or falling edge of CNTR0 input At detection of either rising or falling edge of CNTR1 input At timer 1 underflow At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT2 input At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT3 input At falling of conjunction of input level for port P2 (at input mode) At completion of serial I/O2 data transmission or reception At BRK instruction execution Remarks Non-maskable External interrupt (active edge selectable) External interrupt (active edge selectable) Valid when serial I/O1 is selected
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
FFF516 FFF316 FFF116 FFEF16 FFED16 FFEB16 FFE916 FFE716 FFE516 FFE316 FFE116 FFDF16 FFDD16
FFF416 FFF216 FFF016 FFEE16 FFEC16 FFEA16 FFE816 FFE616 FFE416 FFE216 FFE016 FFDE16 FFDC16
Valid when serial I/O1 is selected
External interrupt (active edge selectable) External interrupt (active edge selectable) External interrupt (active edge selectable) External interrupt (active edge selectable) External interrupt (valid when an "L" level is applied) Valid when serial I/O2 is selected Non-maskable software interrupt
Note 1: Vector addresses contain interrupt jump destination addresses. 2: Reset function in the same way as an interrupt with the highest priority.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-19
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Interrupt request bit Interrupt enable bit
Interrupt disable flag (I)
BRK instruction Reset
Interrupt request
Fig. 15 Interrupt control
7
0 Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE : address 003A16) INT0 interrupt edge selection bit INT1 interrupt edge selection bit INT2 interrupt edge selection bit INT3 interrupt edge selection bit Not used (return "0" when read) 0 : Falling edge active 1 : Rising edge active 7 0 Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2 : address 003D16) CNTR0 interrupt request bit CNTR1 interrupt request bit Timer 1 interrupt request bit INT2 interrupt request bit INT3 interrupt request bit Key input interrupt request bit Serial I/O2 interrupt request bit Not used (returns "0" when read) 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued
7
0
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1 : address 003C16) INT0 interrupt request bit INT1 interrupt request bit Serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit Timer X interrupt request bit Timer Y interrupt request bit Timer 2 interrupt request bit Timer 3 interrupt request bit
7
0 Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1 : address 003E16) INT0 interrupt enable bit INT1 interrupt enable bit Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit Timer X interrupt enable bit Timer Y interrupt enable bit Timer 2 interrupt enable bit Timer 3 interrupt enable bit
7 0
0 Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2 : address 003F16) CNTR0 interrupt enable bit CNTR1 interrupt enable bit Timer 1 interrupt enable bit INT2 interrupt enable bit INT3 interrupt enable bit Key input interrupt enable bit Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit Not used (returns "0" when read) (Do not write "1" to this bit) 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled
Fig. 16 Structure of interrupt-related registers
1-20
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Key Input Interrupt (Key-on Wake Up)
A Key input interrupt request is generated by applying "L" level to any pin of port P3 that have been set to input mode. In other words, it is generated when AND of input level goes from "1" to "0".
An example of using a key input interrupt is shown in Figure 9, where an interrupt request is generated by pressing one of the keys consisted as an active-low key matrix which inputs to ports P20-P23.
Port PXx "L" level output PULL register A Bit 2 = "1" Port P27 direction register = "1" Port P27 latch
Key input interrupt request
V
VV
P27 output
V
VV
Port P2 6 direction register = "1" Port P26 latch
P26 output
V
VV
Port P25 direction register = "1" Port P25 latch
P25 output
V
VV
Port P24 direction register = "1" Port P24 latch
P24 output
V
VV
Port P23 direction register = "0" Port P23 latch
Port P2 Input reading circuit
P23 input
V
VV
Port P22 direction register = "0" Port P22 latch
P22 input
V
VV
Port P21 direction register = "0" Port P21 latch
P21 input
V
VV
Port P20 direction register = "0" Port P20 latch
P20 input
V VV
P-channel transistor for pull-up CMOS output buffer
Fig. 17 Connection example when using key input interrupt and port P2 block diagram
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-21
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
TIMERS
The 3820 group has five timers: timer X, timer Y, timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3. Timer X and timer Y are 16-bit timers, and timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3 are 8-bit timers. All timers are down count timers. When the timer reaches "0016", an underflow occurs at the next count pulse and the corresponding timer latch is reloaded into the timer and the count is continued. When a timer underflows, the interrupt request bit corresponding to that timer is set to "1".
Read and write operation on 16-bit timer must be performed for both high and low-order bytes. When reading a 16-bit timer, read the high-order byte first. When writing to a 16-bit timer, write the low-order byte first. The 16-bit timer cannot perform the correct operation when reading during the write operation, or when writing during the read operation.
Real time port control bit "1" P60 P60 direction register "0"
Data bus QD Latch P60 data for real time port
P60 latch Real time port control bit "1" P61 P61 direction register "0" P61 latch
QD Latch
P61 data for real time port Real time port control bit "0" "1" Timer X stop control bit Timer X (low) latch (8) Timer X (low) (8)
Timer X mode register write signal
f(XIN)/16 (f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode*) CNTR0 active edge switch bit "0" Timer X operating mode bit "00","01","11"
Timer X write control bit Timer X (high) latch (8) Timer X (high) (8) Timer X interrupt request CNTR0 interrupt request
P54/CNTR0
"10" "1" Pulse width measurement CNTR0 active mode edge switch bit "0"
Pulse output mode QS T Q Rising edge detection Timer Y operating mode bit "00","01","10"
Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode
"1" P54 direction register P54 latch Pulse output mode
CNTR1 interrupt request
"11"
Period measurement mode
P55/CNTR1
CNTR1 active edge switch bit "0"
Falling edge detection f(XIN)/16 (f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode*) Timer Y stop control bit "00","01","11" Timer Y (low) latch (8) Timer Y (low) (8)
Timer Y (high) latch (8) Timer Y (high) (8) Timer Y interrupt request
"1"
"10"Timer Y operating mode bit
f(XIN)/16 (f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode*) Timer 1 count source selection bit "0" XCIN "1" Timer 2 count source selection bit Timer 2 latch (8) "0" Timer 2 (8) "1"
f(XIN)/16 (f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode*)
Timer 2 write control bit
Timer 1 interrupt request Timer 2 interrupt request
Timer 1 latch (8) Timer 1 (8)
TOUT output TOUT output control bit active edge switch bit "0" QS P56/TOUT P56 direction register "1" P56 latch Q "0" T Timer 3 latch (8) Timer 3 (8) "1" Timer 3 count source selection bit Timer 3 interrupt request
TOUT output control bit f(XIN)/16(f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode*) * Internal clock = XCIN/2.
Fig. 18 Timer block diagram
1-22
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timer X
Timer X is a 16-bit timer that can be selected in one of four modes and can be controlled the timer X write and the real time port by setting the timer X mode register. Timer mode The timer counts f(XIN)/16 (or f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode). Pulse output mode Each time the timer underflows, a signal output from the CNTR0 pin is inverted. Except for this, the operation in pulse output mode is the same as in timer mode. When using a timer in this mode, set the corresponding port P54 direction register to output mode. Event counter mode The timer counts signals input through the CNTR0 pin. Except for this, the operation in event counter mode is the same as in timer mode. When using a timer in this mode, set the corresponding port P54 direction register to input mode. Pulse width measurement mode The count source is f(XIN)/16 (or f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode. If CNTR0 active edge switch bit is "0", the timer counts while the input signal of CNTR0 pin is at "H". If it is "1", the timer counts while the input signal of CNTR0 pin is at "L". When using a timer in this mode, set the corresponding port P54 direction register to input mode.
Note on CNTR0 Interrupt Active Edge Selection
CNTR0 interrupt active edge depends on the CNTR0 active edge switch bit.
Real Time Port Control
While the real time port function is valid, data for the real time port are output from por ts P60 and P61 each time the timer X underflows. (However, after rewriting a data for real time port, if the real time port control bit is changed from "0" to "1", data is output without the timer X.) If the data for the real time port is changed while the real time port function is valid, the changed data are output at the next underflow of timer X. Before using this function, set the corresponding port direction registers to output mode.
7
0
Timer X mode register (TXM : address 002716) Timer X write control bit 0 : Write value in latch and counter 1 : Write value in latch only Real time port control bit 0 : Real time port function invalid 1 : Real time port function valid P60 data for real time port 0 : "L" level output 1 : "H" level output P61 data for real time port 0 : "L" level output 1 : "H" level output Timer X operating mode bits b5 b4 0 0 : Timer mode 0 1 : Pulse output mode 1 0 : Event counter mode 1 1 : Pulse width measurement mode CNTR0 active edge switch bit * CNTR0 interrupt 0 : Falling edge active 1 : Rising edge active * Pulse output mode 0 : Start at initial level "H" output 1 : Start at initial level "L" output * Event counter mode 0 : Rising edge active 1 : Falling edge active * Pulse width measurement mode 0 : Measure "H" level width 1 : Measure "L" level width Timer X stop control bit 0 : Count start 1 : Count stop
Timer X Write Control
If the timer X write control bit is "0", when the value is written in the address of timer X, the value is loaded in the timer X and the latch at the same time. If the timer X write control bit is "1", when the value is written in the address of timer X, the value is loaded only in the latch. The value in the latch is loaded in timer X after timer X underflows. If the value is written in latch only, unexpected value may be set in the high-order counter when the writing in high-order latch and the underflow of timer X are performed at the same timing.
Fig. 19 Structure of timer X mode register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-23
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timer Y
Timer Y is a 16-bit timer that can be selected in one of four modes. Timer mode The timer counts f(XIN)/16 (or f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode). Period measurement mode CNTR1 interrupt request is generated at rising/falling edge of CNTR1 pin input signal. Simultaneously, the value in timer Y latch is reloaded in timer Y and timer Y continues counting down/Except for the above-mentioned, the operation in period measurement mode is the same as in timer mode. The timer value just before the reloading at rising/falling of CNTR1 pin input signal is retained until the timer Y is read once after the reload. The rising/falling timing of CNTR1 pin input signal is found by CNTR1 interrupt. When using a timer in this mode, set the corresponding port P55 direction register to input mode. Event counter mode The timer counts signals input through the CNTR1 pin. Except for this, the operation in event counter mode is the same as in timer mode. When using a timer in this mode, set the corresponding port P55 direction register to input mode. Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode CNTR1 interrupt request is generated at both rising and falling edges of CNTR1 pin input signal. Except for this, the operation in pulse width HL continuously measurement mode is the same as in period measurement mode. When using a timer in this mode, set the corresponding port P55 direction register to input mode.
7 0
Timer Y mode register (TYM : address 002816) Not used (return "0" when read) Timer Y operating mode bits b5 b4 0 0 : Timer mode 0 1 : Period measurement mode 1 0 : Event counter mode 1 1 : Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode CNTR1 active edge switch bit * CNTR1 interrupt 0 : Falling edge active 1 : Rising edge active * Period measurement mode 0 : Measure falling edge to falling edge 1 : Measure rising edge to rising edge * Event counter mode 0 : Rising edge active 1 : Falling edge active Timer Y stop control bit 0 : Count start 1 : Count stop
Fig. 20 Structure of timer Y mode register
Note on CNTR1 Interrupt Active Edge Selection
CNTR1 interrupt active edge depends on the CNTR1 active edge switch bit. However, in pulse width HL continuously measurement mode, CNTR1 interrupt request is generated at both rising and falling edges of CNTR1 pin input signal regardless of the setting of CNTR1 active edge switch bit.
1-24
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timer 1, Timer 2, Timer 3
Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3 are 8-bit timers. The count source for each timer can be selected by timer 123 mode register. The timer latch value is not affected by a change of the count source. However, because changing the count source may cause an inadvertent count down of the timer. Therefore, rewrite the value of timer whenever the count source is changed.
7
0
Timer 123 mode register (T123M :address 002916) TOUT output active edge switch bit 0 : Start at "H" output 1 : Start at "L" output TOUT output control bit 0 : TOUT output disabled 1 : TOUT output enabled Timer 2 write control bit 0 : Write value in latch and counter 1 : Write value in latch only Timer 2 count source selection bit 0 : Timer 1 underflow 1 : f(XIN)/16 (Middle-/high-speed mode) f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode)(Note) Timer 3 count source selection bit 0 : Timer 1 underflow 1 : f(XIN)/16 (Middle-/high-speed mode) f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode)(Note) Timer 1 count source selection bit 0 : f(XIN)/16 (Middle-/high-speed mode) f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode)(Note) 1 : f(XCIN) Not used (return "0" when read) Note : Internal clock is f (XCIN)/2 in the low-speed mode.
Timer 2 Write Control
If the timer 2 write control bit is "0", when the value is written in the address of timer 2, the value is loaded in the timer 2 and the latch at the same time. If the timer 2 write control bit is "1", when the value is written in the address of timer 2, the value is loaded only in the latch. The value in the latch is loaded in timer 2 after timer 2 underflows.
Timer 2 Output Control
When the timer 2 (TOUT) is output enabled, an inversion signal from pin TOUT is output each time timer 2 underflows. In this case, set the port P56 shared with the port TOUT to the output mode.
Note on Timer 1 to Timer 3
When the count source of timer 1 to 3 is changed, the timer counting value may be changed large because a thin pulse is generated in count input of timer . If timer 1 output is selected as the count source of timer 2 or timer 3, when timer 1 is written, the counting value of timer 2 or timer 3 may be changed large because a thin pulse is generated in timer 1 output. Therefore, set the value of timer in the order of timer 1, timer 2 and timer 3 after the count source selection of timer 1 to 3.
Fig. 21 Structure of timer 123 mode register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-25
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
SERIAL I/O1
Serial I/O1 can be used as either clock synchronous or asynchronous (UART) serial I/O1. A dedicated timer (baud rate generator) is also provided for baud rate generation.
Clock Synchronous Serial I/O Mode
Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode can be selected by setting the mode selection bit of the serial I/O1 control register to "1". For clock synchronous serial I/O1, the transmitter and the receiver must use the same clock. If an internal clock is used, transfer is started by a write signal to the TB/RB (address 001816).
Data bus Serial I/O1 control register Address 001A16
Address 001816
Receive buffer register (RB)
Receive buffer full flag (RBF) Serial I/O receive interrupt request (RI) Clock control circuit
P44/RXD
Receive shift register Shift clock
P46/SCLK1 Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit Frequency division ratio 1/(n+1) Baud rate generator Address 001C16 1/4
f(XIN) XIN
BRG count source selection bit 1/4
P47/SRDY1
F/F
Falling-edge detector Shift clock
Clock control circuit Transmit shift register shift completion flag (TSC) Transmit interrupt source selection bit Serial I/O transmit interrupt request (TI) Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE) Serial I/O1 status register Address 001916
P45/TXD
Transmit shift register
Transmit buffer register (TB)
Address 001816 Data bus
Fig. 22 Block diagram of clock synchronous serial I/O1
Transfer shift clock (1/2 to 1/2048 of the internal clock, or an external clock) Serial output TxD Serial input RxD D0 D0 D1 D1 D2 D2 D3 D3 D4 D4 D5 D5 D6 D6 D7 D7
Receive enable signal SRDY1
Write signal to receive/transmit buffer register (address 001816)
TBE = 0
TBE = 1 TSC = 0
RBF = 1 TSC = 1 Overrun error (OE) detection
Notes 1 : The serial I/O1 transmit interrupt (TI) can be selected to occur either when the transmit buffer register has emptied (TBE=1) or after the transmit shift operation has ended (TSC=1), by setting the transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) of the serial I/O1 control register. 2 : If data is written to the transmit buffer register when TSC=0, the transmit clock is generated continuously and serial data is output continuously from the TxD pin. 3 : The serial I/O1 receive interrupt (RI) is set when the receive buffer full flag (RBF) becomes "1" .
Fig. 23 Operation of clock synchronous serial I/O1 function
1-26
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Asynchronous Serial I/O1 (UART) Mode
Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 mode (UART) can be selected by clearing the serial I/O1 mode selection bit of the serial I/O1 control register to "0". Eight serial data transfer formats can be selected, and the transfer formats used by a transmitter and receiver must be identical. The transmit and receive shift registers each have a buffer regis-
ter, but the two buffers have the same address in memory. Since the shift register cannot be written to or read from directly, transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register, and receive data is read from the receive buffer register. The transmit buffer register can also hold the next data to be transmitted, and the receive buffer register can hold a character while the next character is being received.
Data bus Address 001816 Serial I/O1 control register Address 001A16 Receive buffer full flag (RBF)
Serial I/O receive interrupt request (RI)
Receive buffer register(RB) OE Character length selection bit
P44/RXD
STdetector
7 bits 8 bits
Receive shift register 1/16 PE FE SP detector Clock control circuit UART control register Address 001B16
Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit P46/SCLK1 BRG count source selection bit Frequency division ratio 1/(n+1) Baud rate generator Address 001C16 1/4 ST/SP/PA generator 1/16 P45/TXD Character length selection bit
Transmit buffer register
f(XIN)
Transmit shift register shift completion flag (TSC) Transmit interrupt source selection bit Serial I/O1 status register Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE) Serial I/O1 status register Address 001916
Transmit shift register
Address 001816 Data bus
Fig. 24 Block diagram of UART serial I/O1
Transmit or receive clock
Transmit buffer register write signal TBE=0 TSC=0 TBE=1 TBE=0 TBE=1 TSC=1V
Serial output TXD
ST
D0
D1 1 start bit 7 or 8 data bits 1 or 0 parity bit 1 or 2 stop bit (s)
SP
ST
D0
D1
V
SP Generated at 2nd bit in 2-stop-bit mode
Receive buffer register read signal
RBF=0 RBF=1 RBF=1
Serial input RXD
ST
D0
D1
SP
ST
D0
D1
SP
Notes 1: Error flag detection occurs at the same time that the RBF flag becomes "1" (at 1st stop bit, during reception). 2: The transmit interrupt (TI) can be selected to occur when either the TBE or TSC flag becomes "1", depending on the setting of the transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) of the serial I/O1 control register. 3: The serial I/O1 receive interrupt (RI) is set when the RBF flag becomes "1". 4: After data is written to the transmit buffer register when TSC=1, 0.5 to 1.5 cycles of the data shift cycle is necessary until changing to TSC=0.
Fig. 25 Operation of UART serial I/O1 function
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-27
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Serial I/O1 Control Register (SIO1CON) 001A16
The serial I/O1 control register contains eight control bits for the serial I/O1 function.
UART Control Register (UARTCON) 001B16
The UART control register consists of four control bits (bits 0 to 3) which are valid when asynchronous serial I/O is selected and set the data format of an data transfer. One bit in this register (bit 4) is always valid and sets the output structure of the P45/TXD pin.
Serial I/O1 Status Register (SIO1STS) 001916
The read-only serial I/O1 status register consists of seven flags (bits 0 to 6) which indicate the operating status of the serial I/O function and various errors. Three of the flags (bits 4 to 6) are valid only in UART mode. The receive buffer full flag (bit 1) is cleared to "0" when the receive buffer is read. If there is an error, it is detected at the same time that data is transferred from the receive shift register to the receive buffer register, and the receive buffer full flag is set. A write to the serial I/O status register clears all the error flags OE, PE, FE, and SE (bit 3 to bit 6, respectively). Writing "0" to the serial I/O enable bit SIOE (bit 7 of the Serial I/O Control Register) also clears all the status flags, including the error flags. All bits of the serial I/O1 status register are initialized to "0" at reset, but if the transmit enable bit (bit 4) of the serial I/O control register has been set to "1", the transmit shift register shift completion flag (bit 2) and the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0) become "1".
Transmit Buffer/Receive Buffer Register (TB/ RB) 001816
The transmit buffer register and the receive buffer register are located at the same address. The transmit buffer register is writeonly and the receive buffer register is read-only. If a character bit length is 7 bits, the MSB of data stored in the receive buffer register is "0".
Baud Rate Generator (BRG) 001C16
The baud rate generator determines the baud rate for serial transfer. The baud rate generator divides the frequency of the count source by 1/(n + 1), where n is the value written to the baud rate generator.
1-28
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
7
0
Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS : address 0019 16) Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE) 0: Buffer full 1: Buffer empty Receive buffer full flag (RBF) 0: Buffer empty 1: Buffer full Transmit shift register shift completion flag (TSC) 0: Transmit shift in progress 1: Transmit shift completed Overrun error flag (OE) 0: No error 1: Overrun error Parity error flag (PE) 0: No error 1: Parity error Framing error flag (FE) 0: No error 1: Framing error Summing error flag (SE) 0: OE U PE U FE =0 1: OE U PE U FE =1 Not used (returns "1" when read)
7
0
Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON : address 001A 16) BRG count source selection bit (CSS) 0: f(XIN) 1: f(XIN)/4 Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit (SCS) *In clock synchronous mode 0 : BRG output/4 1 : External clock input *In UART mode 0 : BRG output/16 1 : External clock input/16 SRDY1 output enable bit (SRDY) 0: P47 SRDY1 pin operates as I/O port P47 1: P47 SRDY1 pin operates as signal output pin SRDY1 (SRDY1 signal indicates receive enable state) Transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) 0: When transmit buffer has emptied 1: When transmit shift operation is completed Transmit enable bit (TE) 0: Transmit disabled 1: Transmit enabled Receive enable bit (RE) 0: Receive disabled 1: Receive enabled Serial I/O1 mode selection bit (SIOM) 0: Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART) mode 1: Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode Serial I/O1 enable bit (SIOE) 0: Serial I/O1 disabled (pins P44-P47 operate as I/O pins) 1: Serial I/O1 enabled (pins P44-P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
7
0
UART control register (UARTCON : address 001B 16) Character length selection bit (CHAS) 0: 8 bits 1: 7 bits Parity enable bit (PARE) 0: Parity checking disabled 1: Parity checking enabled Parity selection bit (PARS) 0: Even parity 1: Odd parity Stop bit length selection bit (STPS) 0: 1 stop bit 1: 2 stop bits P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit (POFF) 0: CMOS output (in output mode) 1: N-channel open-drain output (in output mode) Not used (return"1" when read)
Fig. 26 Structure of serial I/O1 control registers
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-29
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
SERIAL I/O2
The serial I/O2 function can be used only for clock synchronous serial I/O. For clock synchronous serial I/O2 the transmitter and the receiver must use the same clock. If the internal clock is used, transfer is started by a write signal to the serial I/O2 register.
b7
b0
Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON : address 001D16) Internal synchronization clock select bits
b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O2 Control Register (SIO2CON) 001D16
The serial I/O2 control register contains 7 bits which control various serial I/O functions.
0 0 0: f(XIN)/8 0 0 1: f(XIN)/16 0 1 0: f(XIN)/32 0 1 1: f(XIN)/64 1 0 0: Do not set 1 0 1: 1 1 0: f(XIN)/128 1 1 1: f(XIN)/256 Serial I/O2 port selection bit 0: I/O port 1: SOUT2,SCLK2 signal output SRDY2 output enable bit 0: I/O port 1: SRDY2 signal output Transfer direction selection bit 0: LSB first 1: MSB first Synchronization clock selection bit 0: External clock 1: Internal clock Not used (returns "0" when read)
Fig. 27 Structure of serial I/O2 control register
1/8 1/16
Divider
Internal synchronization clock select bits
XIN
1/32 1/64 1/128 1/256
Data bus
P53 latch "0" Synchronization clock selection bit SRDY2 Synchronization circuit
SCLK2
"1" "0"
P53/SRDY2
"1" SRDY2 output enable bit
External clock
P52 latch "0"
P52/SCLK2
"1" Serial I/O2 port selection bit P51 latch "0"
Serial I/O counter 2 (3)
Serial I/O2 interrupt request
P51/SOUT2
"1" Serial I/O2 port selection bit
P50/SIN2
Serial I/O shift register 2 (8)
Fig. 28 Block diagram of serial I/O2 function
1-30
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Transfer clock (Note 1) Serial I/O2 register write signal
(Note 2)
Serial I/O2 output SOUT2 Serial I/O2 input SIN2
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Receive enable signal SRDY2
Serial I/O2 interrupt request bit set Notes 1: When the internal clock is selected as the transfer clock, the divide ratio can be selected by setting bits 0 to 2 of the serial I/O2 control register. 2: When the internal clock is selected as the transfer clock, the S OUT2 pin goes to high impedance after transfer completion.
Fig. 29 Timing of serial I/O2 function
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-31
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
the segment output enable register and the LCD display RAM, the LCD drive control circuit starts reading the display data automatically, performs the bias control and the duty ratio control, and displays the data on the LCD panel. Table 8. Maximum number of display pixels at each duty ratio Duty ratio 2 3 4 Maximum number of display pixel 80 dots or 8 segment LCD 10 digits 120 dots or 8 segment LCD 15 digits 160 dots or 8 segment LCD 20 digits
LCD DRIVE CONTROL CIRCUIT
The 3820 group has the built-in Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) drive control circuit consisting of the following. LCD display RAM Segment output enable register LCD mode register Selector Timing controller Common driver Segment driver Bias control circuit A maximum of 40 segment output pins and 4 common output pins can be used. Up to 160 pixels can be controlled for LCD display. When the LCD enable bit is set to "1" after data is set in the LCD mode register,
* * * * * * * *
7
0
Segment output enable register (SEG : address 003816) Segment output enable bit 0 0 : Input ports P30-P37 1 : Segment output SEG16-SEG23 Segment output enable bit 1 0 : I/O ports P00, P01 1 : Segment output SEG 24,SEG25 Segment output enable bit 2 0 : I/O ports P02-P07 1 : Segment output SEG26-SEG31 Segment output enable bit 3 0 : I/O ports P10,P11 1 : Segment output SEG32,SEG33 Segment output enable bit 4 0 : I/O port P12 1 : Segment output SEG34 Segment output enable bit 5 0 : I/O ports P13-P17 1 : Segment output SEG35-SEG39 Not used (return "0" when read) (Do not write "1" to this bit) 7
0
LCD mode register (LM : address 003916) Duty ratio selection bits 0 0 : Not available 0 1 : 2 (use COM0,COM1) 1 0 : 3 (use COM0-COM2) 1 1 : 4 (use COM0-COM3) Bias control bit 0 : 1/3 bias 1 : 1/2 bias LCD enable bit 0 : LCD OFF 1 : LCD ON Not used (returns "0" when read) (Do not write "1" to this bit) LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits 0 0 : LCDCK count source 0 1 : 2 division of LCDCK count source 1 0 : 4 division of LCDCK count source 1 1 : 8 division of LCDCK count source LCDCK count source selection bit (Note) 0 : f(XCIN)/32 1 : f(XIN)/8192 Note : LCDCK is a clock for a LCD timing controller.
Fig. 30 Structure of segment output enable register and LCD mode register
1-32
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
Data bus
LCD enable bit
Address 005316
Address 004016
Address 004116
LCD display RAM LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits 2 Bias control bit 2 LCD divider
Duty ratio selection bits LCDCK count source selection bit "1" f(XIN)/ 256 "0" 1/32 f(XCIN)
Fig. 31 Block diagram of LCD controller/driver
Selector Selector
Selector
Selector
Selector
Selector
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
Timing controller Segment Segment driver driver Bias control P30/SEG16 P16/SEG38 P17/SEG39 VSS VL1 VL2 VL3
LCDCK
Segment Segment Segment Segment driver driver driver driver
Common Common Common Common driver driver driver driver
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
SEG0
SEG1
SEG2
SEG3
COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3
1-33
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Bias Control and Applied Voltage to LCD Power Input Pins
To the LCD power input pins (VL1-VL3), apply the voltage shown in Table 3 according to the bias value. Select a bias value by the bias control bit (bit 2 of the LCD mode register).
Table 9. Bias control and applied voltage to VL1-VL3 Bias value 1/3 bias Voltage value VL3=VLCD VL2=2/3 VLCD VL1=1/3 VLCD VL3=VLCD VL2=VL1=1/2 VLCD
1/2 bias
Common Pin and Duty Ratio Control
The common pins (COM0-COM3) to be used are determined by duty ratio. Select duty ratio by the duty ratio selection bits (bits 0 and 1 of the LCD mode register).
Note 1 : VLCD is the maximum value of supplied voltage for the LCD panel. Table 10. Duty ratio control and common pins used Duty ratio 2 3 4 Duty ratio selection bit Bit 1 0 1 1 Bit 0 1 0 1 Common pins used COM0, COM1 (Note 1) COM0-COM2 (Note 2) COM0-COM3
Notes 1 : COM2 and COM3 are open 2 : COM3 is open
Contrast control
Contrast control
VL3 R1 VL2 R2 VL1 R3
VL3 R4 VL2
VL1 R5
1/3 bias
R1 = R2 = R3
1/2 bias
R4 = R5
Fig. 32 Example of circuit at each bias
1-34
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
LCD Display RAM
Address 004016 to 005316 is the designated RAM for the LCD display. When "1" are written to these addresses, the corresponding segments of the LCD display panel are turned on.
LCD Drive Timing
The LCDCK timing frequency (LCD drive timing) is generated internally and the frame frequency can be determined with the following equation; f(LCDCK)= (frequency of count source for LCDCK) (divider division ratio for LCD) f(LCDCK) duty ratio
Frame frequency=
Bit
7
Address
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0
004016 004116 004216 004316 004416 004516 004616 004716 004816 004916 004A16 004B16 004C16 004D16 004E16 004F16 005016 005116 005216 005316
SEG1 SEG3 SEG5 SEG7 SEG9 SEG11 SEG13 SEG15 SEG17 SEG19 SEG21 SEG23 SEG25 SEG27 SEG29 SEG31 SEG33 SEG35 SEG37 SEG39
SEG0 SEG2 SEG4 SEG6 SEG8 SEG10 SEG12 SEG14 SEG16 SEG18 SEG20 SEG22 SEG24 SEG26 SEG28 SEG30 SEG32 SEG34 SEG36 SEG38
Fig. 33 LCD display RAM map
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-35
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Internal logic LCDCK timing
1/4 duty
Voltage level VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS
COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG0
VL3 VSS
OFF COM3 COM2 COM1
ON COM0 COM3
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0
1/3 duty COM0 COM1 COM2 VL3 VSS VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS
SEG0
ON COM0 1/2 duty COM0 COM1 SEG0
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0
OFF COM2
VL3 VL2=VL1 VSS
VL3 VSS ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0
Fig. 34 LCD drive waveform (1/2 bias)
1-36
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Internal logic LCDCK timing
1/4 duty
Voltage level VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS
COM0
COM1 COM2 COM3 SEG0 VL3 VSS
OFF COM3 COM2 COM1
ON COM0 COM3
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0
1/3 duty COM0 COM1 COM2 VL3 VSS VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS
SEG0
ON COM0 1/2 duty COM0 COM1 SEG0
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0
OFF COM2 COM1
ON COM0
OFF COM2
VL3 VL2 VL1 VSS
VL3 VSS ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0 ON COM1 OFF COM0
Fig. 35 LCD drive waveform (1/3 bias)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-37
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
WATCHDOG TIMER
The watchdog timer gives a mean of returning to the reset status when a program cannot run on a normal loop (for example, because of a software run-away). The watchdog timer consists of an 8-bit watchdog timer L and a 6bit watchdog timer H.
Initial Value of Watchdog Timer
At reset or when writing data into the watchdog timer control register, the watchdog timer H is set to "3F16" and the watchdog timer L is set to "FF16". As a write instruction, it is possible to use any instruction that can cause a write signal such as STA, LDM and CLB. Write data except bit 7 has no significance and the above value is set independently.
Watchdog Timer Operation
The watchdog timer stops at reset and starts a countdown by writing to the watchdog timer control register. When the watchdog timer H underflows, an internal reset occurs, and the reset status is released after waiting the reset release time.
Then the program executes from the reset vector address. Usually, a program is designed so that data can be written into the watchdog timer control register before the watchdog timer H underflows. If data is not written once into the watchdog timer control register, the watchdog timer does not function. At execution of the STP instruction, both clock and watchdog timer stops. At the same time that the stop mode is released, the watchdog timer restarts a count (Note). On the other hand, at execution of the WIT instruction, the watchdog timer does not stop. The time from execution of writing to the watchdog timer control register until an underflow of the watchdog timer register H is as follows: (When bit 7 of the watchdog timer control register is "0") Middle / High-speed mode (f(XIN)=8 MHz) .................. 32.768 ms Low-speed mode (f(XCIN)=32 kHz) ..................................... 8.19 s Note: During the stop release wait time [XIN (or XCIN) : about 8200 clock cycles], the watchdog timer counts. Accordingly, does not underflow the watchdog timer H.
* *
XCIN
Internal system "1" clock selection bit (Note)
When writing to watchdog timer control register set "FF16" Watchdog timer L (8)
Data bus
When writing to watchdog timer control register set "3F16" Watchdog timer H (6)
"0" "1"
1/16
"0" XIN
Watchdog timer H count source selection bit
Undefined instruction Reset RESET Reset circuit Internal reset
Reset release wait time (about 8200 XIN clock cycles) Note: This bit is bit 7 of CPU mode register. It selects the mode (middle/high-speed or low-speed)
Fig. 36 Watchdog timer block diagram
7
0
Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON : address 003716) Watchdog timer H bits (read only) Not used (returns "1" when read) Watchdog timer H count source selection bit 0 : Underflow from watchdog timer L 1 : f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16
Fig. 37 Structure of watchdog timer control register
1-38
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
CLOCK OUTPUT FUNCTION
The internal system clock can be output from port P41 by setting the output control register. Set bit 1 of the port P4 direction register to when outputting clock.
7
0
output control register (CKOUT : address 002A16) output control bit 0 : Port function 1 : clock output Not used (return "0" when read)
Fig. 38 Structure of output control register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-39
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
RESET CIRCUIT
To reset the microcomputer, RESET pin should be held at an "L" level for 2 s or more. Then the RESET pin is returned to an "H" level (the power source voltage should be between 2.5 V and 5.5 V, and the oscillation should be stable), reset is released. In order to give the XIN clock time to stabilize, internal operation does not begin until after 8200 XIN clock cycles (timer 1 and timer 2 are connected together and 512 cycles of f(XIN)/16) are complete. After the reset is completed, the program starts from the address contained in address FFFD16 (high-order byte) and address FFFC16 (low-order byte). Make sure that the reset input voltage is less than 0.5 V for VCC of 2.5 V (Extended operating temperature version: the reset input voltage is less than 0.6V for VCC of 3.0V).
Address ( 1 ) Port P0 direction register ( 2 ) Port P1 direction register ( 3 ) Port P2 direction register ( 4 ) Port P4 direction register ( 5 ) Port P5 direction register ( 6 ) Port P6 direction register ( 7 ) Port P7 direction register ( 8 ) PULL register A ( 9 ) PULL register B (10) Serial I/O1 status register (11) Serial I/O1 control register (12) UART control register (13) Serial I/O2 control register (14) Timer X (low-order)
Power on Power source voltage 0V Reset input voltage 0V (Note)
Register contents 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016 0016
(000116) * * * (000316) * * * (000516) * * * (000916) * * * (000B16) * * * (000D16) * * * (000F16) * * *
(001616) * * * 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 (001716) * * * 0016
(001916) * * * 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (001A16) * * * 0016
(001B16) * * * 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 (001D16) * * * (002016) * * * (002116) * * * (002216) * * * (002316) * * * (002416) * * * (002516) * * * (002616) * * * (002716) * * * (002816) * * * (002916) * * * (002A16) * * * 0016 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 0116 FF16 0016 0016 0016 0016
(15) Timer X (high-order) (16) Timer Y (low-order) (17) Timer Y (high-order)
RESET
VCC
0.2VCC
(18) Timer 1 (19) Timer 2
Note. Reset release voltage : VCC = 2.5V (Extended operating temperature version : 3.0V)
(20) Timer 3 (21) Timer X mode register
RESET
VCC Power source voltage detection circuit
(22) Timer Y mode register (23) Timer 123 mode register (24) output control register (25) Watchdog timer control register (26) Segment output enable register (27) LCD mode register (28) Interrupt edge selection register (29) CPU mode register (30) Interrupt request register 1
(003716) * * * 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (003816) * * * (003916) * * * (003A16) * * * 0016 0016 0016
(003B16) * * * 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 (003C16) * * * (003D16) * * * (003E16) * * * (003F16) * * * 0016 0016 0016 0016
Fig. 39 Example of reset circuit
(31) Interrupt request register 2 (32) Interrupt control register 1 (33) Interrupt control register 2 (34) Processor status register (35) Program counter
(PS) ! ! ! ! ! 1 ! ! (PCH) Contents of address FFFD16 (PCL) Contents of address FFFC16
Note. ! : Undefined The contents of all other registers and RAM are undefined at poweron reset, so they must be initialized by software.
Fig. 40 Internal state of microcomputer immediately after reset
1-40
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
XIN
RESET
Internal reset
Reset address from vector table
Address Data
?
?
?
?
FFFC ADL
FFFD
ADH, ADL ADH
SYNC XIN : about 8200 clock cycles Notes 1 : XIN and are in the relation : f(XIN) = 8 * f() Notes 2 : A question mark (?) indicates an undefined status that depens on the previous status.
Fig. 41 Reset sequence
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-41
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
CLOCK GENERATING CIRCUIT
The 3820 group has two built-in oscillation circuits. An oscillation circuit can be formed by connecting a resonator between XIN and XOUT (XCIN and XCOUT). Use the circuit constants in accordance with the resonator manufacturer's recommended values. No external resistor is needed between XIN and XOUT since a feed-back resistor exists on-chip. However, an external feed-back resistor is needed between XCIN and XCOUT. To supply a clock signal externally, input it to the XIN pin and make the XOUT pin open. The sub-clock XCIN-XCOUT oscillation circuit cannot directly input clocks that are externally generated. Accordingly, be sure to cause an external resonator to oscillate. Immediately after poweron, only the XIN oscillation circuit starts oscillating, and XCIN and XCOUT pins function as I/O ports. The pull-up resistor of XCIN and XCOUT pins must be made invalid to use the sub-clock.
Oscillation Control
Stop mode If the STP instruction is executed, the internal clock stops at an "H" level, and XIN and XCIN oscillators stop. Timer 1 is set to "FF16" and timer 2 is set to "0116". Either XIN or XCIN divided by 16 is input to timer 1 as count source, and the output of timer 1 is connected to timer 2. The bits of the timer 123 mode register except bit 4 are cleared to "0". Set the timer 1 and timer 2 interrupt enable bits to disabled ("0") before executing the STP instruction. Oscillator restarts at reset or when an external interrupt is received, but the internal clock is not supplied to the CPU until timer 2 underflows. This allows time for the clock circuit oscillation to stabilize. Wait mode If the WIT instruction is executed, the internal clock stops at an "H" level. The states of XIN and XCIN are the same as the state before the executing the WIT instruction. The internal clock restarts at reset or when an interrupt is received. Since the oscillator does not stop, normal operation can be started immediately after the clock is restarted.
Frequency Control
Middle-speed mode The internal clock is the frequency of XIN divided by 8. After reset, this mode is selected. High-speed mode The internal clock is half the frequency of XIN. Low-speed mode
* The internal clock is half the frequency of XCIN. * A low-power consumption operation can be realized by stopping
the main clock XIN in this mode. To stop the main clock, set bit 5 of the CPU mode register to "1". When the main clock XIN is restarted, set enough time for oscillation to stabilize by programming. Note: If you switch the mode between middle/high-speed and lowspeed, stabilize both XIN and XCIN oscillations. The sufficient time is required for the sub-clock to stabilize, especially immediately after poweron and at returning from stop mode. When switching the mode between middle/highspeed and low-speed, set the frequency on condition that f(XIN)>3f(XCIN).
XCIN Rf CCIN
XCOUT Rd CCOUT
XIN
XOUT
CIN
COUT
Fig. 42 Ceramic resonator circuit
XCIN Rf CCIN
XCOUT Rd CCOUT
XIN
XOUT Open
External oscillation circuit
VCC VSS
Fig. 43 External clock input circuit
1-42
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
XCIN
XCOUT
"1"
"0"
Port XC switch bit
XIN
XOUT
Internal system clock selection bit (Note 1) Low-speed mode
Timer 1 count source selection bit
"1"
Timer 2 count source selection bit
"0"
1/2
Middle/High-speed mode
1/4
1/2
Timer 1
"0"
Timer 2
"1"
Main clock division ratio selection bit Middle-speed mode
High-speed mode or Low-speed mode Main clock stop bit
Timing (Internal system clock)
Q
S R STP instruction WIT instruction
S R
Q
QS R STP instruction
Reset Interrupt disable flag I Interrupt request
Note : When using the low-speed mode, set the port XC switch bit to "1" .
Fig. 44 Clock generating circuit block diagram
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-43
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Reset
Middle-speed mode (f() =1 MHz) CM7=0(8MHz selected) CM6=1(Middle-speed) CM5=0(8MHz oscillating) CM4=0(32kHz stopped)
CM6 "1"
"0"
High-speed mode (f() =4MHz) CM7=0(8MHz selected) CM6=0(High-speed) CM5=0(8MHz oscillating) CM4=0(32kHz stopped)
"0"
CM 6 " "1 CM " "1
4
"0
" " 0" "1 "
"0
"
CM4 "1"
"1 "
"
"0
Middle-speed mode (f() =1 MHz) CM7=0(8MHz selected) CM6=1(Middle-speed) CM5=0(8MHz oscillating) CM4=1(32kHz oscillating)
CM6 "1"
"0"
High-speed mode (f() =4MHz) CM7=0(8MHz selected) CM6=0(High-speed) CM5=0(8MHz oscillating) CM4=1(32kHz oscillating)
"0"
Low-speed mode (f( ) =16 kHz) CM7=1(32kHz selected) CM6=1(Middle-speed) CM5=0(8MHz oscillating) CM4=1(32kHz oscillating)
CM7 "1"
CM6 "1"
Low-speed mode (f() =16 kHz)
"0"
CM7=1(32kHz selected) CM6=0(High-speed) CM5=0(8MHz oscillating) CM4=1(32kHz oscillating)
CM7 "1"
"0"
CM4 "1"
"0"
C M
4
"0"
"0"
CM5 "1"
"0
"
"1 "
"
" "1
Low-speed mode (f( ) =16 kHz) CM7=1(32kHz selected) CM6=1(Middle-speed) CM5=1(8MHz stopped) CM4=1(32kHz oscillating)
"0
CM6 "1"
Low-speed mode (f() =16 kHz)
"0"
CM7=1(32kHz selected) CM6=0(High-speed) CM5=1(8MHz stopped) CM4=1(32kHz oscillating)
Note 1:Switch the mode by the allows shown between the mode blocks. (Do not switch between the mode directly without an allow.) 2:The all modes can be switched to the stop mode or the wait mode and returned to the source mode when the stop mode or the wait mode is released. 3:Timer and LCD operate in the wait mode. 4:In middle-/high-speed mode, when the stop mode is released, a delay of approximately 1 ms occurs automatically by timer 1 and timer 2. 5:In low-speed mode, when the stop mode is released, a delay of approximately 0.25 s occurs automatically by timer 1 and timer 2. 6:Wait until oscillation stabilizes after oscillating the main clock XIN before the switching from the low-speed mode to middle-/highspeed mode. 7:The example assumes that 8 MHz is being applied to the XIN pin and 32 kHz to the XCIN pin. indicates the internal clock.
Fig. 45 State transitions of internal clock
1-44
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
CM5 "1"
CM 6 " "1 CM
5
"0
" " "1
"0
C M
6
7
4 CPU mode register (CPUM : address 003B 16)
CM4 : Port Xc switch bit 0: I/O port 1: XCIN, XCOUT CM5 : Main clock (XIN-XOUT) stop bit 0: Oscillating 1: Stopped CM6: Main clock division ratio selection bit 0: f(XIN)/2 (high-speed mode) 1: f(XIN)/8 (middle-speed mode) CM7: Internal system clock selection bit 0: XIN-XOUT selected (middle-/high-speed mode) 1: XCIN-XCOUT selected (low-speed mode)
C M
5 6
"
C M
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
NOTES ON PROGRAMMING Processor Status Register
The contents of the processor status register (PS) after a reset are undefined, except for the interrupt disable flag (I) which is "1". After a reset, initialize flags which affect program execution. In particular, it is essential to initialize the index X mode (T) and the decimal mode (D) flags because of their effect on calculations.
Serial I/O
In clock synchronous serial I/O, if the receive side is using an external clock and it is to output the SRDY signal, set the transmit enable bit, the receive enable bit, and the SRDY output enable bit to "1". Serial I/O1 continues to output the final bit from the TXD pin after transmission is completed. The SOUT2 pin from serial I/O2 goes to high impedance after transmission is completed.
Interrupt
The contents of the interrupt request bits do not change immediately after they have been written. After writing to an interrupt request register, execute at least one instruction before performing a BBC or BBS instruction.
Instruction Execution Time
The instruction execution time is obtained by multiplying the frequency of the internal clock by the number of cycles needed to execute an instruction. The number of cycles required to execute an instruction is shown in the list of machine instructions. The frequency of the internal clock is half of the XIN frequency.
Decimal Calculations
To calculate in decimal notation, set the decimal mode flag (D) to "1", then execute an ADC or SBC instruction. Only the ADC and SBC instructions yield proper decimal results. After executing an ADC or SBC instruction, execute at least one instruction before executing a SEC, CLC, or CLD instruction. In decimal mode, the values of the negative (N), overflow (V), and zero (Z) flags are invalid. The carry flag can be used to indicate whether a carry or borrow has occurred. Initialize the carry flag before each calculation. Clear the carry flag before an ADC and set the flag before an SBC.
Timers
If a value n (between 0 and 255) is written to a timer latch, the frequency division ratio is 1/(n + 1).
Multiplication and Division Instructions
The index mode (T) and the decimal mode (D) flags do not affect the MUL and DIV instruction. The execution of these instructions does not change the contents of the processor status register.
Ports
The contents of the port direction registers cannot be read. The following cannot be used: * The data transfer instruction (LDA, etc.) * The operation instruction when the index X mode flag (T) is "1" * The addressing mode which uses the value of a direction register as an index * The bit-test instruction (BBC or BBS, etc.) to a direction register * The read-modify-write instruction (ROR, CLB, or SEB, etc.) to a direction register Use instructions such as LDM and STA, etc., to set the port direction registers.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-45
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
DATA REQUIRED FOR MASK ORDERS
The following are necessary when ordering a mask ROM production: 1. Mask ROM Order Confirmation Form 2. Mark Specification Form 3. Data to be written to ROM, in EPROM form (three identical copies)
ROM PROGRAMMING METHOD
The built-in PROM of the blank One Time PROM version and builtin EPROM version can be read or programmed with a generalpurpose PROM programmer using a special programming adapter. Set the address of PROM programmer in the user ROM area. Table 11. Programming adapter Package 80P6N-A 80P6S-A 80P6D-A 80D0 Name of Programming Adapter PCA4738F-80A PCA4738G-80 PCA4738H-80 PCA4738L-80A
The PROM of the blank One Time PROM version is not tested or screened in the assembly process and following processes. To ensure proper operation after programming, the procedure shown in Figure 46 is recommended to verify programming.
Programming with PROM programmer
Screening (Caution) (150C for 40 hours)
Verification with PROM programmer
Functional check in target device Caution : The screening temperature is far higher than the storage temperature. Never expose to 150 C exceeding 100 hours.
Fig. 46 Programming and testing of One Time PROM version
1-46
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Absolute maximum ratings
Table 12 Absolute maximum ratings Symbol VCC VI VI VI VI VI VO VO VO VO VO Pd Topr Tstg Parameter Power source voltage Input voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 Input voltage VL1 Input voltage VL2 Input voltage VL3 Input voltage RESET, XIN Output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17 Output voltage P30-P37 Output voltage P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 Output voltage SEG0-SEG15 Output voltage XOUT Power dissipation Operating temperature Storage temperature Conditions Ratings -0.3 to 7.0 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 All voltages are based on VSS. Output transistors are cut off. -0.3 to VL2 VL1 to VL3 VL2 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VL3 +0.3 -0.3 to VL3 +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VL3 +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 300 -20 to 85 -40 to 125 Unit V V V V V V V V V V V V mW C C
At output port At segment output At segment output
Ta = 25 C
Recommended operating conditions
Table 13 Recommended operating conditions (1) (VCC = 2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter High-speed mode f(XIN)=8 MHz Middle-speed mode f(XIN)=8 MHz Low-speed mode P00-P07, P53, P56, P20-P27, P60 RESET XIN P00-P07, P51, P53, P20-P27, P60 RESET XIN P10-P17, P30-P37, P41, P45, P47, P51, P61, P70, P71 (CM4=0) P42-P44, P46, P50, P52, P54, P55, P57, Min. 4.0 2.5 2.5 Limits Typ. 5.0 5.0 5.0 0 Max. 5.5 5.5 5.5 Unit
VCC VSS VIH VIH VIH VIH VIL VIL VIL VIL
Power source voltage Power source voltage "H" input voltage "H" input voltage "H" input voltage "H" input voltage "L" input voltage "L" input voltage "L" input voltage "L" input voltage
V V
0.7 VCC 0.8 VCC 0.8 VCC 0.8 VCC
VCC VCC VCC VCC 0.3 VCC 0.2 VCC 0.2 VCC 0.2 VCC
V V V V V V V V
P10-P17, P30-P37, P40, P41, P45, P47, P56, P61, P70, P71 (CM4=0) P42-P44, P46, P50, P52, P54, P55, P57,
0 0 0 0
3820GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-47
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 14 Recommended operating conditions (2) (VCC = 2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol IOH(peak) IOH(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOH(avg) IOH(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg) IOH(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOH(avg) IOH(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg) "H" total peak output current "H" total peak output current "L" total peak output current "L" total peak output current "H" total average output current "H" total average output current "L" total average output current "L" total average output current "H" peak output current "L" peak output current "L" peak output current "H" average output current "H" average output current "L" average output current "L" average output current Clock input frequency for timers X and Y (duty cycle 50 %) Main clock input oscillation frequency (Note 4) Parameter P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 (Note 1) P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 (Note 1) P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 (Note 1) P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 (Note 1) P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 2) P00-P07, P10-P17 (Note 2) P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 2) P00-P07, P10-P17 (Note 3) P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 3) P00-P07, P10-P17 (Note 3) P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 3) 4.0 V VCC 5.5 V VCC 4.0 V High-speed mode (4.0 V VCC 5.5 V) High-speed mode (VCC 4.0 V) Middle-speed mode Min. Limits Typ. Max. -40 -40 40 40 -20 -20 20 20 -5 5 10 -1.0 -2.5 2.5 5.0 4.0 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA MHz
f(CNTR0) f(CNTR1)
(2XVCC)-4 MHz 8.0 MHz (4XVCC)-8 MHz 8.0 MHz 50 kHz 32.768
f(XIN) f(XCIN)
Sub-clock input oscillation frequency (Note 4, 5)
Note 1: The total output current is the sum of all the currents flowing through all the applicable ports. The total average current is an average value measured over 100 ms. The total peak current is the peak value of all the currents. 2: The peak output current is the peak current flowing in each port. 3: The average output current is an average value measured over 100 ms. 4: When the oscillation frequency has a duty cycle of 50 %. 5: When using the microcomputer in low-speed mode, make sure that the sub-clock input oscillation frequency f(XCIN) is less than f(XIN)/3.
1-48
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Electrical characteristics
Table 15 Electrical characteristics (1) (VCC =4.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter Test conditions IOH = -0.1 mA IOH = -25 A VCC = 2.5 V IOH = -5 mA IOH = -1.25 mA IOH = -1.25 mA VCC = 2.5 V IOL = 5 mA IOL = 1.25 mA IOL = 1.25 mA VCC = 2.5 V IOL = 10 mA IOL = 2.5 mA IOL = 2.5 mA VCC = 2.5 V Min. VCC-2.0 VCC-1.0 VCC-2.0 VCC-0.5 VCC-1.0 2.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 0.5 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 5.0 30 6.0 70 25 140 45 5.0 5.0 4.0 -5.0 VI = VSS Pull-ups "off" VCC= 5.0 V, VI = VSS Pull-ups "on" VCC= 3.0 V, VI = VSS Pull-ups "on" VI = VSS VI = VSS When clock is stopped -5.0 -30 -6 -70 -25 -140 -45 -5.0 -4.0 2.0 5.5 Limits Typ. Max. Unit V V V V V V V V V V V V V V A A A A A A A A A A A A V
VOH
"H" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37
VOH
"H" output voltage P20-P27, P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
VOL
"L" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37
VOL
"L" output voltage P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis CNTR0, CNTR1, INT0-INT3, P20-P27 RXD, SCLK1, SIN2, SCLK2 RESET
VT+ - VT- VT+ - VT- VT+ - VT-
IIH
"H" input current
P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37
RESET: VCC=2.5 V to 5.5 V VI = VCC Pull-downs "off" VCC= 5.0 V, VI = VCC Pull-downs "on" VCC= 3.0 V, VI = VCC Pull-downs "on" VI = VCC VI = VCC VI = VCC
IIH IIH IIH IIL
"H" input current "H" input current "H" input current "L" input current
P20-P27, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 RESET XIN P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37, P40, P70
IIL
"L" input current
P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P71
IIL IIL VRAM
"L" input current RESET "L" input current XIN RAM hold voltage
Note 1: When "1" is set to port XC switch bit (bit 4 of address 003B16) of CPU mode register, the drive ability of port P70 is different from the value above mentioned.
3820GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-49
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 16 Electrical characteristics (2) (VCC =2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter Test conditions * High-speed mode, VCC = 5 V f(XIN) = 8 MHz f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz Output transistors "off" * High-speed mode, VCC = 5 V f(XIN) = 8 MHz (in WIT state) f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz Output transistors "off" * Low-speed mode, VCC = 5V, Ta 55C f(XIN) = stopped f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz Output transistors "off" * Low-speed mode, VCC = 5 V, Ta = 25C f(XIN) = stopped f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz (in WIT state) Output transistors "off" * Low-speed mode, VCC = 3 V, Ta 55C f(XIN) = stopped f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz Output transistors "off" * Low-speed mode, VCC = 3V, Ta = 25C f(XIN) = stopped f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz (in WIT state) Output transistors "off" All oscillation stopped (in STP state) Output transistors "off" Ta = 25 C Ta = 85 C Min. Limits Typ. Max. Unit
6.4
13
mA
1.6
3.2
mA
25
36
A
ICC
Power source current
7.0
14.0
A
15
22
A
4.5
9.0
A
0.1
1.0 10
A
1-50
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timing requirements 1
Table 17 Timing requirements 1 (VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol tw(RESET) tc(XIN) twH(XIN) twL(XIN) tc(CNTR) twH(CNTR) twL(CNTR) twH(INT) twL(INT) tc(SCLK1) twH(SCLK1) twL(SCLK1) tsu(RXD-SCLK1) th(SCLK1-RXD) tc(SCLK2) twH(SCLK2) twL(SCLK2) tsu(SIN2-SCLK2) th(SCLK2-SIN2) Parameter Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock input cycle time (XIN input) Main clock input "H" pulse width Main clock input "L" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0 to INT3 input "H" pulse width INT0 to INT3 input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1 clock input cycle time (Note) Serial I/O1 clock input "H" pulse width (Note) Serial I/O1 clock input "L" pulse width (Note) Serial I/O1 input set up time Serial I/O1 input hold time Serial I/O2 clock input cycle time Serial I/O2 clock input "H" pulse width Serial I/O2 clock input "L" pulse width Serial I/O2 input set up time Serial I/O2 input hold time Min. 2 125 45 40 250 105 105 80 80 800 370 370 220 100 1000 400 400 200 200 Limits Typ. Max. Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Note: When f(XIN) = 8 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when f(XIN) = 8 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is "0" (UART).
Timing requirements 2
Table 18 Timing requirements 2 (VCC = 2.5 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol tw(RESET) tc(XIN) twH(XIN) twL(XIN) tc(CNTR) twH(CNTR) twL(CNTR) twH(INT) twL(INT) tc(SCLK1) twH(SCLK1) twL(SCLK1) tsu(RXD-SCLK1) th(SCLK1-RXD) tc(SCLK2) twH(SCLK2) twL(SCLK2) tsu(SIN2-SCLK2) th(SCLK2-SIN2) Parameter Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock input cycle time (XIN input) Main clock input "H" pulse width Main clock input "L" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0 to INT3 input "H" pulse width INT0 to INT3 input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1 clock input cycle time (Note) Serial I/O1 clock input "H" pulse width (Note) Serial I/O1 clock input "L" pulse width (Note) Serial I/O1 input set up time Serial I/O1 input hold time Serial I/O2 clock input cycle time Serial I/O2 clock input "H" pulse width Serial I/O2 clock input "L" pulse width Serial I/O2 input set up time Serial I/O2 input hold time Min. 2 125 45 40 500/ (VCC-2) 250/ (VCC-2)-20 250/ (VCC-2)-20 230 230 2000 950 950 400 200 2000 950 950 400 300 Limits Typ. Max. Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Note: When f(XIN) = 2 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when f(XIN) = 2 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is "0" (UART).
3820GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-51
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Switching characteristics 1
Table 19 Switching characteristics 1 (VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol twH(SCLK1) twL(SCLK1) td(SCLK1-TXD) tv(SCLK1-TXD) tr(SCLK1) tf(SCLK1) twH(SCLK2) twL(SCLK2) td(SCLK2-SOUT2) tv(SCLK2-SOUT2) tf(SCLK2) tr(CMOS) tf(CMOS) Parameter Serial I/O1 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O1 output delay time (Note 1) Serial I/O1 output valid time (Note 1) Serial I/O1 clock output rising time Serial I/O1 clock output falling time Serial I/O2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O2 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O2 output delay time Serial I/O2 output valid time Serial I/O2 clock output falling time CMOS output rising time (Note 2) CMOS output falling time (Note 2) Limits Min. tc(SCLK1)/2-30 tc(SCLK1)/2-30 140 -30 30 30 tc(SCLK2)/2-160 tc(SCLK2)/2-160 0.2!tC(SCLK2) 0 10 10 40 30 30 Typ. Max. Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Note1: When the P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit of the UART control register (bit 4 of address 001B16) is "0". 2: XOUT and XCOUT pins are excluded.
Switching characteristics 2
Table 20 Switching characteristics 2 (VCC = 2.5 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol twH(SCLK1) twL(SCLK1) td(SCLK1-TXD) tv(SCLK1-TXD) tr(SCLK1) tf(SCLK1) twH(SCLK2) twL(SCLK2) td(SCLK2-SOUT2) tv(SCLK2-SOUT2) tf(SCLK2) tr(CMOS) tf(CMOS) Parameter Serial I/O1 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O1 output delay time (Note 1) Serial I/O1 output valid time (Note 1) Serial I/O1 clock output rising time Serial I/O1 clock output falling time Serial I/O2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O2 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O2 output delay time Serial I/O2 output valid time Serial I/O2 clock output falling time CMOS output rising time (Note 2) CMOS output falling time (Note 2) Min. tc(SCLK1)/2-50 tc(SCLK1)/2-50 -30 50 50 tc(SCLK2)/2-240 tc(SCLK2)/2-240 0.2!tC(SCLK2) 0 20 20 50 50 50 Limits Typ. Max. Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
350
Note1: When the P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit of the UART control register (bit 4 of address 001B16) is "0". 2: XOUT and XCOUT pins are excluded.
1-52
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Absolute maximum ratings (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 21 Absolute maximum ratings (Extended operating temperature version) Symbol VCC VI VI VI VI VI VO VO VO VO VO Pd Topr Tstg Parameter Power source voltage Input voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 Input voltage VL1 Input voltage VL2 Input voltage VL3 Input voltage RESET, XIN Output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17 Output voltage P30-P37 Output voltage P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 Output voltage SEG0-SEG15 Output voltage XOUT Power dissipation Operating temperature Storage temperature Conditions Ratings -0.3 to 7.0 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 All voltages are based on VSS. Output transistors are cut off. -0.3 to VL2 VL1 to VL3 VL2 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VL3 +0.3 -0.3 to VL3 +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VL3 +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 300 -40 to 85 -65 to 150 Unit V V V V V V V V V V V V mW C C
At output port At segment output At segment output
Ta = 25 C
Recommended operating conditions (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 22 Recommended operating conditions (Extended operating temperature version) (1) (VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = -40 to -20 C and VCC = 2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter High-speed mode f(XIN)=8 MHz VCC Power source voltage Middle-speed mode f(XIN)=8 MHz Low-speed mode VSS VIH VIH VIH VIH VIL VIL VIL VIL Power source voltage "H" input voltage "H" input voltage "H" input voltage "H" input voltage "L" input voltage "L" input voltage "L" input voltage "L" input voltage Ta = -20 to 85 C Ta = -40 to -20 C Ta = -20 to 85 C Ta = -40 to -20 C Min. 4.0 2.5 3.0 2.5 3.0 Limits Typ. 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 0 Max. 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 VCC VCC VCC VCC 0.3 VCC 0.2 VCC 0.2 VCC 0.2 VCC Unit
V
V V V V V V V V V
P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37, P41, P45, P47, P51, P53, P56, P61, P70, P71 (CM4=0) P20-P27, P42-P44, P46, P50, P52, P54, P55, P57, P60 RESET XIN P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37, P40, P41, P45, P47, P51, P53, P56, P61, P70, P71 (CM4=0) P20-P27, P42-P44, P46, P50, P52, P54, P55, P57, P60 RESET XIN
0.7 VCC 0.8 VCC 0.8 VCC 0.8 VCC 0 0 0 0
3820GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-53
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 23 Recommended operating conditions (Extended operating temperature version) (2) (VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = -40 to -20 C and VCC = 2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C unless otherwise noted) Symbol IOH(peak) IOH(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOH(avg) IOH(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg) IOH(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOH(avg) IOH(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg) "H" total peak output current "H" total peak output current "L" total peak output current "L" total peak output current "H" total average output current "H" total average output current "L" total average output current "L" total average output current "H" peak output current "L" peak output current "L" peak output current "H" average output current "H" average output current "L" average output current "L" average output current Clock input frequency for timers X and Y (duty cycle 50 %) Main clock input oscillation frequency (Note 4) Parameter P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 (Note 1) P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 (Note 1) P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 (Note 1) P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 (Note 1) P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 2) P00-P07, P10-P17 (Note 2) P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 2) P00-P07, P10-P17 (Note 3) P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 3) P00-P07, P10-P17 (Note 3) P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 3) 4.0 V VCC 5.5 V VCC 4.0 V High-speed mode (4.0 V VCC 5.5 V) High-speed mode (VCC 4.0 V) Middle-speed mode Min. Limits Typ. Max. -40 -40 40 40 -20 -20 20 20 -5 5 10 -1.0 -2.5 2.5 5.0 4.0 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA MHz
f(CNTR0) f(CNTR1)
(2XVCC)-4 MHz 8.0 MHz (4XVCC)-8 MHz 8.0 MHz 50 kHz 32.768
f(XIN) f(XCIN)
Sub-clock input oscillation frequency (Note 4, 5)
Note 1: The total output current is the sum of all the currents flowing through all the applicable ports. The total average current is an average value measured over 100 ms. The total peak current is the peak value of all the currents. 2: The peak output current is the peak current flowing in each port. 3: The average output current is an average value measured over 100 ms. 4: When the oscillation frequency has a duty cycle of 50 %. 5: When using the microcomputer in low-speed mode, make sure that the sub-clock input oscillation frequency f(XCIN) is less than f(XIN)/3.
1-54
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Electrical characteristics (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 24 Electrical characteristics (Extended operating temperature version) (1) (VCC =2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, and VCC =3.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = -40 to -20 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter Test conditions IOH = -2.5 mA IOH = -0.6 mA VCC = 3.0 V IOH = -5 mA IOH = -1.25 mA IOH = -1.25 mA VCC = 3.0 V IOL = 5 mA IOL = 1.25 mA IOL = 1.25 mA VCC = 3.0 V IOL = 10 mA IOL = 2.5 mA IOL = 2.5 mA VCC = 3.0 V Min. VCC-2.0 VCC-0.9 VCC-2.0 VCC-0.5 VCC-0.9 2.0 0.5 1.1 2.0 0.5 1.1 0.5 0.5 0.5 5.0 30 6.0 70 25 170 55 5.0 5.0 4.0 -5.0 VI = VSS Pull-ups "off" VCC= 5.0 V, VI = VSS Pull-ups "on" VCC= 3.0 V, VI = VSS Pull-ups "on" VI = VSS VI = VSS When clock is stopped -5.0 -30 -6 -70 -25 -140 -45 -5.0 -4.0 2.0 5.5 Limits Typ. Max. Unit V V V V V V V V V V V V V V A A A A A A A A A A A A V
VOH
"H" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37
VOH
"H" output voltage P20-P27, P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note)
VOL
"L" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37
VOL
"L" output voltage P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note) Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis CNTR0, CNTR1, INT0-INT3, P20-P27 RXD, SCLK1, SIN2, SCLK2 RESET
VT+ - VT- VT+ - VT- VT+ - VT-
IIH
"H" input current
P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37
RESET: VCC=3.0 V to 5.5 V VI = VCC Pull-downs "off" VCC= 5.0 V, VI = VCC Pull-downs "on" VCC= 3.0 V, VI = VCC Pull-downs "on" VI = VCC VI = VCC VI = VCC
IIH IIH IIH IIL
"H" input current "H" input current "H" input current "L" input current
P20-P27, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 RESET XIN P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37, P40, P70
IIL
"L" input current
P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P71
IIL IIL VRAM
"L" input current RESET "L" input current XIN RAM hold voltage
Note 1: When "1" is set to port XC switch bit (bit 4 of address 003B16) of CPU mode register, the drive ability of port P70 is different from the value above mentioned.
3820GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-55
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 25 Electrical characteristics (Extended operating temperature version) (2) (VCC =3.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = -40 to -20 C and VCC =2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter Test conditions * High-speed mode, VCC = 5 V f(XIN) = 8 MHz f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz Output transistors "off" * High-speed mode, VCC = 5 V f(XIN) = 8 MHz (in WIT state) f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz Output transistors "off" * Low-speed mode, VCC = 5V, Ta 55C f(XIN) = stopped f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz Output transistors "off" * Low-speed mode, VCC = 5 V, Ta = 25C f(XIN) = stopped f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz (in WIT state) Output transistors "off" * Low-speed mode, VCC = 3 V, Ta 55C f(XIN) = stopped f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz Output transistors "off" * Low-speed mode, VCC = 3V, Ta = 25C f(XIN) = stopped f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz (in WIT state) Output transistors "off" All oscillation stopped (in STP state) Output transistors "off" Ta = 25 C Ta = 85 C Min. Limits Typ. Max. Unit
6.4
13
mA
1.6
3.2
mA
25
36
A
ICC
Power source current
7.0
14.0
A
15
22
A
4.5
9.0
A
0.1
1.0 10
A
1-56
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timing requirements 1 (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 26 Timing requirements 1 (Extended operating temperature version) (VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -40 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol tw(RESET) tc(XIN) twH(XIN) twL(XIN) tc(CNTR) twH(CNTR) twL(CNTR) twH(INT) twL(INT) tc(SCLK1) twH(SCLK1) twL(SCLK1) tsu(RXD-SCLK1) th(SCLK1-RXD) tc(SCLK2) twH(SCLK2) twL(SCLK2) tsu(SIN2-SCLK2) th(SCLK2-SIN2) Parameter Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock input cycle time (XIN input) Main clock input "H" pulse width Main clock input "L" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0 to INT3 input "H" pulse width INT0 to INT3 input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1 clock input cycle time (Note) Serial I/O1 clock input "H" pulse width (Note) Serial I/O1 clock input "L" pulse width (Note) Serial I/O1 input set up time Serial I/O1 input hold time Serial I/O2 clock input cycle time Serial I/O2 clock input "H" pulse width Serial I/O2 clock input "L" pulse width Serial I/O2 input set up time Serial I/O2 input hold time Min. 2 125 45 40 250 105 105 80 80 800 370 370 220 100 1000 400 400 200 200 Limits Typ. Max. Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Note: When f(XIN) = 8 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when f(XIN) = 8 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is "0" (UART).
Timing requirements 2 (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 27 Timing requirements 2 (Extended operating temperature version) (VCC = 2.5 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, and VCC = 3.0 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -40 to -20 C, unless otherwise noted) Limits Symbol Parameter Min. Typ. Max. 2 tw(RESET) Reset input "L" pulse width 125 tc(XIN) Main clock input cycle time (XIN input) 45 twH(XIN) Main clock input "H" pulse width 40 twL(XIN) Main clock input "L" pulse width 500/ tc(CNTR) CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time (VCC-2) 250/ twH(CNTR) CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width (VCC-2)-20 twL(CNTR) twH(INT) twL(INT) tc(SCLK1) twH(SCLK1) twL(SCLK1) tsu(RXD-SCLK1) th(SCLK1-RXD) tc(SCLK2) twH(SCLK2) twL(SCLK2) tsu(SIN2-SCLK2) th(SCLK2-SIN2) CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0 to INT3 input "H" pulse width INT0 to INT3 input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1 clock input cycle time (Note) Serial I/O1 clock input "H" pulse width (Note) Serial I/O1 clock input "L" pulse width (Note) Serial I/O1 input set up time Serial I/O1 input hold time Serial I/O2 clock input cycle time Serial I/O2 clock input "H" pulse width Serial I/O2 clock input "L" pulse width Serial I/O2 input set up time Serial I/O2 input hold time 250/ (VCC-2)-20 230 230 2000 950 950 400 200 2000 950 950 400 300
Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Note: When f(XIN) = 2 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when f(XIN) = 2 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is "0" (UART).
3820GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-57
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Switching characteristics 1 (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 28 Switching characteristics 1 (Extended operating temperature version) (VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -40 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol twH(SCLK1) twL(SCLK1) td(SCLK1-TXD) tv(SCLK1-TXD) tr(SCLK1) tf(SCLK1) twH(SCLK2) twL(SCLK2) td(SCLK2-SOUT2) tv(SCLK2-SOUT2) tf(SCLK2) tr(CMOS) tf(CMOS) Parameter Serial I/O1 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O1 output delay time (Note 1) Serial I/O1 output valid time (Note 1) Serial I/O1 clock output rising time Serial I/O1 clock output falling time Serial I/O2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O2 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O2 output delay time Serial I/O2 output valid time Serial I/O2 clock output falling time CMOS output rising time (Note 2) CMOS output falling time (Note 2) Limits Min. tc(SCLK1)/2-30 tc(SCLK1)/2-30 140 -30 30 30 tc(SCLK2)/2-160 tc(SCLK2)/2-160 0.2!tC(SCLK2) 0 10 10 40 30 30 Typ. Max. Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Note1: When the P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit of the UART control register (bit 4 of address 001B16) is "0". 2: XOUT and XCOUT pins are excluded.
Switching characteristics 2 (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 29 Switching characteristics 2 (Extended operating temperature version) (VCC = 2.5 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, and VCC = 3.0 to 4.0 V, Ta = -40 to -20 C, unless otherwise noted) Limits Symbol Parameter Min. Typ. Max. twH(SCLK1) Serial I/O1 clock output "H" pulse width tc(SCLK1)/2-50 twL(SCLK1) Serial I/O1 clock output "L" pulse width tc(SCLK1)/2-50 td(SCLK1-TXD) Serial I/O1 output delay time (Note 1) 350 tv(SCLK1-TXD) Serial I/O1 output valid time (Note 1) -30 tr(SCLK1) Serial I/O1 clock output rising time 50 tf(SCLK1) Serial I/O1 clock output falling time 50 twH(SCLK2) Serial I/O2 clock output "H" pulse width tc(SCLK2)/2-240 twL(SCLK2) Serial I/O2 clock output "L" pulse width tc(SCLK2)/2-240 td(SCLK2-SOUT2) Serial I/O2 output delay time 0.2!tC(SCLK2) tv(SCLK2-SOUT2) Serial I/O2 output valid time 0 tf(SCLK2) Serial I/O2 clock output falling time 50 tr(CMOS) CMOS output rising time (Note 2) 20 50 tf(CMOS) CMOS output falling time (Note 2) 20 50 Note1: When the P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit of the UART control register (bit 4 of address 001B16) is "0". 2: XOUT and XCOUT pins are excluded.
Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
1-58
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Absolute maximum ratings (Low power source voltage version)
Table 30 Absolute maximum ratings (Low power source voltage version) Symbol VCC VI VI VI VI VI VO VO VO VO VO Pd Topr Tstg Parameter Power source voltage Input voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 Input voltage VL1 Input voltage VL2 Input voltage VL3 Input voltage RESET, XIN Output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17 Output voltage P30-P37 Output voltage P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 Output voltage SEG0-SEG15 Output voltage XOUT Power dissipation Operating temperature Storage temperature Conditions Ratings -0.3 to 7.0 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 All voltages are based on VSS. Output transistors are cut off. -0.3 to VL2 VL1 to VL3 VL2 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VL3 +0.3 -0.3 to VL3 +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VL3 +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 300 -20 to 85 -40 to 150 Unit V V V V V V V V V V V V mW C C
At output port At segment output At segment output
Ta = 25 C
Recommended operating conditions (Low power source voltage version)
Table 31 Recommended operating conditions (Low power source voltage version) (1) (VCC = 2.2 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter High-speed mode f(XIN)=8 MHz Middle-speed mode f(XIN)=8 MHz Low-speed mode P00-P07, P53, P56, P20-P27, P60 RESET XIN P00-P07, P51, P53, P20-P27, P60 RESET XIN P10-P17, P30-P37, P41, P45, P47, P51, P61, P70, P71 (CM4=0) P42-P44, P46, P50, P52, P54, P55, P57, Min. 4.0 2.2 2.2 Limits Typ. 5.0 5.0 5.0 0 Max. 5.5 5.5 5.5 Unit
VCC VSS VIH VIH VIH VIH VIL VIL VIL VIL
Power source voltage Power source voltage "H" input voltage "H" input voltage "H" input voltage "H" input voltage "L" input voltage "L" input voltage "L" input voltage "L" input voltage
V V
0.7 VCC 0.8 VCC 0.8 VCC 0.8 VCC
VCC VCC VCC VCC 0.3 VCC 0.2 VCC 0.2 VCC 0.2 VCC
V V V V V V V V
P10-P17, P30-P37, P40, P41, P45, P47, P56, P61, P70, P71 (CM4=0) P42-P44, P46, P50, P52, P54, P55, P57,
0 0 0 0
3820GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-59
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 32 Recommended operating conditions (Low power source voltage version) (2) (VCC = 2.2 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol IOH(peak) IOH(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOH(avg) IOH(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg) IOH(peak) IOL(peak) IOL(peak) IOH(avg) IOH(avg) IOL(avg) IOL(avg) "H" total peak output current "H" total peak output current "L" total peak output current "L" total peak output current "H" total average output current "H" total average output current "L" total average output current "L" total average output current "H" peak output current "L" peak output current "L" peak output current "H" average output current "H" average output current "L" average output current "L" average output current Clock input frequency for timers X and Y (duty cycle 50 %) Main clock input oscillation frequency (Note 4) Parameter P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 (Note 1) P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 (Note 1) P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 (Note 1) P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27 (Note 1) P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1) P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 2) P00-P07, P10-P17 (Note 2) P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 2) P00-P07, P10-P17 (Note 3) P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 3) P00-P07, P10-P17 (Note 3) P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 3) 4.0 V VCC 5.5 V VCC 4.0 V High-speed mode (4.0 V VCC 5.5 V) f(XIN) High-speed mode (VCC 4.0 V) Middle-speed mode f(XCIN) Sub-clock input oscillation frequency (Note 4, 5) 32.768 Min. Limits Typ. Max. -40 -40 40 40 -20 -20 20 20 -5 5 10 -1.0 -2.5 2.5 5.0 4.0 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA MHz
f(CNTR0) f(CNTR1)
(10XVCC-4) MHz 9 8.0 MHz (20XVCC-8) MHz 9 8.0 50 MHz kHz
Note 1: The total output current is the sum of all the currents flowing through all the applicable ports. The total average current is an average value measured over 100 ms. The total peak current is the peak value of all the currents. 2: The peak output current is the peak current flowing in each port. 3: The average output current is an average value measured over 100 ms. 4: When the oscillation frequency has a duty cycle of 50 %. 5: When using the microcomputer in low-speed mode, make sure that the sub-clock input oscillation frequency f(XCIN) is less than f(XIN)/3.
1-60
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Electrical characteristics (Low power source voltage version)
Table 33 Electrical characteristics (Low power source voltage version) (1) (VCC =4.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol Parameter Test conditions IOH = -0.1 mA IOH = -25 A VCC = 2.2 V IOH = -5 mA IOH = -1.25 mA IOH = -1.25 mA VCC = 2.2 V IOL = 5 mA IOL = 1.25 mA IOL = 1.25 mA VCC = 2.2 V IOL = 10 mA IOL = 2.5 mA IOL = 2.5 mA VCC = 2.2 V Min. VCC-2.0 VCC-1.0 VCC-2.0 VCC-0.5 VCC-1.0 2.0 0.5 1.1 2.0 0.5 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 5.0 30 6.0 70 25 170 55 5.0 8.0 4.0 5.0 -5.0 VI = VSS Pull-ups "off" VCC= 5.0 V, VI = VSS Pull-ups "on" VCC= 3.0 V, VI = VSS Pull-ups "on" VI = VSS VI = VSS -5.0 -30 -6 -70 -25 -140 -45 -5.0 -8.0 Limits Typ. Max. Unit V V V V V V V V V V V V V V A A A A A A A A A A A A
VOH
"H" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37
VOH
"H" output voltage P20-P27, P41-P47,P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note)
VOL
"L" output voltage P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37
VOL
"L" output voltage P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note) Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis CNTR0, CNTR1, INT0-INT3, P20-P27 RXD, SCLK1, SIN2, SCLK2 RESET
VT+ - VT- VT+ - VT- VT+ - VT-
IIH
"H" input current
P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37
RESET: VCC=2.2 V to 5.5 V VI = VCC Pull-downs "off" VCC= 5.0 V, VI = VCC Pull-downs "on" VCC= 3.0 V, VI = VCC Pull-downs "on" VI = VCC VI = VCC VI = VCC
IIH IIH IIH IIL
"H" input current "H" input current "H" input current "L" input current
P20-P27, P40-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 RESET XIN P00-P07, P10-P17, P30-P37, P40, P70
IIL
"L" input current
P20-P27, P41-P47, P50-P57, P60, P61, P71
IIL IIL
"L" input current "L" input current
RESET XIN
Note 1: When "1" is set to port XC switch bit (bit 4of address 003B16) of CPU mode register, the drive ability of port P70 is different from the value above mentioned.
3820GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-61
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 34 Electrical characteristics (Low power source voltage version) (2) (VCC =2.2 to 5.5 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol VRAM RAM hold voltage Parameter Test conditions When clock is stopped * High-speed mode, VCC = 5 V f(XIN) = 8 MHz f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz Output transistors "off" * High-speed mode, VCC = 5 V f(XIN) = 8 MHz (in WIT state) f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz Output transistors "off" * Low-speed mode, VCC = 5V, Ta 55C f(XIN) = stopped f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz Output transistors "off" * Low-speed mode, VCC = 5 V, Ta = 25C f(XIN) = stopped f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz (in WIT state) Output transistors "off" * Low-speed mode, VCC = 3 V, Ta 55C f(XIN) = stopped f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz Output transistors "off" * Low-speed mode, VCC = 3V, Ta = 25C f(XIN) = stopped f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz (in WIT state) Output transistors "off" All oscillation stopped (in STP state) Output transistors "off" Ta = 25 C Ta = 85 C Limits Typ. Unit V
Min. 2.0
Max. 5.5
6.4
13
mA
1.6
3.2
mA
25
36
A
ICC
Power source current
7.0
14.0
A
15
22
A
4.5
9.0
A
0.2
2.0 20
A
1-62
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timing requirements 1 (Low power source voltage version)
Table 35 Timing requirements 1 (Low power source voltage version) (VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol tw(RESET) tc(XIN) twH(XIN) twL(XIN) tc(CNTR) twH(CNTR) twL(CNTR) twH(INT) twL(INT) tc(SCLK1) twH(SCLK1) twL(SCLK1) tsu(RXD-SCLK1) th(SCLK1-RXD) tc(SCLK2) twH(SCLK2) twL(SCLK2) tsu(SIN2-SCLK2) th(SCLK2-SIN2)
_____
Parameter Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock input cycle time (XIN input) Main clock input "H" pulse width Main clock input "L" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0 to INT3 input "H" pulse width INT0 to INT3 input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1 clock input cycle time (Note) Serial I/O1 clock input "H" pulse width (Note) Serial I/O1 clock input "L" pulse width (Note) Serial I/O1 input set up time Serial I/O1 input hold time Serial I/O2 clock input cycle time Serial I/O2 clock input "H" pulse width Serial I/O2 clock input "L" pulse width Serial I/O2 input set up time Serial I/O2 input hold time
Min. 2 125 45 40 250 105 105 80 80 800 370 370 220 100 1000 400 400 200 200
Limits Typ.
Max.
Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Note: When f(XIN) = 8 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when f(XIN) = 8 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is "0" (UART).
Timing requirements 2 (Low power source voltage version)
Table 36 Timing requirements 2 (Low power source voltage version) (VCC = 2.5 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol tw(RESET) tc(XIN) twH(XIN) twL(XIN) tc(CNTR) twH(CNTR) twL(CNTR) twH(INT) twL(INT) tc(SCLK1) twH(SCLK1) twL(SCLK1) tsu(RXD-SCLK1) th(SCLK1-RXD) tc(SCLK2) twH(SCLK2) twL(SCLK2) tsu(SIN2-SCLK2) th(SCLK2-SIN2)
_____
Parameter Reset input "L" pulse width Main clock iuput cycle time (XIN input) Main clock input "H" pulse width Main clock input "L" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time CNTR0, CNTR1 input "H" pulse width CNTR0, CNTR1 input "L" pulse width INT0 to INT3 input "H" pulse width INT0 to INT3 input "L" pulse width Serial I/O1 clock input cycle time (Note) Serial I/O1 clock input "H" pulse width (Note) Serial I/O1 clock input "L" pulse width (Note) Serial I/O1 input set up time Serial I/O1 input hold time Serial I/O2 clock input cycle time Serial I/O2 clock input "H" pulse width Serial I/O2 clock input "L" pulse width Serial I/O2 input set up time Serial I/O2 input hold time
Min. 2 125 45 40 900/ (VCC-0.4) 450/ (VCC-0.4)-20 450/ (VCC-0.4)-20 230 230 2000 950 950 400 200 2000 950 950 400 300
Limits Typ.
Max.
Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Note: When f(XIN) = 2 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is "1" (clock synchronous). Divide this value by four when f(XIN) = 2 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is "0" (UART).
3820GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-63
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Switching characteristics 1 (Low power source voltage version)
Table 37 Switching characteristics 1 (Low power source voltage version) (VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol twH(SCLK1) twL(SCLK1) td(SCLK1-TXD) tv(SCLK1-TXD) tr(SCLK1) tf(SCLK1) twH(SCLK2) twL(SCLK2) td(SCLK2-SOUT2) tv(SCLK2-SOUT2) tf(SCLK2) tr(CMOS) tf(CMOS) Parameter Serial I/O1 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O1 output delay time (Note 1) Serial I/O1 output valid time (Note 1) Serial I/O1 clock output rising time Serial I/O1 clock output falling time Serial I/O2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O2 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O2 output delay time Serial I/O2 output valid time Serial I/O2 clock output falling time CMOS output rising time (Note 2) CMOS output falling time (Note 2) 10 10 0 40 30 30 tc(SCLK2)/2-160 tc(SCLK2)/2-160 0.2!tC(SCLK2) -30 30 30 Limits Min. tc(SCLK1)/2-30 tc(SCLK1)/2-30 140 Typ. Max. Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Notes 1: When the P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit of the UART control register (bit 4 of address 001B 16) is "0". 2: XOUT and XCOUT pins are excluded.
Switching characteristics 2 (Low power source voltage version)
Table 38 Switching characteristics 2 (Low power source voltage version) (VCC = 2.2 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to 85 C, unless otherwise noted) Symbol twH(SCLK1) twL(SCLK1) td(SCLK1-TXD) tv(SCLK1-TXD) tr(SCLK1) tf(SCLK1) twH(SCLK2) twL(SCLK2) td(SCLK2-SOUT2) tv(SCLK2-SOUT2) tf(SCLK2) tr(CMOS) tf(CMOS) Parameter Serial I/O1 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O1 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O1 output delay time (Note 1) Serial I/O1 output valid time (Note 1) Serial I/O1 clock output rising time Serial I/O1 clock output falling time Serial I/O2 clock output "H" pulse width Serial I/O2 clock output "L" pulse width Serial I/O2 output delay time Serial I/O2 output valid time Serial I/O2 clock output falling time CMOS output rising time (Note 2) CMOS output falling time (Note 2) 20 20 0 50 50 50 tc(SCLK2)/2-240 tc(SCLK2)/2-240 0.2!tC(SCLK2) -30 50 50 Limits Min. tc(SCLK1)/2-50 tc(SCLK1)/2-50 350 Typ. Max. Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Notes 1: When the P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit of the UART control register (bit 4 of address 001B 16) is "0". 2: XOUT and XCOUT pins are excluded.
Measurement output pin 100pF Measurement output pin CMOS output 100pF 1k
N-channel open-drain output (Note) Note : When bit 4 of the UART control register (address 001B 16) is "1". (N-channel open-drain output mode)
Fig.47 Circuit for measuring output switching characteristics
1-64
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timing diagram
tC(CNTR) tWH(CNTR) tWL(CNTR) 0.2VCC
CNTR0,CNTR1
0.8VCC
tWH(INT)
tWL(INT) 0.2VCC
INT0-INT3
0.8VCC
tW(RESET)
RESET
0.2VCC
0.8VCC
tC(XIN) tWH(XIN) tWL(XIN) 0.2VCC
XIN
0.8VCC
tf
tWL(SCLK1),tWL(SCLK2) 0.2VCC
tC(SCLK1),tC(SCLK2) tr tWH(SCLK1),tWH(SCLK2) 0.8VCC
SCLK1 SCLK2
tsu(RXD-SCLK1) tsu(SIN2-SCLK2)
th(SCLK1-RXD) th(SCLK2-SIN2)
RXD SIN2
0.8VCC 0.2VCC td(SCLK1-TXD),td(SCLK2-SOUT2) tv(SCLK1-TXD), tv(SCLK2-SOUT2)
TXD SOUT2
Fig.48 Timing diagram
3820GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-65
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
STANDARD CHARACTERISTICS Power Source Current Characteristic Examples (ICC-VCC characteristics).
Figure 49, Figure 50, and Figure 51 show ICC-VCC characteristic examples.
Measuring condition : 25C, f(X IN) = 8MHz
10
Power source current ICC [mA]
9 8 7 6 5 4
High-speed mode
Middle-speed mode
3 2 1 0 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
High-speed mode in wait mode and Middle-speed mode in wait mode
6.5
Power source voltage V CC [V]
Fig. 49 ICC-VCC characteristic example (f(XIN) = 8 MHz)
Measuring condition : 25C, f(X IN) = 4MHz
5
Power source current I CC [mA]
4
High-speed mode
3
Middle-speed mode
2
High-speed mode in wait mode and Middle-speed mode in wait mode
1
0 2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
Power source voltage V CC [V]
Fig. 50 ICC-VCC characteristic example (f(XIN) = 4 MHz)
1-66
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Measuring condition : 25C, f(X CIN) = 32 kHz oscillator used
50
Power source current ICC [A]
40
30
in low-speed mode
20
10
in wait mode
0 2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
Power source Voltage V CC [V]
Fig. 51 ICC-VCC characteristic example (f(XIN) = 32 kHz, oscillator used)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-67
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Power Source Frequency Characteristic Examples
Figure 52 and Figure 53 show the ICC-f(XIN) characteristic examples.
Measuring condition : 25C, V CC = 3.0 V
3
Power source current ICC [mA]
2
High-speed mode
1
Middle-speed mode High-speed mode in wait mode Middle-speed mode in wait mode
0 0 2 4 6 8 10
Frequency f(XIN) [MHz]
Fig. 52 ICC-f(XIN) characteristic example (VCC = 3.0 V)
Measuring condition : 25C, V CC = 5.0 V
5
High-speed mode
Power source current I CC [mA]
4
3
Middle-speed mode
2
High-speed mode in wait mode and
1
Middle-speed mode in wait mode
0 0 2 4 6 8 10
Frequency f(XIN) [MHz]
Fig. 53 ICC-f(XIN) characteristic example (VCC = 5.0 V)
1-68
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Port Standard Characteristics Examples
Figure 52, Figure 53, Figure 54, and Figure 55 show port standard characteristic examples.
Port P00 IOH-VOH characteristic (P-channel drive) (Pins with same characteristic : P0, P1, P3)
IOH [mA]
-20
VCC = 5 V Ta = 25C
-10
VOC = 3 V Ta = 25C
0 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 VOH [V]
Fig. 54 IOH-VOH characteristic example of CMOS output port at P-channel drive (P0, P1, P3)
Port P00 IOL-VOL characteristic (N-channel drive) (Pins with same characteristic : P0, P1, P3)
IOL [mA] 50
40 VCC = 5 V Ta = 25C 30
20 VCC = 3 V Ta = 25C 10 0 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 VOL [V]
Fig. 55 IOL-VOL characteristic example of CMOS output port at N-channel drive (P0, P1, P3)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
1-69
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Port P20 IOH-VOH characteristic (P-channel drive) (Pins with same characteristic : P2, P5, P6, P7)
IOH [mA] -50
-40
-30
VCC = 5 V Ta = 25 C
-20 VCC = 3 V Ta = 25 C
-10 0 0 0.5 1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5 5.0 VOH [V]
Fig. 56 IOH-VOH characteristic example of CMOS output port at P-channel drive (P2, P5, P6, P7)
Port P20 IOL-VOL characteristic (N-channel drive) (Pins with same characteristic : P2, P5, P6, P7)
IOL [mA] 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 VOL [V] VCC = 3 V Ta = 25 C VCC = 5 V Ta = 25 C
Fig. 57 IOL-VOL characteristic example of CMOS output port at N-channel drive (P2, P5, P6, P7)
1-70
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 I/O pins Interrupts Timer X and timer Y Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3 2.5 Serial I/O1 2.6 Serial I/O2 2.7 LCD drive control circuit 2.8 Watchdog timer 2.9 Standby function 2.10 Reset 2.11 Oscillation circuit
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
2.1 I/O pins
2.1.1 I/O ports (1) I/O port write and read sThe input-only ports and programmable I/O ports set for the input mode The input-only ports and the programmable I/O ports set for the input mode are floating. The value (pin state) input to the port is read by reading the port register corresponding to each port. In writing data into the port register corresponding to each port, the data is only written to the port register but the pin remains in the floating state. sOutput-only ports and programmable I/O ports set for the output mode The value written to the port register corresponding to an output port or a programmable I/O port set for the output mode is output externally through a transistor. In reading the data of the port transistor corresponding to each port, the pin state is not read but the value written to the port register is read. Accordingly, even if the output "H" voltage is reduced or the output "L" voltage is increased by external load, the previous output value is correctly read.
At output : *An output value is set by writing to the port register. *Reading a port register is possible.
At input : *Writing to a port register is possible. *A pin state is read by reading the port register.
"H" level output Port direction register ("1") Port direction registerV ("0")
Port register
Port register (at writing)
"L" level output
Port register (at reading)
Read the pin state V : The P- and N-channel transistors are cut off.
Fig. 2.1.1 I/O port write and read
2-2
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
Table 2.1.1 shows the memory allocation of the port registers corresponding to each port. Table 2.1.1 Memory allocation of port registers Port P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 Port register address 000016 000216 000416 000616 000816 000A16 000C16 000E16
(2) Input/output switching of programmable I/O ports Input/output switching of the programmable I/O ports is performed by the port direction register corresponding to each port (Note). Figure 2.1.2 shows the structure of the port Pi (i = 2, 4 to 7) direction register, and Table 2.1.2 shows the memory allocation of the port direction registers corresponding to each port. Figure 2.1.4 shows a port direction register setting example. Note: In ports P0 and P1, input/output switching is performed by a port unit. By setting bit 0 of the corresponding direction register to "0," the port is set for the input mode. By setting to "1," the port is set for the output mode. Figure 2.1.3 shows the structure of the ports P0 and P1 direction registers.
Port Pi direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port Pi direction register (PiD) (i = 2, 4 to 7) [Address 0516, 0916, 0B16, 0D16, 0F16] B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name Port Pi direction register Functions 0 : Port Pi0 input mode 1 : Port Pi0 output mode 0 : Port Pi1 input mode 1 : Port Pi1 output mode 0 : Port Pi2 input mode 1 : Port Pi2 output mode 0 : Port Pi3 input mode 1 : Port Pi3 output mode 0 : Port Pi4 input mode 1 : Port Pi4 output mode 0 : Port Pi5 input mode 1 : Port Pi5 output mode 0 : Port Pi6 input mode 1 : Port Pi6 output mode 0 : Port Pi7 input mode 1 : Port Pi7 output mode At reset
0
RW x x x x x x x x
0 0 0 0 0
0 0
Notes 1: Nothing is allocated bit 0 of port P4 direction register and bit 2 to bit 7 of port P7 direction register. These bits cannot be written to. 2: The contents of the port Pi direction register cannot be read out (refer to "2.1.4 Notes on use").
Fig. 2.1.2 Structure of port Pi (i = 2, 4 to 7) direction register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-3
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
Port P0 direction register, port P1 direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port P0 direction register (P0D) [Address 0116] Port P1 direction register (P1D) [Address 0316] B 0 Name Port P0 direction register / Port P1 direction register At reset R W Functions 0 : All bits are input mode x 0 1 : All bits are output mode
1 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written to to and be read out. 7
0
xx
Note: In ports P0 and P1, input/output switching is performed by a port unit. By setting bit 0 of the corresponding port direction register to "0", the port is set for the input mode. By setting to "1", the port is set for the output mode. Nothing is allocated for bits 1 to 7 of the ports P0 and P1 direction registers, and these bits cannot be written to.
Fig. 2.1.3 Structure of ports P0 and P1 direction registers
Table 2.1.2 Memory allocation of port direction registers Port P0 P1 P2 P4 P5 P6 P7 Port direction register address 000116 000316 000516 000916 000B16 000D16 000F16
2-4
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
Example : When setting "6B16"
b7 01
10
1
0
1
b0 1 to the port P2 direction register
Input/output direction of port P2
P27 P26 P25 P24 P23 P22 P21 P20
Input
Output Output
Input
Output
Input
Output Output
Fig. 2.1.4 Port direction register setting example
(3) Pull-up control and pull-down control The ports shown in Table 2.1.3 are controlled for pull-up and pull-down by software. Either pull-up or pull-down is controlled by the PULL register A (address 001616) and the PULL register B (address 001716). Figure 2.1.5 shows the structure of the PULL register A and Figure 2.1.6 shows the structure of the PULL register B. Table 2.1.3 I/O ports which either pull-up or pulldown is controlled by software Control Pull-down Pull-up Ports P0, P1, P3 P2, P41 to P47, P5 to P7
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-5
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
PULL register A
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PULL register A (PULLA) [Address 1616] B Name 0 P00-P07 pull-down 1 P10-P17 pull-down 2 P20-P27 pull-up 3 P30-P37 pull-down Functions 0 : No pull-down 1 : Pull-down 0 : No pull-down 1 : Pull-down 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up 0 : No pull-down 1 : Pull-down 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up At reset R W 1 1 0 1 0 0 0x
4 P70, P71 pull-up
5 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written to to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 7
Note: For ports set for the output mode, pull-up or pull-down is impossible.
Fig. 2.1.5 Structure of PULL register A
PULL register B
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PULL register B (PULLB) [Address 1716] B Name P41-P43 pull-up 0 Functions 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x
1 P44-P47 pull-up 2 P50-P53 pull-up 3 P54-P57 pull-up 4 P60, P61 pull-up
0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up 5 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written to to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 7
Note: For ports set for the output mode, pull-up is impossible.
Fig. 2.1.6 Structure of PULL register B
2-6
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
2.1.2 Function pins Each function pin except I/O ports is described below. (1) Pins VCC and VSS f(XIN) MHz Power source input pins. In the high-speed mode, apply ( + 2) V-5.5 V to the VCC pin. 4 In the middle-speed mode or the low-speed mode, apply 2.5 V-5.5 V to the VCC pin. When Ta = -40 C to -20 C, use the extended operating temperature version, and apply 3.0 V-5.5 V to the VCC pin. In all modes, apply 0 V to the VSS pin. (2) Pins VL1, VL2 and VL3 Power source input pins for LCD. Apply 0 VL1 VL2 VL3 VCC of voltage to these pins. (3) Pins XIN and XOUT An input pin and an output pin for the main clock generating circuit. (4) RESET pin The 3820 group is reset internally by keeping the level of this pin at "L" for 2 s or more. Reset state is released by returning the level of this pin to "H". (5) Pins SEG0 to SEG15 Segment signal output pins for LCD. (6) Pins COM0 to COM3 Common signal output pins for LCD.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-7
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
2.1.3 Application examples The basic structure for key input without a pull-up resistor and an application examples of it are described below. In contrast to a method which uses a pull-up resistor, dissipating current incessantly, this method requires only a charging current for a very small capacitance, so it is especially suitable for a battery-driven unit. In the following description, ports A, B, C and D are only tentative names and differ from the real port names. (1) Basic structure for key input Figure 2.1.7 shows a connection example 1 for key input without a pull-up resistor and Figure 2.1.8 shows the key input control procedure 1. Figure 2.1.9 shows a timing diagram 1 where switch A is pressed.
CMOS I/O port A CMOS I/O port B CMOS I/O port C Virtual capacitor (C)
SW A
SW B
SW C
r = 10 k
Fig. 2.1.7 Connection example 1 for key input
V1
Key input
V1 In the case of no key input, output "L" (Noise countermeasure).
V2
Output "H" for charging to each port
V2 A virtual capacitor (C) is charged by outputting "H." (For capacitance, refer to the next page.) V3 Set the port direction register for input mode with an instruction immediately after "H" is output. (For the limit timer for ON/OFF judgment and the discharging time at ON, refer to the next page.) V4 For double reading to ensure data, repeat V2 and V3.
After inputting data into the port direction register, judge ON/OFF of key input.
V3
V4
Fig. 2.1.8 Key input control procedure 1
2-8
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
Charge time
T t2
Charge time
t2 "H" output
CMOS I/O port A
"L" output
"H" output Input Read port state
Input Read port state
CMOS I/O port B
"L" output
"H" output
Input t1
"H" output
Input
CMOS I/O port C
"L" output
"H" output
Input
"H" output
Input
Fig. 2.1.9 Timing diagram 1 where switch A is pressed The discharging time (, ) after completion of charge in Figure 2.1.9 is shown with the following expression. The discharging time (T) is obtained with T = CR. qThe capacitance of the virtual capacitor (C) is: Capacitance of microcomputer output transistors and input transistors ... Approx. 10 pF Capacitance of package pin ............................................................................. Several pF + Capacitance of each key wiring ....................................................................... Several pF (minimum) Approx. 10 pF qIn the leak current standard at 5 V, the maximum value is 5 A and the standard value is 0.05 A. Accordingly, the minimum resistance (R) is 1 M and the standard resistance is 100 M. In the above condition, the discharging time (T) is obtained as follows: T (minimum) = 10 pF ! 1 M = 10 ! 10 -12 ! 1 ! 10 6 = 10 ! 10 -6 (s) T (standard) = 10 pF ! 100 M = 10 ! 10 -12 ! 100 ! 10 6 = 1 ! 10 -3 (s) Accordingly, the discharging time (T) is 10 s (minimum) to 1 ms (standard).
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-9
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
TThe discharging time (t2) at ON is obtained with t = Cr in the same way as the previous page, with the result of t = 100 ns. TJudge ON/OFF of key input within the time (t1) which is obtained as follows: After the completion of "H" output, Vt1 = VO ! e -t1/T t1 = -T ! 1n Vt1 VO VO : "H" output voltage Vt1 : Input voltage after t1(s)
The standard time at VO = 5.0 V, Vt1 = 3.5 V t1 = -1 ! 10 -3 ! 1n 3.5 5.0
357 s
(2) Key input application example According to the key input without a pull-up resistor described in (1), an effective application example where there are enough ports is shown below. This method reduces both current dissipation and quantity of parts compared with the example shown in (1). Figure 2.1.10 shows a connection example 2 for key input using port D and Figure 2.1.11 shows the key input control procedure 2. Figure 2.1.12 shows a timing diagram 2 where switch A is pressed.
CMOS I/O port A CMOS I/O port B CMOS I/O port C CMOS I/O port D
SW A
SW B
SW C Virtual capacitor (C)
Fig. 2.1.10 Connection example 2 for key input
V1
Key input
V1 In the case of no key input, output "L" (Noise countermeasure).
V2
Output "H" for charging to each port
V3
V2 A virtual capacitor (C) is charged by outputting "H." (For capacitance, refer to the previous page.) V3 Set the port direction register for input mode with an instruction immediately after "H" is output. V4 Output "L" with the next instruction (refer to "Figure 2.1.12 (A)") V5 For double reading to ensure data, repeat V2, V3 and V4.
Set the port direction register for the input mode
V4
After outputting "L" from the port D, judge ON/OFF of key input.
V5
Fig. 2.1.11 Key input control procedure 2 2-10
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
(A)
(A)
Charge time t2
T
Charge time
t2 "H" output
CMOS I/O port A
"L" output
"H" output Input Read port state
Input Read port state "H" output t1 Input
CMOS I/O port B
"L" output
"H" output
Input
CMOS I/O port C
"L" output
"H" output
Input
"H" output
Input
CMOS I/O port D
"L" output
"H" output
"L" output
"H" output
"L" output
Fig. 2.1.12 Timing diagram 2 where switch A is pressed With the exception that "L" is output using port D for key input (refer to "Figure 2.1.12 (A)"), the basic structure is the same as that shown in (1). The examples shown in (1) and (2) are already put into practical use. However, be sure to evaluate them on the user's side. In this example, the ports are the same structure as the equivalent circuit which a pull-up resistor of about 1 k is connected.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-11
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
2.1.4 Notes on use When using I/O ports, note the following. (1) Reading the port direction register The value of the port direction register is not readable. The following cannot be used: * the data transfer instruction (LDA, etc.) * the operation instruction when the index X mode flag (T) is "1" * the addressing mode which uses the value of a direction register as an index * the bit-test instruction (BBC or BBS, etc.) to a direction register * the read-modify-write instruction (ROR, CLB, or SEB, etc.) to a direction register Use instructions such as LDM and STA, etc., to set the port direction registers. (2) When the data register (port latch) of an I/O port is modified with the bit managing instruction When the data register (port latch) of an I/O port is modified with the bit managing instruction V1, the value of the unspecified bit may be changed. REASON The bit managing instructions are read-modify-write form instructions for reading and writing data by a byte unit. Accordingly, when these instructions are executed on a bit of the data register of an I/O port, the following is executed to all bits of the data register. qAs for a bit which is set for an input port: The pin state is read in the CPU, and is written to this bit after bit managing. qAs for a bit which is set for an output port: The bit value is read in the CPU, and is written to this bit after bit managing. Note the following: qEven when a port which is set as an output port is changed for an input port, its data register holds the output data. qAs for a bit of which is set for an input port, its value may be changed even when not specified with a bit managing instruction in case where the pin state differs from its data register contents V1 bit managing instructions : SEB and CLB instruction (3) Pull-up control and pull-down control To pull-up or pull-down ports by software, note the following. qWhen ports P0, P1 and P3 are used as segment output pins for LCD, the settings of the pull-down bits corresponding to these ports of the PULL register A are invalid (pull-down is impossible). qWhen ports P0-P2, P41-P47 and P5-P7 are set for the output mode, the settings of the bits corresponding to these ports of the PULL register A and PULL register B are invalid (pull-up or pulldown are impossible).
2-12
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
(4) Notes in standby state In standby state V2 for low-power dissipation, do not make input levels of an input port and an I/O port "undefined", especially for I/O ports of the P-channel and the N-channel open-drain. Pull-up (connect the port to VCC) or pull-down (connect the port to VSS) these ports through a resistor. When determining a resistance value, note the following points: qExternal circuit qVariation of output levels during the ordinary operation When using built-in pull-up or pull-down resistor as an option, note on varied current values. qWhen setting as an input port : Fix its input level qWhen setting as an output port : Prevent current from flowing out to external REASON Even when setting as an output port with its direction register, in the following state: qP-channel......when the content of the data register (port latch) is "0" qN-channel......when the content of the data register (port latch) is "1" the transistor becomes the OFF state, which causes the ports to be the high-impedance state. Note that the level becomes "undefined" depending on external circuits. Accordingly, the potential which is input to the input buffer in a microcomputer is unstable in the state that input levels of a input port and an I/O port are "undefined". This may cause power source current. V2 standby state : the stop mode by executing the STP instruction the wait mode by executing the WIT instruction
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-13
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
(5) Termination of unused pins Table 2.1.4 shows termination of unused pins. Table 2.1.4 Termination of unused pins Pins Terminations
P20-P27 P41/ P44/RxD P45/TxD P46/SCLK1 P47/SRDY1 P50/SIN2 After set for the input mode and put the built-in pull-up resistor in the ON state, P51/SOUT2 open. V1 P52/SCLK2 Set for the output mode and open at "L" or "H." V2 P53/SRDY2 P54/CNTR0 P55/CNTR1 P56/TOUT P61/RTP1 P70/XCOUT P71/XCIN P00/SEG24-P07/SEG31 After set for the input mode and put the built-in pull-down resistor in the ON P10/SEG32-P17/SEG39 state, open.V1 Set for the output mode and open at "L" or "H." V2 P40 Connect each pin to VCC or VSS through each resistor of 1 k to 10 k. P42/INT0 After disabling INT interrupts, set for the input mode, and put the built-in pull-up P43/INT1 resistor in the ON state, open. V1 P57/INT2 Set for the output mode and open at "L" or "H." V2 P60/INT3/RTP0 Connect to VSS level VL1-VL3 COM0-COM3 Open SEG0-SEG15 P30/SEG16-P37/SEG23 Put the built-in pull-down resistor in the ON state, open. V1
V1 After reset and before the built-in pull-up (pull-down) resistor is put in the ON state by software, the built-in pull-up (pull-down) resistor is in the OFF state. Because of this, the potential at these pins are "undefined" and the power source current may increase. Since the direction register setup may be changed for the output mode because of a program runaway or noise, set direction register for the input mode periodically. And make the length of wiring which is connected I/O ports within 2 cm. V2 After reset and before I/O ports are switched for the output mode by software, I/O ports are set for the input mode. Because of this, the potential at these pins are "undefined" and the power source current may increase in the input mode. Since the direction register setup may be changed for the input mode because of a program runaway or noise, set direction register for the output mode periodically. And make the length of wiring which is connected I/O ports within 2 cm.
2-14
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.1 Explanation of operations When an interrupt request is accepted, the contents immediately before acceptance of the interrupt requests of the following registers is automatically pushed onto the stack area in the order of , and . High-order (PCH) contents of program counter Low-order (PCL) contents of program counter Contents of processor status register (PS) After the contents of the above registers are pushed onto the stack area, the accepted interrupt vector address enters the program counter and consequently the interrupt processing routine is executed. When the RTI instruction is executed at the end of the interrupt processing routine, the contents of the above registers pushed onto the stack area are restored to the respective registers in the order of , and and the processing executed immediately before acceptance of the interrupts is continued. Figure 2.2.1 shows an interrupt operation diagram.
Executing routine ******* Interrupt occurs (Accepting interrupt request)
Suspended operation
Contents of program counter (high-order) are pushed onto stack Contents of program counter (low-order) are pushed onto stack Contents of processor status register are pushed onto stack Interrupt processing routine RTI instruction Contents of processor status register are poped from stack Contents of program counter (low-order) are poped from stack Contents of program counter (high-order) are poped from stack
Resume processing *******
: Operation commanded by software : Internal operation to be performed automatically
Fig. 2.2.1 Interrupt operation diagram
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-15
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(1) Interrupt request generating conditions Table 2.2.1 shows interrupt sources and interrupt request generating conditions. The occurrence of an interrupt request causes the corresponding interrupt request bit to be set to "1." When the following conditions are satisfied in this state, the interrupt request is accepted. For details, refer to "2.2.2 Control". Interrupt disable flag = "0" (interrupts enabled) Interrupt enable bit = "1" (interrupts enabled) Table 2.2.1 Interrupt sources and interrupt request generating conditions Interrupt sources Interrupt request generating conditions Reference INT0 At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT0 input 2.2.4 INT interrupts (Active edge selectable) At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT1 input INT1 (Active edge selectable) At completion of serial I/O1 data reception Serial I/O1 receive At completion of serial I/O1 transmit shift or when transmit 2.5 Serial I/O1 Serial I/O1 transmit buffer register is empty At timer X underflow Timer X 2.3 Timer X and timer Y At timer Y underflow Timer Y At timer 2 underflow Timer 2 2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3 At timer 3 underflow Timer 3 At detection of either rising or falling edge of CNTR0 CNTR0 input (Active edge selectable) 2.3 Timer X and timer Y At detection of either rising or falling edge of CNTR1 CNTR1 input (Active edge selectable) Timer 1 At timer 1 underflow 2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3 INT2 At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT2 input (Active edge selectable) INT3 At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT3 input 2.2.4 INT interrupts (Active edge selectable) At falling of conjunction of input level for port P2 (at Key input 2.2.5 Key input interrupt input mode) (Key-on wake up) At completion of serial I/O2 data transmission Serial I/O2 2.6 Serial I/O2 or reception BRK instruction At BRK instruction execution SERIES 740 USER'S MANUAL
2-16
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(2) Processing upon acceptance of an interrupt request Upon acceptance of an interrupt request, the following operations are automatically performed. The processing being executed is stopped. The contents of the program counter and the processor status register are pushed onto the stack area. Figure 2.2.2 shows changes of the stack pointer and the program counter upon acceptance of an interrupt request. Concurrently with the push operation, the jump destination address (the beginning address of the interrupt processing routine) of the occurring interrupt stored in the vector address is set in the program counter, then the interrupt processing routine is executed. After the interrupt processing routine is started, the corresponding interrupt request bit is automatically cleared to "0." The interrupt disable flag is set to "1" so that multiple interrupts are disabled. Accordingly, for executing the interrupt processing routine, it is necessary to set the jump destination address in the vector area corresponding to each interrupt.
Program counter PCL Program counter (high-order) PCH Program counter (low-order) Stack pointer S (S) Interrupt request is accepted Program counter PCL PCH Vector address (from Interrupt vector area) Stack pointer S (S) - 3 Interrupt disable flag = "1" (s) - 3 Interrupt disable flag = "0" (S)
Stack area
Stack area
Processor status register Program counter (low-order) (S) Program counter (high-order)
Fig. 2.2.2 Changes of stack pointer and program counter upon acceptance of interrupt request
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-17
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(3) Timing after acceptance of an interrupt request The interrupt processing routine is started at the timing of machine cycle after completion of the executing instruction. Figure 2.2.3 shows the processing time up to the execution of an interrupt processing routine and Figure 2.2.4 shows timing after the acceptance of an interrupt request.
Interrupt request occurs
Interrupt operation starts
V
Main routine
Waiting time for pipeline postprocessing
V
Push onto stack Vector fetch
Interrupt processing routine
0 to 16 cycles
2 cycles
5 cycles
7 to 23 cycles (At internal system clock = 3.15 MHz, 2.2 s to 7.3 s) V : Refer to "Figure 2.2.4"
Fig. 2.2.3 Processing time up to execution of interrupt processing routine
Waiting time for pipeline postprocessing
Push onto stack Vector fetch
Interrupt operation starts
SYNC RD WR Address bus Data bus PC Not used
S, SPS S-1, SPS S-2, SPS
BL AL
BH
AL, AH AH
PCH PCL
PS
SYNC : CPU operation code fetch cycle (This is an internal signal which cannot be observed from the external unit.) BL, BH : Vector address of each interrupt AL, AH : Jump destination address of each interrupt (Note) SPS : "0016" or "0116" Note: Refer to "Table 6 in CHAPTER 1 HARDWARE ."
Fig. 2.2.4 Timing after acceptance of interrupt request
2-18
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.2 Control For interrupts except the BRK instruction interrupt, the acceptance of interrupt can be controlled by an interrupt request bit, an interrupt enable bit, and an interrupt disable flag. In this section, control of interrupts except the BRK instruction interrupt is described and Figure 2.2.5 shows an interrupt control diagram.
Interrupt request bit Interrupt enable bit Interrupt request Interrupt disable flag BRK instruction Reset
Fig. 2.2.5 Interrupt control diagram An interrupt request bit, an interrupt enable bit and an interrupt disable flag function independently and do not affect each other. An interrupt is accepted when all the following conditions are satisfied. qInterrupt request bit -- "1" qInterrupt enable bit -- "1" qInterrupt disable flag -- "0" Though the interrupt priority is determined by software, a variety of priority processing can be performed by software using the above bits and flag. Table 2.2.2 shows a list of interrupt bits for individual interrupt sources. (1) Interrupt request bits The interrupt request bits are allocated to the interrupt request register 1 (address 003C16) and interrupt request register 2 (address 003D16). The occurrence of an interrupt request causes the corresponding interrupt request bit to be set to "1." The interrupt request bit is held in the "1" state until the interrupt is accepted. When the interrupt is accepted, this bit is automatically cleared to "0." Each interrupt request bit can be set to "0" by software, but it cannot be set to "1" by software.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-19
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(2) Interrupt enable bits The interrupt enable bits are allocated to the interrupt control register 1 (address 003E16) and the interrupt control register 2 (address 003F16). The interrupt enable bits control the acceptance of the corresponding interrupt request. When an interrupt enable bit is "0," the corresponding interrupt request is disabled. If an interrupt request occurs when this bit is "0," the corresponding interrupt request bit is only set to "1" and this interrupt is not accepted. In this case, unless the interrupt request bit is set to "0" by software, the interrupt request bit remains in the "1" state. When an interrupt enable bit is "1," the corresponding interrupt is enabled. If an interrupt request occurs when this bit is "1," this interrupt is accepted (at interrupt disable flag = "0"). Each interrupt enable bit can be set to "0" or "1" by software. (3) Interrupt disable flag The interrupt disable flag is allocated to bit 2 of the processor status register. The interrupt disable flag controls the acceptance of interrupt request. When this flag is "1," the acceptance of interrupt requests is disabled. When the flag is "0," the acceptance of interrupt requests is enabled. This flag is set to "1" with the SEI instruction and is set to "0" with the CLI instruction. When a main routine branches to an interrupt processing routine, this flag is automatically set to "1," so that multiple interrupts are disabled. To use multiple interrupts, set this flag to "0" with the CLI instruction within the interrupt processing routine. Figure 2.2.6 shows an example of multiple interrupts. Table 2.2.2 List of interrupt bits for individual interrupt sources Interrupt request bit Interrupt sources Address Bit INT0 003C16 b0 003C16 INT1 b1 003C16 Serial I/O1 receive b2 003C16 Serial I/O1 transmit b3 003C16 Timer X b4 003C16 Timer Y b5 003C16 Timer 2 b6 003C16 Timer 3 b7 003D16 CNTR0 b0 003D16 CNTR1 b1 003D16 Timer 1 b2 003D16 b3 INT2 003D16 b4 INT3 Key input 003D16 b5 Serial I/O2 003D16 b6
Interrupt enable bit Address 003E16 003E16 003E16 003E16 003E16 003E16 003E16 003E16 003F16 003F16 003F16 003F16 003F16 003F16 003F16 Bit b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6
2-20
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
Interrupt request
Nesting Reset
Time
Main routine I=1 C1 = 0, C2 = 0 Interrupt request 1 C1 = 1 I=0 Interrupt 1 Interrupt request 2 I=1 C2 = 1 I=0 Interrupt 2 I=1 RTI I=0 Multipul interrupt
RTI I=0
I : Interrupt disable flag C1 : Interrupt enable bit of interrupt 1 C2 : Interrupt enable bit of interrupt 2 : They are set automatically. : Set by software.
Fig. 2.2.6 Example of multiple interrupts
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-21
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.3 Related registers Figure 2.2.7 shows memory allocation of interrupt-related registers. Each of these registers is described below.
Address 003A16 003B16 003C16 003D16 003E16 003F16 Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE)
Fig. 2.2.7 Memory allocation of interrupt-related registers (1) Interrupt edge selection register (address 003A16) The interrupt edge selection register selects an active edge of each INT interrupt. Bit 0 to bit 3 select active edges of INT0-INT3 pins inputs. In the "0" state, the falling edge ( ) of the corresponding pin input is active. In the "1" state, the rising edge ( ) of the corresponding pin input is active. Figure 2.2.8 shows the structure of the interrupt edge selection register.
Interrupt edge selection register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE) [Address 3A16]
B 0 Name Functions 0 : Falling edge active 1 : Rising edge active 0 : Falling edge active 1 : Rising edge active At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0x
INT0 interrupt edge selection bit 1 INT1 interrupt edge selection bit 0 : Falling edge active 2 INT2 interrupt edge 1 : Rising edge active selection bit 0 : Falling edge active 3 INT3 interrupt edge 1 : Rising edge active selection bit Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be 4 to written to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 7
Fig. 2.2.8 Structure of interrupt edge selection register
2-22
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(2) Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) and interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) The interrupt request register 1 (address 003C16) and the interrupt request register 2 (address 003D16) indicate whether an interrupt request has occurred or not. Figure 2.2.9 shows the structure of the interrupt request register 1 and Figure 2.2.10 shows the structure of the interrupt request register 2. The occurrence of an interrupt request causes the corresponding bit to be set to "1." This interrupt request bit is automatically cleared to "0" by the acceptance of the interrupt request. The interrupt request bits can be set to "0" by software, but it cannot be set to "1" by software. The occurrence of each interrupt is controlled by the interrupt enable bits (refer to the next item).
Interrupt request register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) [Address 3C16] B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name INT0 interrupt request bit INT1 interrupt request bit Serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit Timer X interrupt request bit Timer Y interrupt request bit Timer 2 interrupt request bit Timer 3 interrupt request bit Functions 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V V V V V V V V
V : "0" can be set by software, but "1" cannot be set.
Fig. 2.2.9 Structure of interrupt request register 1
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-23
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
Interrupt request register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) [Address 3D16] Name CNTR0 interrupt request bit 1 CNTR1 interrupt request bit 0 Timer 1 interrupt request bit 3 INT2 interrupt request bit 4 INT3 interrupt request bit 5 Key input interrupt request bit 6 Serial I/O2 interrupt request bit 2 7 B At reset R W Functions 0 : No interrupt request issued V 0 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V V V V V V 0x
0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and is fixed to "0" at reading.
V : "0" can be set by software, but "1" cannot be set.
Fig. 2.2.10 Structure of interrupt request register 2
2-24
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(3) Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) and interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) The interrupt control register 1 (address 003E16) and the interrupt control register 2 (address 003F16) control each interrupt request source. Figure 2.2.11 shows the structure of the interrupt control register 1 and Figure 2.2.12 shows the structure of the interrupt control register 2. When an interrupt enable bit is "0," the corresponding interrupt request is disabled. If an interrupt request occurs when this bit is "0," the corresponding interrupt request bit is only set to "1," and the interrupt request is not accepted. When an interrupt enable bit is "1," the corresponding interrupt request is enabled. If an interrupt request occurs when this bit is "1," the interrupt request is accepted (at interrupt disable flag = "0"). Each interrupt enable bit can be set to "0" or "1" by software.
Interrupt control register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) [Address 3E16] B 0 1 2 Name INT0 interrupt enable bit INT1 interrupt enable bit Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit Functions 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit 4 Timer X interrupt enable bit 5 Timer Y interrupt enable bit Timer 2 interrupt 6 enable bit 7 Timer 3 interrupt enable bit
Fig. 2.2.11 Structure of interrupt control register 1
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-25
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
Interrupt control register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) [Address 3F16] B Name 0 CNTR0 interrupt enable bit 1 CNTR1 interrupt enable bit 2 3 4 5 6 7 Timer 1 interrupt enable bit INT2 interrupt enable bit INT3 interrupt enable bit Key input interrupt enable bit Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit Fix this bit to "0." Functions
0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled
At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
Fig. 2.2.12 Structure of interrupt control register 2
2-26
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(4) Processor status register The processor status register is an 8-bit register. Figure 2.2.13 shows the structure of the processor status register. Bit 2 related to an interrupt is described below. sInterrupt disable flag : bit 2 The interrupt disable flag controls the acceptance of interrupt requests except BRK instruction interrupt. When this flag is "1," the acceptance of an interrupt request is disabled. When this flag is "0," the acceptance of an interrupt request is enabled. This flag is set to "1" with the SEI instruction and is set to "0" with the CLI instruction. When a main routine branches to an interrupt processing routine, this flag is automatically set to "1," so that multiple interrupts are disabled. To use multiple interrupts, set this flag to "0" with the CLI instruction within the interrupt processing routine.
Processor status register
b7 Undefined b2 1 b0
Undefined
Processor status register (PS) B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Flag name C : Carry flag Z : Zero flag I : Interrupt disable flag D : Decimal mode flag B : Break flag T : Index X mode flag V : Overflow flag N : Negative flag
b7
b0 indicates initial value immediately after reset
Fig. 2.2.13 Structure of processor status register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-27
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.4 INT interrupts The INT interrupt requests occur by detecting a level change of each INT pin (INT0-INT3). (1) Active edge selection As an active edge, falling edge ( ) detection or rising edge ( ) detection can be selected by bits 0 to 3 of the interrupt edge selection register (address 003A16). In the "0" state, the falling edge of the corresponding pin is detected. In the "1" state, the rising edge of the corresponding pin is detected. The pins INT0 to INT3 are also used as I/O ports P42, P43, P57, and P60, but no register to switch between INT pin and I/O port is available. When the port is an input port, the active edges of the port are always detected. Accordingly, when using ports P42, P43, P57 and P60 as input ports, put the corresponding INT interrupt into the disabled state. If this interrupt is not disabled, an INT interrupt is caused by pin level change, so that the program runs away. Figure 2.2.14 shows the structure of the interrupt edge selection register.
Interrupt edge selection register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE) [Address 3A16]
B 0 Name Functions 0 : Falling edge active 1 : Rising edge active 0 : Falling edge active 1 : Rising edge active 0 : Falling edge active 1 : Rising edge active At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0x
INT0 interrupt edge selection bit 1 INT1 interrupt edge selection bit 2 INT2 interrupt edge selection bit 0 : Falling edge active 3 INT3 interrupt edge 1 : Rising edge active selection bit 4 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be to written to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 7
Fig. 2.2.14 Structure of interrupt edge selection register
2-28
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.5 Key input interrupt The Key input interrupt request occurs when an "L" level voltage is applied to the pin set for the input mode of the port P2. For interrupt sources except the INT interrupts and the Key input interrupt, refer to "CHAPTER 1". (1) Connection example when the Key input interrupt is used When using the Key input interrupt, after set ports P20 to P23 for the input mode, configure an "L" level valid key-matrix. Figure 2.2.15 shows a connection example when the key input interrupt is used, and a port P2 block diagram. In the connection example in Figure 2.2.15, an Key input interrupt request is caused by pressing the key corresponding to one of ports P20 to P23.
Port PXx "L" level output PULL register A, b2 = "1" V1 P27 output V1 P26 output V1 P25 output V1 P24 output V1 P23 input V1 P22 input V1 P21 input V1 P20 input V2 V2 V2 V2 V2 V2 V2 V2 Port P27 Port P2 direction register, b7 = "1" latch
Port P26 Port P2 direction register, b6 = "1" latch
Port P25 Port P2 direction register, b5 = "1" latch
Port P24 Port P2 direction register, b4 = "1" latch
Port P23 Port P2 direction register, b3 = "0" latch
Port P2 input reading circuit
Port P22 Port P2 direction register, b2 = "0" latch
Port P21 Port P2 direction register, b1 = "0" latch
Port P20 Port P2 direction register, b0 = "0" latch
V1: P-channel transistor for pull-up V2: CMOS output buffer
Key input interrupt request
Fig. 2.2.15 Connection example when key input interrupt is used, and port P2 block diagram
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-29
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(2) Set values of Key input interrupt-related registers When using the Key input interrupt, set the following: qPort P2 direction register (address 000516) qBit 2 of PULL register A (address 001616) qBit 5 of interrupt request register 2 (address 003D16) = "0" qBit 5 of interrupt control register 2 (address 003F16) (Note) = "1" Figure 2.2.16 shows the setting values (corresponding to Figure 2.2.15) of the Key input interruptrelated registers. Note: Fix bit 7 of the interrupt control register 2 (address 003F16) to "0."
b7
b0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Port P2 direction register [Address 0516] Bits corresponding to P20-P27 0 : Input port 1 : Output port
b7 1
b0 PULL register A [Address 1616] P20-P27 pull-up 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up
b7 0
b0 Interrupt request register 2 [Address 3D16] Key input interrupt request bit 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued
b7 0 1
b0 Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16] Key input interrupt enable bit 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled
: "0" or "1."
Fig. 2.2.16 Setting values (corresponding to Figure 2.2.15) of key input interrupt-related registers
2-30
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.6 Notes on use When using interrupts, note the following. (1) Register setting sFix bit 7 of the interrupt control register 2 (address 003F16) to "0." Nothing is allocated for this bit, however, do not write "1" to it. sWhen using I/O ports P42, P43, P57 and P60 as input ports, put the INT interrupts corresponding to each port into the disabled state. sWhen the active edges of the following interrupts are switched, the corresponding interrupt request bit may be set to "1." To avoid accepting an interrupt request, we recommend the register setting example shown in Figure 2.2.17. qINT0 interrupt to INT3 interrupt qCNTR0 interrupt and CNTR1 interrupt
Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to "0" Set the interrupt active edge Set the corresponding interrupt request bit to "0" Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to "1"
Fig. 2.2.17 Register setting example
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-31
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3.1 Explanation of timer X operations Timer X has 4 modes of operation. Operation in each mode is described below. (1) Timer mode Operation in the timer mode is described below. xStart of count operation Immediately after reset release, the timer X stop control bit is in the "0" state. For this reason, the count operation is automatically started after reset release. The value of the timer X counter (referred as "the X counter") is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. The count source is f(XIN)/16 clock (low-speed mode ; f(XCIN)/16 clock). Reload operation The X counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the X counter reaches "0016." At this time, the value of the timer X latch (referred as "the X latch") is transferred (reloaded) to the X counter. Interrupt operation An interrupt request occurs at the X counter underflow. At the same time, the timer X interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer X interrupt enable bit. An interrupt request occurs each time the counter underflows. In other words, an interrupt request occurs every "the X counter initial value + 1" count of the rising edge of the count source. Stop of count operation By writing "1" to the timer X stop control bit by software, the count operation is stopped. The count operation is continued until "1" is set to the timer X stop control bit. Figure 2.3.1 shows a timer mode operation example.
2-32
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Count period Count period T(s) = 1 / count source frequency ! (the X counter initial value + 1)
Timer mode operation example *UF : Underflow *RL : Reload *n : The X counter initial value Timer X stop control bit Count source
Value of timer X counter
Writing "1" Writing "0"
RL n16 UF
RL
RL
RL Count stop Count restart
UF
UF
UF
000016
T
Time
Timer X interrupt request bit 1 Timer X interrupt enable bit 1 : *Clearing by writing "0" to the timer X interrupt request bit. *Clearing by accepting the timer X interrupt request when the timer X interrupt enable bit is "1." 1 1 1
Fig. 2.3.1 Timer mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-33
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(2) Pulse output mode The operation in the pulse output mode is the same as that in the timer mode, besides, which is added a pulse output operation. In this mode, a pulse whose polarity is reversed at every the X counter underflow is output from the P54/CNTR0 pin. Operation in the pulse output mode is described below. xStart of count operation Immediately after reset release, the timer X stop control bit is in the "0" state. For this reason, the count operation is automatically started after reset release. The value of the X counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. The count source is f(XIN)/16 clock (low-speed mode ; f(XCIN)/16 clock). Reload operation The X counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the X counter reaches "0016." At this time, the value of the X latch is transferred (reloaded) to the X counter. Pulse output A pulse whose polarity is reversed every the X counter underflow is output from the P54/CNTR0 pin. As a level at a start of pulse output, a "H" or "L" is selected by the CNTR0 active edge switch bit. At the time when the pulse output mode is selected by the timer X operating mode bits, a pulse output is started. Interrupt operation sCounter underflow An interrupt request occurs at the X counter underflow. At the same time, the timer X interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer X interrupt enable bit. sEdge of pulse output At the edge of the pulse output from the P54/CNTR0 pin, an interrupt request occurs. At the same time, the CNTR0 interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the CNTR0 interrupt enable bit. As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR0 active edge switch bit. Stop of count operation By writing "1" to the timer X stop control bit by software, the count operation is stopped. The count operation is continued until "1" is set to the timer X stop control bit. Figure 2.3.2 shows a pulse output mode operation example.
2-34
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Count period Count period T(s) = 1 / count source frequency ! (the X counter initial value + 1)
Pulse output mode operation example *UF : Underflow *RL : Reload *n : The X counter initial value Timer X stop control bit Count source Writing "1" Writing "0"
Value of timer X counter
RL n16 UF
RL
RL
RL Count stop Count restart
UF
UF
UF
000016 Select pulse output mode P54/CNTR0 pin Programmable I/O port CNTR0 active edge switch bit CNTR0 interrupt request bit 1 CNTR0 interrupt enable bit Timer X interrupt request bit 1 Timer X interrupt enable bit
T
Time
1
1
1
1
1 : *Clearing by writing "0" to the timer X interrupt request bit or the CNTR0 interrupt request bit. *Clearing by accepting the timer X interrupt request and the CNTR0 interrupt request when the respective interrupt enable bits are "1." V : When the CNTR0 active edge switch bit is "1" ; *The reverse-polarity pulse of above pulse is output. *The CNTR0 interrupt request occurs at the rising edge of the output pulse.
Fig. 2.3.2 Pulse output mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-35
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(3) Event counter mode The operation in the event counter mode is the same as that in the timer mode except that the input signal to the P54/CNTR0 pin is used as a count source. Operation in the event counter mode is described below. xStart of count operation Immediately after reset release, the timer X stop control bit is in the "0" state. For this reason, the count operation is automatically started after reset release. The value of the X counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR0 active edge switch bit. Reload operation The X counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the X counter reaches "0016." At this time, the value of the X latch is transferred (reloaded) to the X counter. Interrupt operation sCounter underflow An interrupt request occurs at the X counter underflow. At the same time, the timer X interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer X interrupt enable bit. sEdge of count source At the edge of the count source input from the P54/CNTR0 pin, an interrupt request occurs. At the same time, the CNTR0 interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the CNTR0 interrupt enable bit. As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR0 active edge switch bit. Stop of count operation By writing "1" to the timer X stop control bit by software, the count operation is stopped. The count operation is continued until "1" is set to the timer X stop control bit. Figure 2.3.3 shows an event counter mode operation example.
2-36
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Count period Count period T(s) = 1 / count source frequency ! (the X counter initial value + 1)
Event counter mode operation example *UF : Underflow *RL : Reload *n : The X counter initial value Timer X stop control bit Count source (P54/CNTR0 pin)
Value of timer X counter
Writing "1" Writing "0"
RL n16 UF
RL
RL
RL Count stop Count restart
UF
UF
UF
000016 T CNTR0 active edge switch bit CNTR0 interrupt request bit 1 CNTR0 interrupt enable bit Timer X interrupt request bit 1 Timer X interrupt enable bit 1 : *Clearing by writing "0" to the timer X interrupt request bit or the CNTR0 interrupt request bit. *Clearing by accepting the timer X interrupt request and the CNTR0 interrupt request when the respective interrupt enable bits are "1." V : When the CNTR0 active edge switch bit is "1" ; *Falling edge of the count source is valid. *The CNTR0 interrupt request occurs at the rising edge of the output pulse. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Time
CNTR0 interrupt request occurs at falling edge of the count source
Fig. 2.3.3 Event counter mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-37
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(4) Pulse width measurement mode In the pulse width measurement mode, the width ("H" or "L" level) of a pulse input from the P54/CNTR0 pin is measured. Operation in the pulse width measurement mode is described below. xCount operation Immediately after reset, the timer X stop control bit is in the "0" state. In this state, a count operation is continued in the period in which the measurement level is input to the P54/CNTR0 pin. The value of the X counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. The count source is f(XIN)/16 clock (low-speed mode ; f(XCIN)/16 clock). Reload operation The X counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the X counter reaches "0016." At this time, the value of the X latch is transferred (reloaded) to the X counter. Pulse width measurement As a pulse measurement period, a "H" or "L" is selected by the CNTR0 active edge switch bit. The difference between the initial value of the X counter and the X counter value at counter stop is a measured pulse width. A reload operation by reading the count value is not performed automatically. Accordingly, to continue the measurement, set the initial value anew by software. When reading a value from the timer X, read both registers in order of the timer X (high-order) and the timer X (low-order). Interrupt operation sEdge of pulse measured At the edge of the pulse input from the P54/CNTR0 pin, an interrupt request occurs. At the same time, the CNTR0 interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the CNTR0 interrupt enable bit. The CNTR0 active edge switch bit specifies an active edge. When "H" level width is measured, the falling edge ( ) is active, when "L" level width is measured, the rising edge ( ) is active. sCounter underflow An interrupt request occurs at the X counter underflow. At the same time, the timer X interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by using the timer X interrupt enable bit. Figure 2.3.4 shows a pulse width measurement mode operation example.
2-38
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Pulse width Pulse width H(s) = 1 / count source frequency ! (the X counter initial value - the X counter value at count stop) Pulse width measurment mode operation example *n : The X counter initial value *m: The X counter value at count stop Timer X stop coutrol bit Count source P54/CNTR0 pin CNTR0 active edge switch bit
Value of timer X counter
Set initial value to counter 2
Count start
Set initial value to counter 2
Count start
n16
Count stop m16
000016 H CNTR0 interrupt request bit CNTR0 interrupt enable bit Timer X interrupt request bit Timer X interrupt enable bit 1 : *Clearing by writing "0" to the CNTR0 interrupt request bit. *Clearing by accepting the CNTR0 interrupt request when the CNTR0 interrupt enable bit is "1." 2 : Set initial value to the timer X when timer X write control bit is "0." V : When the CNTR0 active edge switch bit is "1" ; *"L" level width of the input pulse is measured. *The CNTR0 interrupt request occurs at the rising edge of the input pulse.
Fig. 2.3.4 Pulse width measurement mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
H Time
1
2-39
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(5) Real time port control The real time port control is the function which outputs preset data from the real time ports in synchronization with an underflow of the X counter. Table 2.3.1 shows real time ports and bits for storing data. This real time port control function is available in every mode. A data output from the real time port is started at setting the real time port control bit to "1" (when setting "1" to the real time port control bit of the timer X mode register, use the SEB instruction). When the data for real time port is rewritten, the rewritten values are output at the first underflow of the X counter after rewritting. Figure 2.3.5 shows a timer mode operation example with the real time port function. The real time port is also used as port P60 and P61. When using the real time port, set the corresponding bit of the port P6 direction register (address 000D16) to "1" for the output mode. Table 2.3.1 Real time ports and bits for storing data Real time port RTP0 (P60) RTP1 (P61) Bit for storing data Bit 2 of timer X mode register Bit 3 of timer X mode register
2-40
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Timer mode operation example with real time port function *UF : Underflow *RL : Reload *n : The X counter initial value Timer X stop control bit Count source
Value of timer X counter
RL n16 UF
RL
RL
RL
UF
UF
UF
000016 Time 1 Real time port control bit Bit 2 of timer X mode register P60/INT3/RTP0 pin Programmable I/O port Bit 3 of timer X mode register P61/RTP1 pin Programmable I/O port 1 : In the case that following are set immediately after reset release, "0" is output from pins P60/INT3/RTP0 and P62/RTP1. *Set ports P60 and P61 for the output mode. *Set the real time port control bit to "1." Rewrite Rewrite Rewrite Rewrite Rewrite
Fig. 2.3.5 Timer mode operation example with real time port function
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-41
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3.2 Explanation of timer Y operations Timer Y has 4 modes of operation. Operation in each mode is described below. (1) Timer Mode Operation in the timer mode is described below. xStart of count operation Immediately after reset release, the timer Y stop control bit is in the "0" state. For this reason, the count operation is automatically started after reset release. The value of the timer Y counter (referred as "the Y counter") is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. The count source is f(XIN)/16 clock (low-speed mode ; f(XCIN)/16 clock). Reload operation The Y counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the Y counter reaches "0016." At this time, the value of the timer Y latch (referred as "the Y latch") is transferred (reloaded) to the Y counter. Interrupt operation An interrupt request occurs at the Y counter underflow. At the same time, the timer Y interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer Y interrupt enable bit. An interrupt request occurs each time the counter underflows. In other words, an interrupt request occurs every "the Y counter initial value + 1" count of the rising edge of the count source. Stop of count operation By writing "1" to the timer Y stop control bit by software, the count operation is stopped. The count operation is continued until "1" is set to the timer Y stop control bit. Figure 2.3.6 shows a timer mode operation example.
2-42
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Count period Count period T(s) = 1 / count source frequency ! (the Y counter initial value + 1)
Timer mode operation example *UF : Underflow *RL : Reload *n : The Y counter initial value Timer Y stop control bit Count source Writing "1" Writing "0"
Value of timer Y counter
RL n16 UF
RL
RL
RL Count stop Count restart
UF
UF
UF
000016 T Timer Y interrupt request bit 1 Timer Y interrupt enable bit 1 : *Clearing by writing "0" to the timer Y interrupt request bit. *Clearing by accepting the timer Y interrupt request when the timer Y interrupt enable bit is "1." 1 1 1 Time
Fig. 2.3.6 Timer mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-43
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(2) Period measurement mode In the period measurement mode, the period of a pulse input from the P55/CNTR1 pin is measured. Operation in the period measurement mode is described below. xStart of count operation Immediately after reset release, the timer Y stop control bit is in the "0" state. For this reason, the count operation is automatically started after reset release. The value of the Y counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. The count source is f(XIN)/16 clock (low-speed mode ; f(XCIN)/16 clock). Reload operation At the edge of the pulse input from the P55/CNTR1 pin, the value of the Y latch is transferred (reloaded) to the Y counter. The count value immediately before reload is held until it is read out once after reload. As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR1 active edge switch bit. The value of the Y latch is also reloaded at the Y counter underflow. Period measurement As a period measurement duration, the following is selected by the CNTR1 active edge switch bit (bit 6) : Duration from the falling edge to the falling edge (bit 6 = "0") Duration from the rising edge to the rising edge (bit 6 = "1") The difference between the count value at an active edge input and that immediately before reload is a measured period. Interrupt operation sEdge of input pulse At the edge of the pulse input from the P55/CNTR1 pin, an interrupt request occurs. At the same time, the CNTR1 interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the CNTR1 interrupt enable bit. As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR1 active edge switch bit. sCounter underflow An interrupt request occurs at the Y counter underflow. At the same time, the timer Y interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer Y interrupt enable bit. Figure 2.3.7 shows a period measurement mode operation example.
2-44
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Pulse period Pulse period T(s) = 1 / count source frequency ! (the Y counter initial value - the Y counter value immediately before reload )
Period measurement mode operation example *RL : Reload *n : The Y counter initial value *m : The Y counter value immediately before reload Timer Y stop control bit Count source P55/CNTR1 pin CNTR1 active edge switch bit
Value of timer Y counter
RL n16
RL
RL
m16
000016 T T Time
CNTR1 interrupt request bit 1 CNTR1 interrupt enable bit Timer Y interrupt request bit Timer Y interrupt enable bit 1 : *Clearing by writing "0" to the CNTR1 interrupt request bit. *Clearing by accepting the CNTR1 interrupt request when the CNTR1 interrupt enable bit is "1." V : When the CNTR1 active edge switch bit is "1" ; *From the rising edge to the rising edge of the input pulse is measured. *The CNTR1 interrupt request occurs at the rising edge of the input pulse. 1 1
Fig. 2.3.7 Period measurement mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-45
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(3) Event counter mode The operation in the event counter mode is the same as that in the timer mode except that the input signal to the P55/CNTR1 pin is used as a count source. Operation in the event counter mode is described below. xStart of count operation Immediately after reset release, the timer Y stop control bit is in the "0" state. For this reason, the count operation is automatically started after reset release. The value of the Y counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR1 active edge switch bit. Reload operation The Y counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the Y counter reaches "0016." At this time, the value of the Y latch is transferred (reloaded) to the Y counter. Interrupt operation sCounter underflow An interrupt request occurs at the Y counter underflow. At the same time, the timer Y interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer Y interrupt enable bit. sEdge of count source At the edge of the count source input from the P55/CNTR1 pin, an interrupt request occurs. At the same time, the CNTR1 interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the CNTR1 interrupt enable bit. As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR1 active edge switch bit. Stop of count operation By writing "1" in the timer Y stop control bit by software, the count operation is stopped. The count operation is continued until "1" is set in the timer Y stop control bit. Figure 2.3.8 shows an event counter mode operation example.
2-46
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Count period Count period T(s) = 1 / count source frequency ! (the Y counter initial value + 1)
Event counter mode operation example *UF : Underflow *RL : Reload *n : The Y counter initial value Timer Y stop control bit Count source (P55/CNTR1 pin)
Writing "1" Writing "0"
Value of timer Y counter
RL n16 UF
RL
RL
RL Count stop Count restart
UF
UF
UF
000016 T CNTR1 active edge switch bit CNTR1 interrupt request bit 1 CNTR1 interrupt enable bit Timer Y interrupt request bit 1 Timer Y interrupt enable bit 1 : *Clearing by writing "0" to the timer Y interrupt request bit or the CNTR1 interrupt request bit. *Clearing by accepting the timer Y interrupt request and the CNTR1 interrupt request when the respective interrupt enable bits are "1." V : When the CNTR1 active edge switch bit is "1" ; *Falling edge of the count source is valid. *The CNTR1 interrupt request occurs at the rising edge of the output pulse. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Time
CNTR0 interrupt request occurs at falling edge of the count source
Fig. 2.3.8 Event counter mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-47
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(4) Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode In the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode, the width ("H" and "L" level) of pulses input from the P55/CNTR1 pin are continuously measured. With the exception that reload and an interrupt request occur at both edges of pulses input from the P55/CNTR1 pin, the operation in the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode is the same as that in the period measurement mode. The pulse width HL continuously measurement mode of operation is described below. xStart of count operation Immediately after reset release, the timer Y stop control bit is in the "0" state. For this reason, the count operation is automatically started after reset release. The value of the Y counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. The count source is f(XIN)/16 (low-speed mode ; f(XCIN)/16). Reload operation At both edges of the pulse input from the P55/CNTR1 pin, the value of the timer Y is transferred (reloaded) to the Y counter. The count value immediately before reload is held until it is read out once after reload. The value of the Y latch is also reloaded at the Y counter underflow. Pulse width measurement The difference between the count value at an active edge input and that immediately before reload is a measured pulse width. When reading a value from the timer Y, read both registers in order of the timer Y (high-order) and the timer Y (low-order). Interrupt operation sEdge of input pulse At both edges of pulses input from the P55/CNTR1 pin, an interrupt request occurs. At the same time, the CNTR1 interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the CNTR1 interrupt enable bit. sCounter underflow An interrupt request occurs at the Y counter underflow. At the same time, the timer Y interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer Y interrupt enable bit. Figure 2.3.9 shows a pulse width HL continuously measurement mode operation example.
2-48
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Pulse width Pulse width H(s) = 1 / count source frequency ! (the Y counter initial value - the Y counter value immediately before reload)
Operation example in pulse width HL continuously measurement mode *RL : Reload *n : The Y counter initial value *m : The Y counter value immediately before reload Timer Y stop control bit Count source P55/CNTR1 pin CNTR1 active edge switch bit
Value of timer Y counter
RL
RL
RL
n16
m16
000016
H
H
Time
CNTR1 interrupt request bit 1 CNTR1 interrupt enable bit Timer Y interrupt request bit Timer Y interrupt enable bit 1 1
1 : *Clearing by writing "0" to the CNTR1 interrupt request bit. *Clearing by accepting the CNTR1 interrupt request when the CNTR1 interrupt enable bit is "1."
Fig. 2.3.9 Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-49
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3.3 Related registers Figure 2.3.10 shows the memory allocation of the timer X- and timer Y-related registers. Each of these registers is described below.
Address 000B16 Port P5 direction register (P5D) Port P6 direction register (P6D) Timer X (low-order) (TXL) Timer X (high-order) (TXH) Timer Y (low-order) (TYL) Timer Y (high-order) (TYH)
000D16 002016 002116 002216 002316
002716 002816
Timer X mode register (TXM) Timer Y mode register(TYM)
003C16 003D16 003E16 003F16
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2)
Fig. 2.3.10 Memory allocation of timer X- and timer Y-related registers
2-50
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(1) Port P5 direction register (P5D) The port P5 direction register (address 000B16) selects the I/O direction of port P5. Figure 2.3.11 shows the structure of the port P5 direction register. The CNTR0 pin is also used as P54, while the CNTR1 pin is also used as P55. sTimer X In the pulse output mode, set bit 4 to "1" for the output mode. In the event counter mode or the pulse width measurement mode, set bit 4 to "0" for the input mode. sTimer Y In the period measurement mode or the event counter mode or the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode, set bit 5 to "0" to set it for the input mode.
Port P5 direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Port P5 direction register (P5D) [Address 0B16] B Name Functions 0 : Port P50 input mode 1 : Port P50 output mode 0 : Port P51 input mode 1 : Port P51 output mode 0 : Port P52 input mode 1 : Port P52 output mode 0 : Port P53 input mode 1 : Port P53 output mode 0 : Port P54 input mode 1 : Port P54 output mode 0 : Port P55 input mode 1 : Port P55 output mode At reset R W x 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x
0 Port P5 direction register 1 2 3 4 5 6
0 0 : Port P56 input mode 1 : Port P56 output mode 0 : Port P57 input mode 0 7 1 : Port P57 output mode Note : Port P5 direction register cannot be read out.
P57 INT2
P56 TOUT
P55 P54 P53 CNTR1 CNTR0 SRDY2
P52 SCLK2
P51 SOUT2
P50 SIN2
Fig. 2.3.11 Structure of port P5 direction register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-51
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(2) Port P6 direction register (P6D) The port P6 direction register (address 000D16) selects the I/O direction of port P6. Figure 2.3.12 shows the structure of the port P6 direction register. sTimer X The real time port RTP0 pin is also used as P60, while the RTP1 pin is also used as P61. To use as the RTP0 pin, set bit 0 to "1" for the output mode. To use as the RTP1 pin, set bit 1 to "1" for the output mode.
Port P6 direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Port P6 direction register (P6D) [Address 0D16] B Name Functions At reset R W x 0 0 0 x xx
0 : Port P60 input mode 1 : Port P60 output mode 0 : Port P61 input mode 1 : Port P61 output mode 2 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be to written to and be read out. 7
0 Port P6 direction register 1
Note : Port P6 direction register cannot be read out.
P61 RTP1
P60 RTP0 INT3
Fig. 2.3.12 Structure of port P6 direction register
2-52
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(3) Timer X latch and timer X counter (TXL and TXH) The timer X latch (referred as "the X latch") and the timer X counter (referred as "the X counter") consist of 16 bits in a combination of high-order (address 002116) and low-order (address 002016). The X latch and the X counter are allocated at the same address. To access the X latch and the X counter, access both the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order). sRead When the timer X (high-order) and the timer X (low-order) are read out, the value of the X counter (count value) are read out. Read both registers in the order of the timer X (high-order) and the timer X (low-order). Do not write any value to the timer X (high-order) and the timer X (low-order) before the timer X (loworder) has been read out. In this case, timer X will not operate normally. sWrite When a value is written to the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order), the value is set in the X latch and the X counter at the same time. Writing to the X latch only can be selected by the timer X write control bit (refer to "2.3.3 Related registers, (5) Timer X mode register"). Write the values to both registers in the order of the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order). Do not read timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order) before the timer X (high-order) has been written. In this case, timer X will not operate normally. qTimer X latch The X latch is a register which holds the value to be transferred (reloaded) automatically to the X counter as the initial value of the X counter at the X counter underflow. Figure 2.3.13 shows the structure of the timer X latch. The contents of the X latch cannot be read out.
qTimer X latch Timer X (high-order, low-order)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer X (high-order, low-order) (TXH, TXL) [Address 2116, 2016] B Functions At reset R W 1 x
0 *Set "000016 to FFFF16" as timer X count value. to *Write high-order byte of setting value to TXH, 7 and low-order byte to TXL, respectively. *The values of TXH and TXL are set to the respective X latches and transferred automatically to the respective X counters at the X counter underflow.
Note : Write both registers in the order of TXL and TXH.
Fig. 2.3.13 Structure of timer X latch
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-53
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
qTimer X counter The X counter counts the count source. Figure 2.3.14 shows the structure of the timer X counter. The contents of the X counter are decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. The division ratio of the counter is represented by the following expression. Division ratio of the X counter = 1 the X counter initial value + 1
qTimer X counter Timer X (high-order, low-order)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer X (high-order, low-order) (TXH, TXL) [Address 2116, 2016] B Functions At reset R W 1
0 *Set "000016 to FFFF16" as timer X count value. to *The value of the X counter is decremented by 7 1 each time a count source is input. *When the timer X write control bit is "0," the values of TXH and TXL are set to the respective X latches at the same time. *The values of each X counter are read out by reading the respective timer Xs.
Notes 1 : Write both registers in the order of TXL and TXH. 2 : Read both registers in the order of TXH and TXL.
Fig. 2.3.14 Structure of timer X counter
2-54
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(4) Timer Y latch and timer Y counter (TYL and TYH) The timer Y latch (referred as "the Y latch") and the timer Y counter (referred as "the Y counter") consist of 16 bits in a combination of high-order (address 002316) and low-order (address 002216). The Y latch and Y counter are allocated at the same address. To access the Y latch and the Y counter, access both the timer Y (low-order) and the timer Y (high-order). sRead When the timer Y (high-order and low-order) are read out, the value of the Y counter (count value) are read out. Read both registers in the order of the timer Y (high-order) and the timer Y (low-order). Do not write any value to the timer Y (high-order and low-order) before the timer Y (low-order) has been read out. In this case, timer Y will not operate normally. sWrite When a value is written to the timer Y (low-order and high-order), the value is set in the Y latch and the Y counter at the same time. Write the values to both registers in the order of the timer Y (loworder) and the timer Y (high-order). Do not read the timer Y (low-order and high-order) before the timer Y (high-order) has been written. In this case, timer Y will not operate normally. qTimer Y latch The Y latch is a register which holds the value to be transferred (reloaded) automatically to the Y latch as the initial value of the Y counter at the Y counter underflow. Figure 2.3.15 shows the structure of the timer Y latch. Reload is performed at the following : *At the Y counter underflow *At the edge of the input pulse from the P55/CNTR1 pin (period measurement mode/pulse width HL coutinuously measurement mode) The contents of the Y latch cannot be read out.
qTimer Y latch Timer Y (high-order, low-order)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer Y (high-order, low-order) (TYH, TYL) [Address 2316, 2216] Functions At reset R W x 1 0 *Set "000016 to FFFF16" as timer Y count value. to *Write high-order byte of setting value to TYH, 7 and low-order byte to TYL, respectively. *The values of TYH and TYL are set to the respective Y latches and transferred automatically to the respective Y counters at the Y counter underflow. B
Note : Write both registers in the order of TYL and TYH.
Fig. 2.3.15 Structure of timer Y latch
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-55
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
qTimer Y counter The Y counter counts the count source. Figure 2.3.16 shows the structure of the timer Y counter. The contents of the Y counter are decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. The division ratio of the counter is represented by the following expression. Division ratio of the Y counter = 1 the Y counter initial value + 1
In the period measurement mode or the pulse width HL coutinuously measurement mode, the value immediately before reload is held until it is read out once after reload. The count operation is coutinued.
qTimer Y counter Timer Y (high-order, low-order)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer Y (high-order, low-order) (TYH, TYL) [Address 2316, 2216] Functions At reset R W 1 0 *Set "000016 to FFFF16" as timer Y count value. to *The value of the Y counter is decremented 7 by 1 each time a count source is input. *The values of each Y counter are read out by reading the respective timer Ys. *The Y counter value immediately before reload is held until it is read out once after reload. (period measurement mode/pulse width HL continuously measurement mode) Notes 1 : Write both registers in the order of TYL and TYH. 2 : Read both registers in the order of TYH and TYL. B
Fig. 2.3.16 Structure of timer Y counter
2-56
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(5) Timer X mode register (TXM) The timer X mode register (address 002716) consists of bits which select operation or control counting. Figure 2.3.17 shows a structure of the timer X mode register. Each bit is described below.
Timer X mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer X mode register (TXM) [Address 2716] B 0 Name Timer X write control bit Real time port control bit Functions 0 : Write value in latch and counter 1 : Write value in latch only At reset R W 0
1
2 3 4 5 6
0 : Real time port function invalid 1 : Real time port function valid P60 data for real time 0 : "L" level output port 1 : "H" level output P61 data for real time 0 : "L" level output 1 : "H" level output port b5b4 Timer X operating 0 0 : Timer mode mode bits 0 1 : Pulse output mode 1 0 : Event counter mode 1 1 : Pulse width measurement mode CNTR0 active edge *CNTR0 interrupt switch bit 0 : Falling edge active 1 : Rising edge active *Pulse output mode 0 : Start at initial level "H" output 1 : Start at initial level "L" output *Event counter mode 0 : Rising edge active 1 : Falling edge active *Pulse width measurement mode 0 : Measure "H" level width 1 : Measure "L" level width 0 : Count start 1 : Count stop
0
0 0 0 0 0
7
Timer X stop control bit
0
Fig. 2.3.17 Structure of timer X mode register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-57
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
sTimer X write control bit (bit 0) The timer X write control bit controls writing to the timer X (low-order and high-order). When bit 0 is "0," the value written in the timer X (low-order and high-order) are set into both the X latch and the X counter at the same time. When bit 0 is "1," the value written in the timer X (low-order and high-order) is set into the X latch only. When a value is written into the X latch only, this rewritten value is transferred to the X counter at the first X counter underflow after rewriting. sReal time port control bit (bit 1) The real time port control bit selects a function to output data from the real time port. When bit 1 is "0," this function is invalid. When the bit is "1," this function is valid. For an explanation of operations, refer to "2.3.1 Explanation of timer X operations, (5) Real time port control." sData for real time port (bit 2 and bit 3) The data for real time port is the data to be output from the real time port. sTimer X operating mode bits (bit 4 and bit 5) The timer X operating mode bits select a operating mode of the timer X. Table 2.3.2 shows the relation between the timer X operating mode bits and the operating modes. For an explanation of each mode operation, refer to the section pertaining to the explanation of each operation. Table 2.3.2 Relation between timer X operating mode bits and operating modes b5 0 0 1 1 b4 0 1 0 1 Operation mode Timer mode Pulse output mode Event counter mode Pulse width measurement mode
2-58
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
sCNTR0 active edge switch bit (bit 6) The CNTR0 active edge switch bit has a function which selects an active edge of the CNTR0 interrupt, and functions for each mode. qCNTR0 interrupt When bit 6 is "0," the falling edge ( ) is active. When bit 6 is "1," the rising edge ( ) is active. qPulse output mode In the pulse output mode, the initial level at the start of pulse output is selected. When bit 6 is "0," the initial level is "H." When bit 6 is "1," the initial level is "L." qEvent counter mode An active edge of the count source is selected. When bit 6 is "0," the rising edge ( ) is active. When bit 6 is "1," the falling edge ( ) is active. qPulse width measurement mode A duration of pulse width measured is selected. When bit 6 is "0," the "H" level width is measured. When bit 6 is "1," the "L" level width is measured. sTimer X stop control bit (bit 7) The timer X stop control bit controls the count operation of the timer X. By writing "0" to bit 7, a count source is input to the X counter, so that a count operation is started. As bit 7 is in the "0" state immediately after reset release, the count operation is automatically started after reset release. By writing "1" to bit 7, the input of count source to the X counter is stopped, so that the count operation stops. In the pulse width measurement mode, however, a count operation is performed only in the period in which the measurement level is input to the P54/CNTR0 pin when bit 7 is in the "0" state. At read, this bit functions as a status bit to indicate the operating state (counting or stop) of the X counter. When bit 7 is "0," the counter is in the operating state. When bit 7 is "1," the counter is in the stop state.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-59
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(6) Timer Y Mode Register (TYM) The timer Y mode register (address 002816) consists of bits which select operation or control counting. Figure 2.3.18 shows a structure of the timer Y mode register. Each bit is described below.
Timer Y mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer Y mode register (TYM) [Address 2816] Name Functions At reset R W 0 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written 0 0x to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 3 b5b4 0 4 Timer Y operating 0 0 : Timer mode mode bits 0 1 : Period measurement mode 1 0 : Event counter mode 0 5 1 1 : Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode 0 6 CNTR1 active edge *CNTR1 interrupt 0 : Falling edge active switch bit 1 : Rising edge active *Period measurement mode 0 : Measure falling edge to falling edge 1 : Measure rising edge to rising edge *Event counter mode 0 : Rising edge active 1 : Falling edge active 7 Timer Y stop control 0 : Count start 1 : Count stop bit B
0
Fig. 2.3.18 Structure of timer Y mode register
2-60
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
sTimer Y operating mode bits (bit 4 and bit 5) The timer Y operating mode bits select a operating mode of the timer Y. Table 2.3.3 shows the relation between the timer Y operating mode bits and the operating modes. For an explanation of each mode operation, refer to the section pertaining to the explanation of each operation. Table 2.3.3 Relation between timer Y operating mode bits and operating modes b5 0 0 1 1 b4 0 1 0 1 Operation mode Timer mode Period measurement mode Event counter mode Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode
sCNTR1 active edge switch bit (bit 6) The CNTR1 active edge switch bit has a function which selects an active edge of the CNTR1 interrupt and functions for each mode. In the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode, this bit is invalid. qCNTR1 interrupt When bit 6 is "0," the falling edge ( ) is active. When bit 6 is "1," the rising edge ( ) is active. In the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode, an interrupt request occurs at the both edges regardless of the value of this bit. qPeriod measurement mode This bit selects the duration which is measured. When bit 6 is "0," the falling edge to the falling edge duration is measured. When bit 6 is "1," the rising edge to the rising edge duration is measured. qEvent counter mode An active edge of the count source is selected. When bit 6 is "0," the rising edge ( ) is active. When bit 6 is "1," the falling edge ( ) is active. sTimer Y stop control bit (bit 7) The timer Y stop control bit controls the count operation of the timer Y. By writing "0" to bit 7, a count source is input to the Y counter, so that a count operation is started. As bit 7 is in the "0" state immediately after reset release, the count operation is automatically started after reset release. By writing "1" to bit 7, the input of count source to the Y counter is stopped, so that the count operation stops. At read, this bit functions as a status bit to indicate the operating state (counting or stop) of the counter. When bit 7 is "0," the counter is in the operating state. When bit 7 is "1," the counter is in the stop state.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-61
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(7) Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) and interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) The interrupt request register 1 (address 003C16) and the interrupt request register 2 (address 003D16) indicate whether an interrupt request has occured or not. Figure 2.3.19 shows the structure of the interrupt request register 1 and Figure 2.3.20 shows the structure of the interrupt request register 2. The occurrence of an interrupt request (timer X, timer Y, CNTR0, and CNTR1 interrupt requests) causes the corresponding bit to be set to "1." This interrupt request bit is automatically cleared to "0" by the acceptance of the interrupt request. The interrupt request bits can be set to "0" by software, but it cannot be set to "1" by software. The occurrence of each interrupt is controlled by the corresponding interrupt enable bit (refer to the next item). For details of interrupts, refer to "2.2 Interrupts."
Interrupt request register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) [Address 3C16] B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name INT0 interrupt request bit INT1 interrupt request bit Serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit Timer X interrupt request bit Timer Y interrupt request bit Timer 2 interrupt request bit Timer 3 interrupt request bit Functions 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V V V V V V V V
V : "0" can be set by software, but "1" cannot be set.
Fig. 2.3.19 Structure of interrupt request register 1
2-62
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Interrupt request register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) [Address 3D16] B Name 0 CNTR0 interrupt request bit 1 CNTR1 interrupt request bit At reset R W Functions 0 : No interrupt request issued V 0 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V V V V V V 0x
0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 2 Timer 1 interrupt request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued INT2 interrupt 0 : No interrupt request issued 3 request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued 4 INT3 interrupt 0 : No interrupt request issued request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 5 Key input interrupt request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued Serial I/O2 0 : No interrupt request issued 6 interrupt request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued 7 Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and is fixed to "0" at reading. V : "0" can be set by software, but "1" cannot be set.
Fig. 2.3.20 Structure of interrupt request register 2
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-63
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(8) Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) and interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) The interrupt control register 1 (address 003E16) and the interrupt control register 2 (address 003F16) control each interrupt request source. Figure 2.3.21 shows the structure of the interrupt control register 1 and Figure 2.3.22 shows the structure of the interrupt control register 2. When an interrupt enable bit (timer X, timer Y, CNTR0, and CNTR1 interrupt enable bits) is "0," the corresponding interrupt request is disabled. If an interrupt request occurs when this bit is "0," the corresponding interrupt request bit only is set to "1," and the interrupt request is not accepted. When the interrupt enable bit is "1," the corresponding interrupt request is enabled. If an interrupt request occurs when this bit is "1," the interrupt request is accepted (interrupt disable flag = "0"). Each interrupt enable bit can be set to "0" or "1" by software. For details of interrupts, refer to "2.2 Interrupts."
Interrupt control register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) [Address 3E16] B 0 Name Functions 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
INT0 interrupt enable bit 1 INT1 interrupt enable bit 2 Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit 3 Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit 4 Timer X interrupt enable bit 5 Timer Y interrupt enable bit 6 Timer 2 interrupt enable bit 7 Timer 3 interrupt enable bit
Fig. 2.3.21 Structure of interrupt control register 1
2-64
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Interrupt control register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) [Address 3F16] B Name CNTR0 interrupt 0 enable bit 1 CNTR1 interrupt enable bit 2 3 4 5 6 7 Timer 1 interrupt enable bit INT2 interrupt enable bit INT3 interrupt enable bit Key input interrupt enable bit Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit Fixed this bit to "0." Functions
0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled
At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
Fig. 2.3.22 Structure of interrupt control register 2
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-65
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3.4 Register setting example In the following, an example of setting registers for using each mode of the timer X and timer Y is described. (1) Timer X sTimer mode Figure 2.3.23 shows an example of setting registers for using the timer mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following : *Before setting below, clear the timer X interrupt enable bit and the timer X interrupt request bit to "0." *After setting below, set the timer X interrupt enable bit to "1" (interrupts enabled). 2: Write values in the order of the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order). Setting of timer X mode register
Select timer mode or others b7 b0 1 00 TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716] b0 : Timer X write control bit 0 : Write value in latch and counter 1 : Write value in latch only b1 : Real time port control bit 0 : Real time port function invalid 1 : Real time port function valid b2 : P60 data for real time port b3 : P61 data for for real time port b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits 0 0 : Timer mode b6 : CNTR0 active edge switch bit b7 : Timer X stop control bit 1 : Count stop
Set count value (low-order) to timer X (low-order) (TXL) [Address 2016]
Set count value (high-order) to timer X (high-order) (TXH) [Address 2116]
Set timer X stop control bit of timer X mode register to "0" to start counting
Fig. 2.3.23 Example of setting registers for using timer mode
2-66
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
sPulse output mode Figure 2.3.24 shows an example of setting registers for using the pulse output mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following : *Before setting below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer X or CNTR0) and the interrupt request bits (timer X or CNTR0) to "0." *After setting below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer X or CNTR0) to "1" (interrupts enabled). 2: Write values in the order of the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order). Port P5 direction register
b7 b0
1
P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16] b4 : Bit corresponding to port P54 1 : Output mode
Setting of timer X mode register
Select pulse output mode or others b7 b0 1 01 TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716] b0 : Timer X write control bit 0 : Write value in latch and counter 1 : Write value in latch only b1 : Real time port control bit 0 : Real time port function invalid 1 : Real time port function valid b2 : P60 data for real time port b3 : P61 data for real time port b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits 0 1 : Pulse output mode b6 : CNTR0 active edge switch bit 0 : Start at initial level "H" level output 1 : Start at initial level "L" level output b7 : Timer X stop control bit 1 : Count stop
Set count value (low-order) to timer X (low-order) (TXL) [Address 2016]
Set count value (high-order) to timer X (high-order) (TXH) [Address 2116]
Set timer X stop control bit of timer X mode register to "0" to start counting
Fig. 2.3.24 Example of setting registers for using pulse output mode
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-67
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
sEvent counter output mode Figure 2.3.25 shows an example of setting registers for using the event counter mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following : *Before setting below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer X or CNTR0) and the interrupt request bits (timer X or CNTR0) to "0." *After setting below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer X or CNTR0) to "1" (interrupts enabled). 2: Write values in the order of the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order). Port P5 direction register
b7 b0
0
P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16] b4 : Bit corresponding to port P54 0 : Input mode
Setting of timer X mode register
Select event counter mode or others b7 b0 1 10 TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716] b0 : Timer X write control bit 0 : Write value in latch and counter 1 : Write value in latch only b1 : Real time port control bit 0 : Real time port function invalid 1 : Real time port function valid b2 : P60 data for real time port b3 : P61 data for real time port b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits 1 0 : Event counter mode b6 : CNTR0 active edge switch bit 0 : Rising edge active 1 : Falling edge active b7 : Timer X stop control bit 1 : Count stop
Set count value (low-order) to timer X (low-order) (TXL) [Address 2016]
Set count value (high-order) to timer X (high-order) (TXH) [Address 2116]
Set timer X stop control bit of timer X mode register to "0" to start counting
Fig. 2.3.25 Example of setting registers for using event counter mode
2-68
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
sPulse width measurement mode Figure 2.3.26 shows an example of setting registers for using the pulse width measurement mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following : *Before setting below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer X or CNTR0) and the interrupt request bits (timer X or CNTR0) to "0." *After setting below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer X or CNTR0) to "1" (interrupts enabled). 2: Write values in the order of the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order). Port P5 direction register
b7 b0
0
P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16] b4 : Bit corresponding to port P54 0 : Input mode
Setting of timer X mode register
Select pulse width measurement mode or others b7 b0 1 11 TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716] b0 : Timer X write control bit 0 : Write value in latch and counter 1 : Write value in latch only b1 : Real time port control bit 0 : Real time port function invalid 1 : Real time port function valid b2 : P60 data for real time port b3 : P61 data for real time port b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits 1 1 : Pulse width measurement mode b6 : CNTR0 active edge switch bit 0 : Measure "H" level width 1 : Measure "L" level width b7 : Timer X stop control bit 1 : Count stop
Set count value (low-order) to timer X (low-order) (TXL) [Address 2016]
Set count value (high-order) to timer X (high-order) (TXH) [Address 2116]
Set timer X stop control bit of timer X mode register to "0" to start counting
Fig. 2.3.26 Example of setting registers for using pulse width measurement mode
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-69
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
sReal time port function Figure 2.3.27 shows an example of setting registers for using the real time port (referred as RTP) function.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: After reset release, port P6 direction register is set for the input mode, so pins P60/INT3/RTP0 and P61/RTP1 operate as ordinary input ports. For using as RTP, be sure to set the corresponding bits of the port P6 direction register for the output mode. 2: Change RTP output data as required, for example, by using an interrupt. 3: Do not change ports P60 and P61 selected as RTP into input pins during RTP operation. Port P6 direction register
b7 b0 P6D : Port P6 direction register [Address 0D16] b0, b1 : Bits corresponding to ports P60 (RTP0) and P61 (RTP1) 0 : Input mode 1 : Output mode : Nothing is allocated
Setting of timer X mode register
Select RTP or others b7 b0 1 1 TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716] b0 : Timer X write control bit 0 : Write value in latch and counter 1 : Write value in latch only b1 : Real time port control bit 1 : Real time port function valid b2 : P60 data for real time port b3 : P61 data for real time port b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits 0 0 : Timer mode 0 1 : Pulse output mode 1 0 : Event counter mode 1 1 : Pulse width measurement mode b6 : CNTR0 active edge switch bit *CNTR0 interrupt 0 : Falling edge active 1 : Rising edge active *Pulse output mode 0 : Start at initial level "H" output 0 : Start at initial level "L" output *Event counter mode 0 : Rising edge active 1 : Falling edge active *Pulse width measurement mode 0 : Measure "H" level width 1 : Measure "L" level width b7 : Timer X stop control bit 1 : Count stop
Set count value (low-order) to timer X (low-order) (TXL) [Address 2016] Set count value (high-order) to timer X (high-order) (TXH) [Address 2116] Set timer X stop control bit of timer X mode register to "0" to start counting
Fig. 2.3.27 Example of setting registers for using RTP 2-70
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(2) Timer Y sTimer mode Figure 2.3.28 shows an example of setting registers for using the timer mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following : *Before setting below, clear the timer Y interrupt enable bit and the timer Y interrupt request bit to "0." *After setting below, set the timer Y interrupt enable bit to "1" (interrupts enabled) . 2: Write values in the order of the timer Y (low-order) and the timer Y (high-order). Setting of timer Y mode register
Select timer mode or others b7 b0 1 00 TYM : Timer Y mode register [Address 2816] b5, b4 : Timer Y operating mode bits 0 0 : Timer mode b6 : CNTR1 active edge switch bit b7 : Timer Y stop control bit 1 : Count stop : Nothing is allocated
Set count value (low-order) to timer Y (low-order) (TYL) [Address 2216]
Set count value (high-order) to timer Y (high-order) (TYH) [Address 2316]
Set timer Y stop control bit of timer Y mode register to "0" to start counting
Fig. 2.3.28 Example of setting registers for using timer mode
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-71
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
sPeriod measurement mode Figure 2.3.29 shows an example of setting registers for using the period measurement mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following : *Before setting below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or CNTR1) and the interrupt request bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to "0." *After setting below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to "1" (interrupts enabled). 2: Write values in the order of the timer Y (low-order) ant the timer Y (high-order). Port P5 direction register
b7 b0
0
P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16] b5 : Bit corresponding to port P55 0 : Input mode
Setting of timer Y mode register
Select period measurement mode or others b7 b0 1 01 TYM : Timer Y mode register [Address 2816] b5, b4 : Timer Y operating mode bits 0 1 : Period measurement mode b6 : CNTR1 active edge switch bit 0 : Measure falling edge to falling edge 1 : Measure rising edge to rising edge b7 : Timer Y stop control bit 1 : Count stop : Nothing is allocated
Set count value (low-order) to timer Y (low-order) (TYL) [Address 2216]
Set count value (high-order) to timer Y (high-order) (TYH) [Address 2316]
Set timer Y stop control bit of timer Y mode register to "0" to start counting
Fig. 2.3.29 Example of setting registers for using period measurement mode
2-72
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
sEvent counter mode Figure 2.3.30 shows an example of setting registers for using the event counter mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following : *Before setting below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or CNTR1) and the interrupt request bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to "0." *After setting below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to "1" (interrupts enabled). 2: Write values in the order of the timer Y (low-order) ant the timer Y (high-order). Port P5 direction register
b7 b0
0
P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16] b5 : Bit corresponding to port P55 0 : Input mode
Setting of timer Y mode register
Select event counter mode or others b7 b0 1 10 TYM : Timer Y mode register [Address 2816] b5, b4 : Timer Y operating mode bits 1 0 : Event counter mode b6 : CNTR1 active edge switch bit 0 : Rising edge active 1 : Falling edge active b7 : Timer Y stop control bit 1 : Count stop : Nothing is allocated
Set count value (low-order) to timer Y (low-order) (TYL) [Address 2216]
Set count value (high-order) to timer Y (high-order) (TYH) [Address 2316]
Set timer Y stop control bit of timer Y mode register to "0" to start counting
Fig. 2.3.30 Example of setting registers for using event counter mode
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-73
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
sPulse width HL countinuously measurement mode Figure 2.3.31 shows an example of setting registers for using the pulse width HL countinuously measurement mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following : *Before setting below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or CNTR1) and the interrupt request bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to "0." *After setting below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to "1" (interrupts enabled). 2: Write values in the order of the timer Y (low-order) ant the timer Y (high-order). Port P5 direction register
b7 b0
0
P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16] b5 : Bit corresponding to port P55 0 : Input mode
Setting of timer Y mode register
Select pulse width HL continuously measurement mode or others b7 b0 1 11 TYM : Timer Y mode register [Address 2816] b5, b4 : Timer Y operating mode bits 1 1 : Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode b6 : CNTR1 active edge switch bit Invalid in pulse width HL continuously measurement mode b7 : Timer Y stop control bit 1 : Count stop : Nothing is allocated
Set count value (low-order) to timer Y (low-order) (TYL) [Address 2216]
Set count value (high-order) to timer Y (high-order) (TYH) [Address 2316]
Set timer Y stop control bit of timer Y mode register to "0" to start counting
Fig. 2.3.31 Example of setting registers for using pulse width HL continuously measurement mode
2-74
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3.5 Application examples (1) Pulse output mode : Piezoelectric buzzer output Outline : The rectangular waveform output function of a timer is applied for a piezoelectric buzzer output. Specifications : *The rectangular waveform which is divided clock f(XIN) = 8 MHz up to about 2 kHz is output from the P54/CNTR0 pin. *The level of the P54/CNTR0 pin fixes to "H" while a piezoelectric buzzer output is stopped. Figure 2.3.32 shows an example of a peripheral circuit, Figure 2.3.33, a connection of the timer and a setting of the division ratio, Figure 2.3.34, the setting of the related registers, and Figure 2.3.35, the control procedure.
The "H" level is output while a piezoelectric buzzer output is stopped. 3820 group
P54/CNTR0
250 s 250 s
PiPiPi....
Set a division ratio so that the underflow cycle of the timer X is this value.
Fig. 2.3.32 Example of peripheral circuit
Fix f(XIN) = 8 MHz 1/16
Timer X 1/125 CNTR0
Fig. 2.3.33 Connection of timer and setting of division ratio
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-75
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
b7 b0 X X X 1 X X X X P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16] b4 : Bit corresponding to port P54 1 : Output mode b7 b0 1 X 0 1 X X X X TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716] b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits 0 1 : Pulse output mode b7 : Timer X stop control bit 1 : Count stop Note : Write values in the order of the low-order byte and the TXH : Timer X (high-order) [Address 2116] 0016 high-order byte. Set "division ratio - 1 (124 : 007C16)" in the timer X register b7 b0 X X X 1 X X X X ICON1 : Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16] b4 : Timer X interrupt enable bit 1 : Interrupt enabled
Fig. 2.3.34 Setting of related registers
7C16
TXL : Timer X (low-order) [Address 2016]
RESET Initialization CLT CLD SEI XXX0XXXX2 ICON1 (Address 3E16) 1X01XXXX2 TXM (Address 2716) P5D (Address 0B16), bit 4 1 P5 (Address 0A16), bit 4 1 7C16 TXL (Address 2016) 0016 (125 - 1) TXH (Address 2116) ICON1 (Address 3E16) CLI Main processing Output unit XXX1XXXX2 All interrupts; Disabled Timer X interrupt; Disabled CNTR0 output stops at this point (A piezoelectric buzzer output stops) Set port conditions at stop of a piezoelectric buzzer output ("H" level output)
Timer X interrupt; Enabled Interrupts; Enabled A piezoelectric buzzer request generated during the main processing is processed at the output unit Switch bit 7 of TXM Count (ON) Stop (OFF) N (= Request) Immediately after no request?
A piezoelectric buzzer request has occurred? N (= OFF)
Y (= ON)
TXM (Address 2716), bit 7 P5 (Address 0A16), bit 4
1 1
Y (= No request) TXL (Address 2016) TXH (Address 2116) TXM (Address 2716), bit 7 7C16 0016 (125 - 1) 0
Fig. 2.3.35 Control procedure
2-76
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(2) Pulse width measurement mode: Ringer signal detection Outline : A telephone ringing pulseV is detected by applying the timer X interrupt and the pulse width measurement mode. Specifications : *Whether a telephone call exists or not is judged by measuring a pulse width output from the "H" active ringing pulse detection circuit. *f(XIN) = 8 MHz is used as the count source. *When the following condition is satisfied, it is regard as normal. 200 ms pulse width of a ringing pulse < 1.2 s Figure 2.3.36 shows an example of a peripheral circuit, Figure 2.3.37, the setting of the related registers, Figure 2.3.38, a ringing pulse waveform, Figure 2.3.39, an operation timing when a ringing pulse is input, and Figure 2.3.40, the control procedure.
3820 group
CNTR0
Ringing pulse detection circuit
Telephone circuit
V Ringing pulse : Signal which is sent by turning on/off (make/break) the telephone line. Each country has a different standard. In this case, Japanese domestic standard is adopted as an example.
Fig. 2.3.36 Example of peripheral circuit
b7 b0 X X X 0 X X X X P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16] b4 : Bit corresponding to port P54 0 : Input mode b7 b0 1 0 1 1 X X X X TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716] b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits 1 1 : Pulse width measurement mode b6 : CNTR0 active edge switch bit 0 : *Pulse width measurement mode (Measure "H" level width) *CNTR0 interrupt (Falling edge active) b7 : Timer X stop control bit 1 : Count stop A716 6116 TXL : Timer X (low-order) [Address 2016] TXH : Timer X (high-order) [Address 2116] Note : Write values in the order of the low-order byte and the high-order byte.
Set "division ratio - 1 (24999 : 61A716) " in the timer X register b7 b0 X X X 1 X X X X ICON1 : Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16] b4 : Timer X interrupt enable bit 1 : Interrupt enabled b7 b0 0 X X X X X X 1 ICON2 : Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16] b0 : CNTR0 interrupt enable bit 1 : Interrupt enabled
Fig. 2.3.37 Setting of related registers
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-77
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
16 Hz Ringing pulse from telephone line
OFF ON
Approx. 1 second Ringing duration Waveform-shaped signal input to microcomputer
Approx. 2 second No ringing duration
Fig. 2.3.38 Ringer signal waveform

Ringing duration Approx. 1 second Signal input to microcomputer No ringing duration Approx. 2 second

Ringing duration Approx. 1.2 second or more No ringing duration
Signal input to microcomputer
Timer X value
Reload
Timer X value
Reload
Timer X interrupt 4 to 23 interrupts occur CNTR0 interrupt
Timer X interrupt 24 or more interrupts occur CNTR0 interrupt
Fig. 2.3.39 Operation timing when ringing pulse is input 2-78
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
RESET Initialization CLT CLD SEI ICON1 (Address 3E16) XXX0XXXX2 ICON2 (Address 3F16) 0XXXXXX02 P5D (Address 0B16), bit 4 0 1011XXXX2 TXM (Address 2716) A716 TXL (Address 2016) 6116 (25000 - 1) TXH (Address 2116) TXM (Address 2716), bit 7 0 ICON1 (Address 3E16) ICON2 (Address 3F16) CLI
XXX1XXXX2 0XXXXXX12
All interrupts; Disabled Timer X interrupt; Disabled CNTR0 interrupt; Disabled Set P54/CNTR0 pin for input mode Connect timer X Set "division ratio - 1" to timer X (low-order) and timer X (high-order) (Set values in the order of low-order byte and high-order byte) Timer count start Timer X interrupt; Enabled CNTR0 interrupt; Enabled Interrupts; Enabled
CNTR0 interrupt processing routine
The number of underflows is within the range ? CNTR0 interrupt occurs at transition from "H" to "L" of waveform which is input to P54/CNTR0 pin Y Timer X value is within the range ? Y Judged as presence of ringing pulse (Set ringer flag)
N
Check the number of underflows counted by timer X interrupt If the number is 4 or less and 24 or more, the pulse is abnormal Check pulse width When pulse width is within range, the pulse is normal
N
Timer X interrupt occurs at timer X underflow (at every 50 ms)
TXL (Address 2016) A716 TXH (Address 2116) 6116 (25000 - 1)
Reload to timer X register
RTI
N
A ringing pulse exists ? (Ringer flag = "H") Y Processing when a ringing pulse exists
Timer X interrupt processing routine
Count the number of underflows If 24 underflows or more are counted, regard the ringing pulse as out of standard, and execute error processing
RTI
Fig. 2.3.40 Control procedure
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-79
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(3) Real time port function : Stepping motor drive Outline : A stepping motor is driven by applying a timer X interrupt and the real time port (referred as "RTP") function. Specifications : * The RTP output time is controlled by changing a timer X setting value in a timer X interrupt processing. * The RTP output pattern to the motor driver by changing data for RTP. Figure 2.3.41 shows an application connection example when the RTP is used. Figure 2.3.42 shows an RTP output example. Table 2.3.4 and Table 2.3.5 show table examples for it. Figure 2.3.40 shows a timer X interrupt processing procedure example when the RTP is used.
3820 group
RTP setting value table TXM Data for RTP RTP0 (P60) RTP1 (P61) Timer X setting value table Motor driver
Stepping motor
Timer X
Fig. 2.3.41 Application connection example when RTP is used
RTP output time
Timer X setting value (T1)
Timer X setting value (T2)
Timer X Timer X setting value setting value (T3) (T4) (T5)
(T6)
RTP0 output
RTP1 output RTP output pattern RTP output pattern RTP output pattern RTP output pattern
Fig. 2.3.42 RTP output example
2-80
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Table 2.3.4 Table example for timer X setting value RTP output time T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 Timer X setting value 2FD016 2B7116 208116 186916 13C916 13A916 122116 11C116 Table 2.3.5 Table example for RTP setting value RTP output pattern RTP setting values TXM, b2 TXM, b3 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
[Notes on use]
Notes 1 : When there is no necessity for changing the timer X underflow time in , omit it. 2 : When writing to the latch only is selected as the timer X write control, the timer X value (TXL, TXH) is rewritten at the first underflow after . 3 : Execute another timer X interrupt processing in to .
Interrupt processing routine
Push to stack area
Transfer the next timer X underflow time from internal ROM table and store it in TXL (address 2016) and TXH (address 2116).
Transfer RTP output data at the next timer X underflow from internal ROM table and store it in bits 2 and 3 of TXM (address 2716) .
Pop from stack area
RTI
Fig. 2.3.43 Timer X interrupt processing procedure example when RTP is used
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-81
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3.6 Notes on use Notes on using each mode of the timer X and timer Y are described below. (1) Timer X sCommon to all modes qWhen reading or writing for timer X, be sure to execute for both the timer X (high-order) and the timer X (low-order). When reading a value from the timer X, read it in the order of the timer X (highorder) and the timer X (low-order). When writing a value to the timer X, execute in the order of the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order). If the following operations are performed for the timer X, abnormal operation will occur. *Write operation before execution of timer X (low-order) reading *Read operation before execution of timer X (high-order) writing *In writing for the latch only (timer X write control bit = "1"), if writing timing for the high-order latch is almost same as the underflow timing, a normal value may not be set in the high-order counter. sPulse output mode qIn the pulse output mode, set the bit 4 (corresponding to the P54/CNTR0) of the port P5 direction register (address 000B16) to "1" (output mode). qWhen the bit 4 (corresponding to the P54/CNTR0) of the port P5 register (address 000A16) in the pulse output mode is read, the value of the port register are not read out but the output value of the pin is read out. sEvent counter mode qWhen using the event counter mode, set the bit 4 (corresponding to the P54/CNTR0) of the port P5 direction register (address 000B16) to "0" (input mode). qThe maximum input frequency in the event counter mode is: 4 MHz (250 ns) .................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 500 (2 ! VCC) - 4 MHz ( ns) .......... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2 The minimum "H" pulse width is: 105 ns .................................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 250 ( - 20 ns) ........................................... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2 The minimum "L" pulse is: 105 ns .................................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 250 ( - 20 ns) ........................................... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2 sPulse width measurement mode qIn the pulse width measurement mode, set the bit 4 (corresponding to P54/CNTR0) of the port P5 direction register (address 000B16) to "0" (input mode). qIn reading the value of the P54/CNTR0 pin as an input pin, the value is "1" at "H" level input or "0" at "L" level input regardless of the value of the CNTR0 active edge switch bit. qSetting the CNTR0 active edge switch bit effects on the active edge of an interrupt. Consequently, a CNTR0 interrupt request may be caused by setting the CNTR0 active edge switch bit. As a countermeasure against the above, switch the active edge after disabling the CNTR0 interrupt, then set the CNTR0 interrupt request bit to "0." qThe minimum "H" pulse width in the pulse width measurement mode is: 105 ns .................................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 250 ( - 20 ns) ........................................... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2 The minimum "L" pulse is: 105 ns .................................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 250 ( - 20 ns) ........................................... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2 2-82
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
sReal time port function qAfter reset release, the port P6 direction register is set for the input mode, so the pins P60 and P61 function as ordinary I/O ports. For the pin to be used as RTP, be sure to set the corresponding bits of the port P6 direction register for the output mode. qFor a pin used as RTP, do not change this port for the input mode during real time port operation. qChange RTP output data as required, for example, by using a timer X interrupt. (2) Timer Y sCommon to all modes qWhen reading or writing for timer Y, be sure to execute for both the timer Y (high-order) and the timer Y (low-order). When reading a value from the timer Y, read it in the order of the timer Y (highorder) and the timer Y (low-order). When writing a value to the timer Y, execute in the order of the timer Y (low-order) and the timer Y (high-order). If the following operations are performed for the timer Y, abnormal operation will occur. *Write operation before execution of timer Y (low-order) reading *Read operation before execution of timer Y (high-order) writing sPeriod measurement mode qIn the period measurement mode, set the bit 5 (corresponding to the P55/CNTR1) of the port P5 direction register (address 000B16) to "0" (input mode). qSetting the CNTR1 active edge switch bit effects on the active edge of an interrupt. Consequently, the CNTR1 interrupt request may be caused by setting the CNTR1 active edge switch bit. As a countermeasure, switch the active edge after disabling the CNTR1 interrupt, then set the CNTR1 interrupt request bit to "0." qThe maximum input frequency in the period measurement mode is: 4 MHz (250 ns) .................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 500 (2 ! VCC) - 4 MHz ( ns) .......... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2 The minimum "H" pulse width is: 105 ns .................................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 250 ( - 20 ns) ........................................... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2 The minimum "L" pulse is: 105 ns .................................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 250 ( - 20 ns) ........................................... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2 sEvent counter mode qIn the event counter mode, set the bit 5 (corresponding to the P55/CNTR1) of the port P5 direction register (address 000B16) to "0" (input mode). qSetting the CNTR1 active edge switch bit, the active edge of an interrupt is also affected. Consequently, a CNTR1 interrupt request may be caused by setting the CNTR1 active edge switch bit. qThe maximum input frequency in the event counter mode is: 4 MHz (250 ns) .................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V (2 ! VCC) - 4 MHz ( 500 ns) .......... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2 The minimum "H" pulse width is: 105 ns .................................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 250 ( - 20 ns) ........................................... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-83
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
The minimum "L" pulse is: 105 ns .................................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 250 ( - 20 ns) ........................................... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2 sPulse width HL continuously measurement mode qIn the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode, set the bit 5 (corresponding to P55/CNTR1) of the port P5 direction register (address 000B16) to "0" (input mode). qThe CNTR1 interrupt request occurs at both edges of input pulses regardless of the value of the CNTR1 active edge switch bit. qThe minimum "H" pulse width in the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode is: 105 ns .................................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 250 ( - 20 ns) ........................................... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2 The minimum "L" pulse is: 105 ns .................................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 250 ( - 20 ns) ........................................... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V VCC - 2
2-84
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
2.4.1 Explanation of operations Timer 1 to timer 3 are 8-bit timers that operate in the timer mode. The timer mode is a count-down system, so the value of the counter is decremented each time a count source is input. When the counter underflows, an interrupt request occurs. The timer 2 can also output a pulse whose polarity is reversed at each underflow. (1) Timer mode Operation of the timers 1 to 3 in the timer mode are described below. xStart of count operation A count operation is automatically started after reset release. The value of the counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. Reload operation The counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the counter reaches "0016." At this time, the value of the corresponding timer latch is transferred (reloaded) to the counter. Interrupt operation An interrupt request occurs at the counter underflow. At the same time, the corresponding interrupt request bit is set to "1." The occurrence of each interrupt is controlled by the interrupt enable bit. The acceptance of the interrupt request causes the interrupt request bit which has been set to "1" to be automatically cleared to "0." It can also be cleared to "0" by software. An interrupt request occurs each time the counter underflows. In other words, an interrupt request occurs every "the counter initial value + 1" count of the rising edge of the count source. Figure 2.4.1 shows a timer mode operation example.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-85
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
Count period Count period T (s) = 1 / count source frequency ! (the counter initial value + 1)
Operation example in timer mode *UF : Underflow *RL : Reload *n : The counter initial value
Count source RL RL RL RL
Value of counter
n16 UF
UF
UF
UF
0016 T Time
Interrupt request bit Interrupt enable bit 1 1 1 1
1 : *Clearing by writing "0" to the corresponding interrupt request bit of the timers 1 to 3. *Clearing by accepting the corresponding interrupt request of the timers 1 to 3 when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is "1."
Fig. 2.4.1 Timer mode operation example
2-86
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
(2) Rewriting the value of the counter and the latch When data is written to the timer, the values of the counter and the latch are rewritten. For rewriting the values of the counters and the latches corresponding to each timer is described below. sTimer 1 and timer 3 By writing a value to the timer, the value is set simultaneously in both the counter and the latch. Accordingly, the counter period, when a value is written to the timer during counting, becomes inaccurate. Figure 2.4.2 shows an rewriting example of the counter and the latch corresponding to the timers 1 or 3.
Rewriting example of counter *UF : Underflow *RL : Reload *n : The counter initial value before rewriting *m : The counter initial value after rewriting Write "m16" to timer m16 RL
Value of counter
RL n16 UF
RL UF UF
0016 Inaccurate count period Interrupt request bit 1 Interrupt enable bit 1 : *Clearing by writing "0" to the interrupt request bit corresponding to the timers 1 or 3. *Clearing by accepting the interrupt request corresponding to the timers 1 or 3 when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is "1." 1 1 Time
Fig. 2.4.2 Rewriting example of counter and latch corresponding to timers 1 or 3
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-87
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
sTimer 2 The write operation to the timer 2 counter is controlled by the timer 2 write control bit (bit 2 at address 002916). (bit 2 = "0") As the write operation is the same as that to the timer 1 and the timer 3, refer to the previous section, "sTimer 1 and timer 3." (bit 2 = "1") When a value is written to the timer 2, the value is set in the timer 2 latch only. The rewritten value is reloaded onto the timer 2 counter at the first underflow after rewriting. Figure 2.4.3 shows an rewriting example of the timer 2 counter and the timer 2 latch.
Rewriting example of timer 2 counter *UF : Underflow *RL : Reload *n : The counter initial value before rewriting *m : The counter initial value after rewriting Write "m16" to timer RL m16 RL
Value of counter
RL n16 UF
RL UF UF UF
0016 Time Timer 2 write control bit Interrupt request bit 1 Interrupt enable bit 1 : *Clearing by writing "0" to the timer 2 interrupt request bit. *Clearing by accepting the timer 2 interrupt request when the timer 2 interrupt request bit is "1." 1 1 1
Fig. 2.4.3 Rewriting example of timer 2 counter and timer 2 latch (Writing in timer 2 latch only)
2-88
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
(3) Pulse output by timer 2 The timer 2 can output a pulse whose polarity is reversed at each the timer 2 counter underflow. Figure 2.4.4 shows a pulse output example. From the moment that the TOUT output control bit is set to "1," pulses are output from the P56/TOUT output pin. The polarity is reversed every the timer 2 counter underflow. To output pulses, set bit 6 of the port P5 direction register for the output mode by setting it to "1."
Pulse output example by timer 2 *UF : Underflow *RL : Reload *n : The timer 2 counter initial value Value of timer 2 counter FF16 n16 0016 Timer 2 interrupt request bit Timer 2 interrupt enable bit TOUT output control bit TOUT output active edge switch bit P56/TOUT pin Programmable I/O port 1 : *Clearing by writing "0" to the timer 2 interrupt request bit. *Clearing by accepting the timer 2 interrupt request when the timer 2 interrupt enable bit is "1." 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 RL UF Timer
Write "1"
Fig. 2.4.4 Pulse output example
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-89
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
2.4.2 Related registers Figure 2.4.5 shows memory allocation of timer-related registers. Each of these registers is described below.
Address 002416 002516 002616 Timer 1 (T1) Timer 2 (T2) Timer 3 (T3)
002916
Timer 123 mode register (T123M)
003C16 003D16 003E16 003F16
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2)
Fig. 2.4.5 Memory allocation of timer-related registers
2-90
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
(1) Timer latches and timer counters (corresponding to timers 1 to 3) The latches and the counters each consist of 8 bits and are allocated at the same address for each timer. To access a latch and a counter, access the corresponding timer. When the timer is read out, the value of the counter (count value) is read out. sLatch The latch is a register which holds the value to be transferred (reloaded) automatically to the counter as the initial value of the counter at the counter underflow. It is impossible to read out the value of the latch. Figure 2.4.6 the structure of the latches. For the rewrite operation of the value of the latch, refer to "2.4.1 Explanation of operations, (2) Rewriting the value of the counter and the latch."
qTimer 1 latch and timer 3 latch Timer 1 and timer 3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer 1 and timer 3 (T1,T3) [Address 2416, 2616] Functions At reset R W x 1 0 *Set "0016 to FF16" as timers 1 or 3 count value. to *The values of each timer are set to the 7 respective latches and transferred automatically to the respective counters at the counter underflow. B
qTimer 2 latch Timer 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer 2 (T2) [Address 2516] B 0 1 to 7 Functions *Set "0016 to FF16" as timer 2 count value. *The value of timer 2 is set to the timer 2 latch and transferred automatically to the timer 2 counter at the timer 2 counter underflow. At reset R W x 1 0 x
Fig. 2.4.6 Structure of latches
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-91
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
sCounters The counters count the count source V1. Figure 2.4.7 shows the structure of the timer counters. The value of the counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. The division ratio of the counters is represented by the following expression. Division ratio of the counter = 1 the counter initial value + 1
When the timer is read out, the value of the counter (count value) is read out. For the rewriting operation for the value of the counter, refer to "2.4.1 Explanation of operations, (2) Rewriting the value of the counter and the latch." V1: For count source selection, refer to "2.4.2 Related registers, (2) Timer 123 mode register."
qTimer 1 counter and timer 3 counter Timer 1 and timer 3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer 1 and timer 3 (T1, T3) [Address 2416, 2616] B Functions At reset R W 1
0 *Set "0016 to FF16" as timers 1 or 3 count value. to *The value of the counter is decremented by 7 1 each time a count source is input. *The values of each timer are set to the respective counters. *The respective count values are read out by reading each timer.
qTimer 2 counter Timer 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer 2 (T2) [Address 2516] Functions At reset R W 1 0 *Set "0016 to FF16" as timer 2 count value. *The value of the counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input. *When timer 2 write control bit is "0," the value 1 of the timer 2 is set to the timer 2 counter. 0 to *The timer 2 count value is read out by reading 7 the timer 2. B
Fig. 2.4.7 Structure of timer counters
2-92
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
(2) Timer 123 mode register (T123M) The timer 123 mode register (address 002916) consists of TOUT output control bit, the count source selection bits, and others. Figure 2.4.8 shows the structure of the timer 123 mode register. Each bit is described below.
Timer 123 mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer 123 mode register (T123M) [Address 2916] B 0 Name TOUT output active edge switch bit TOUT output control bit Timer 2 write control bit Functions 0 : Start at "H" output 1 : Start at "L" output 0 : TOUT output disabled 1 : TOUT output enabled At reset R W 0
1
0
0 : Write value in latch and counter 1 : Write value in latch only 3 Timer 2 count source 0 : Timer 1 underflow 1 : f(XIN)/16 selection bit (Middle-/high-speed mode) f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode) (Note) 4 Timer 3 count source 0 : Timer 1 underflow selection bit 1 : f(XIN)/16 (Middle-/high-speed mode) f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode) (Note) 5 Timer 1 count source 0 : f(XIN)/16 (Middle-/high-speed mode) selection bit f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode) (Note) 1 : f(XCIN) 6, 7 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 2 Note: Internal clock is f(XCIN)/2 in the low-speed mode.
0 0
0
0
0
0x
Fig. 2.4.8 Structure of timer 123 mode register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-93
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
sTOUT output active edge switch bit (bit 0) The TOUT output active edge switch bit selects an initial level of the TOUT output. When bit 0 is "0," the output pulse from the P56/TOUT pin is started at the "H" level. When bit 0 is "1," the output pulse from the P56/TOUT pin is started at the "L" level. sTOUT output control bit (bit 1) The TOUT output control bit controls the TOUT output. When bit 1 is "0," the TOUT output is disabled. When bit 1 is "1," the TOUT output is enabled. sTimer 2 write control bit (bit 2) The timer 2 write control bit controls writing to the timer 2. When bit 2 is "0," a simultaneous write operation to both the timer 2 latch and the timer 2 counter is set. When a value is written to the timer 2, the value is set into both the timer 2 latch and the timer 2 counter at the same time. When bit 2 is "1," a write operation to the latch only is set. When a value is written into the timer 2, the value is set into the timer 2 latch only. When a value is written into the timer 2 latch only, this rewritten value is transferred to the timer 2 counter at the first timer 2 counter underflow after rewriting. sTimer 2 count source selection bit (bit 3) The timer 2 count source selection bit selects a count source of the timer 2. Table 2.4.1 shows the relation between the timer 2 count source selection bit and count sources. Table 2.4.1 Relation between timer 2 count source selection bit and count sources bit 3 0 1 Timer 2 count source Timer 1 underflow f(XIN)/16 (In low speed mode; f(XCIN)/16)
sTimer 3 count source selection bit (bit 4) The timer 3 count source selection bit selects a count source of the timer 3. Table 2.4.2 shows the relation between the timer 3 count source selection bit and count sources. Table 2.4.2 Relation between timer 3 count source selection bit and count sources bit 4 0 1 Timer 3 count source Timer 1 underflow f(XIN)/16 (In low speed mode; f(XCIN)/16)
sTimer 1 count source selection bit (bit 5) The timer 1 count source selection bit selects a count source of the timer 1. Table 2.4.3 shows the relation between the timer 1 count source selection bit and count sources. Table 2.4.3 Relation between timer 1 count source selection bit and count sources Count source examples Timer 1 count source bit 5 f(XIN) = 8 MHz f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz f(XIN)/16 (In low speed mode; f(XCIN)/16) 500 kHz 2.048 kHz 0 f(XCIN) -- 32.768 kHz 1
2-94
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
(3) Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) and interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) The interrupt request register 1 (address 003C16) and the interrupt request register 2 (address 003D16) indicate whether an interrupt request has occured or not. Figure 2.4.9 shows the structure of the interrupt request register 1 and Figure 2.4.10 shows the structure of the interrupt request register 2. The occurrence of an interrupt request causes the corresponding bit to be set to "1." This interrupt request bit is automatically cleared to "0" by the acceptance of the interrupt request. The interrupt request bit can be cleared to "0" by software, but it cannot be set to "1" by software. The occurrence of each interrupt is controlled by the interrupt enable bit (refer to the next item). For details of interrupts, refer to "2.2 Interrupts."
Interrupt request register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) [Address 3C16] B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name INT0 interrupt request bit INT1 interrupt request bit Serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit Timer X interrupt request bit Timer Y interrupt request bit Timer 2 interrupt request bit Timer 3 interrupt request bit Functions 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V V V V V V V V
V : "0" can be set by software, but "1" cannot be set.
Fig. 2.4.9 Structure of interrupt request register 1
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-95
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
Interrupt request register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) [Address 3D16] Name 0 CNTR0 interrupt request bit 1 CNTR1 interrupt request bit B At reset R W Functions V 0 : No interrupt request issued 0 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V V V V V V 0x
0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued Timer 1 interrupt 0 : No interrupt request issued 2 request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 3 INT2 interrupt request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued 4 INT3 interrupt 0 : No interrupt request issued request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued Key input interrupt 0 : No interrupt request issued 5 request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 6 Serial I/O2 interrupt request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued 7 Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and is fixed to "0" at reading. V : "0" can be set by software, but "1" cannot be set.
Fig. 2.4.10 Structure of interrupt request register 2
2-96
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
(4) Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) and interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) The interrupt control register 1 (address 003E16) and the interruot contorol register 2 (address 003F16) control each interrupt request source. Figure 2.4.11 shows the structure of the interrupt control register 1 and Figure 2.4.12 shows the structure of the interrupt control register 2. When an interrupt enable bit is "0," the corresponding interrupt request is disabled. If an interrupt request occurs when this bit is "0," the corresponding interrupt request bit only is set to "1," and the interrupt request is not accepted. When the interrupt enable bit is "1," the corresponding interrupt request is enabled. If an interrupt request occurs when this bit is "1," the interrupt request is accepted (interrupt disable flag = "0"). Each interrupt enable bit can be set to "0" or "1" by software. For details of interrupts, refer to "2.2 Interrupts."
Interrupt control register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) [Address 3E16] B 0 1 2 Name INT0 interrupt enable bit INT1 interrupt enable bit Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit Functions 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit 4 Timer X interrupt enable bit 5 Timer Y interrupt enable bit Timer 2 interrupt 6 enable bit 7 Timer 3 interrupt enable bit
Fig. 2.4.11 Structure of interrupt control register 1
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-97
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
Interrupt control register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) [Address 3F16] B Name 0 CNTR0 interrupt enable bit 1 CNTR1 interrupt enable bit 2 3 4 5 6 7 Timer 1 interrupt enable bit INT2 interrupt enable bit INT3 interrupt enable bit Key input interrupt enable bit Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit Fix this bit to "0." Functions
0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled
At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
Fig. 2.4.12 Structure of interrupt control register 2
2-98
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
2.4.3 Register setting example Figure 2.4.13 shows an example of setting registers for timers 1, 2, and 3.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following : *Before setting below, clear the respective timer interrupt enable bits and the timer respective interrupt request bits to "0." *After setting below, set the respective timer interrupt enable bits to "1" (interrupts enabled). 2: The values written in the timers 1 and 3 are set into both the respective latches and the respective counters at the same time. 3: To enable the TOUT output when the timer 2 is used, set port P56 (this port is also used the TOUT pin) for the output mode. 4: Write values in the order of the timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3.
Setting of timer 123 mode register
Select count source or others b7 b0 T123M : Timer 123 mode register [Address 2916] b0 : TOUT output active edge switch bit 0 : Start at "H" output 1 : Start at "L" output b1 : TOUT output control bit 0 : TOUT output disabled 1 : TOUT output enabled b2 : Timer 2 write control bit 0 : Write value in latch and counter 1 : Write value in latch only b3 : Timer 2 count source selection bit 0 : Timer 1 underflow 1 : f(XIN)/16 (Middle-/high-speed mode) f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode) b4 : Timer 3 count source selection bit 0 : Timer 1 underflow 1 : f(XIN)/16 (Middle-/high-speed mode) f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode) b5 : Timer 1 count source selection bit 0 : f(XIN)/16 (Middle-/high-speed mode) f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode) 1 : f(XCIN)
Set count value to timer 1 (T1) [Address 2416] Set count value to timer 2 (T2) [Address 2516] Set count value to timer 3 (T3) [Address 2616]
Fig. 2.4.13 Example of setting registers for timers 1, 2, and 3
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-99
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
2.4.4 Application example Timer mode: Clock function (measurement of one second) Outline: The input clock is divided by timer, with a timer 1 interrupt caused every 0.4 ms, 1 second is counted. Thus, the clock is counted up every second. Specification: *Division of f(XCIN) = 32 kHz by timer 1 causes an interrupt. *The counter value counted by the timer 1 interrupt is checked in the main routine. If 1 second has elapsed, the clock counts up. Figure 2.4.14 shows the setting of the related registers and Figure 2.4.15 shows the control procedure.
b7
b0 1 X X X X X T123M : Timer 123 mode register [Address 2916] b5 : Timer 1 count source selection bit 1 : f(XCIN)
: Noting is allocated
7F16
T1 : Timer 1 [Address 2416]
Set "division ratio - 1 (127 : 7F16) " in the timer 1
Notes 1 : 1 second = 1/32 kHz ! (127 + 1) ! 250 Division ratio 2 : Write values in the order of the timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3. Counted in interrupt processing
b7 b0 0 X X X X 1 X X ICON2 : Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16] b2 : Timer 1 interrupt enable bit 1 : Interrupt enabled
Fig. 2.4.14 Setting of related registers
2-100
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
RESET Initialization CLT CLD SEI ICON2 (Address 3F16) 0XXXX0XX2 T123M (Address 2916) XX1XXXXX2 T1 (Address 2416) 7F16 (128 - 1) All interrupts; Disabled Timer 1 interrupt; Disabled Connect timer 1 Set "division ratio - 1" to timer 1 (Set in the order of timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3) Timer count start Timer 1 interrupt; Enabled Interrupts; Enabled
ICON2 (Address 3F16) 0XXXX1XX2 CLI
Interrupts every 0.4 ms Timer 1 interrupt processing routine
1 second counter + 1 Clock stop ? Y Check if the clock has already been set N 1 second has elapsed ? (1 second counter = 250 ?) Y Clear 1 second counter V Count up clock (Second--Year) Clear the counter counted by interrupt processing N Check a lapse of 1 second RTI
Main processing (Note) T1 (Address 2416) 7F16 IREQ2 (Address 3D16), bit 2 0 1 second counter 0 Note : This processing is performed only at completing to set the clock
Specify so that all processing within the loop markedV is repeated in a cycle of 1 second or less
When restarting the clock from zero second after completing to set the clock, set timers again.
Fig. 2.4.15 Control procedure
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-101
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
2.4.5 Notes on use (1) Notes on using timer 1 to timer 3 sWhen the count sources of timers 1 to 3 are switched, a short pulse occurs in counted input signals, so the timer count value may change greatly. sWhen the timer 1 output is selected as a count source of timer 2 or timer 3, a short pulse occurs in the output signal at writing value into the timer 1, so the count value of the timer 2 or timer 3 may change greatly. sFor the above reasons, set values in the order of timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3 after setting their count sources. (2) Timer 2 write control When writing to the latch only is selected, the value written into the timer 2 (address 002516) is written only in the latch for reloading. This rewritten value is transferred to the timer 2 counter at the first underflow after rewriting. Usually, a value is written in both the latch and the counter at the same time. That is, when a value is written to timer, it is set in both the latch and the counter. (3) Timer 2 output control In the timer 2 (TOUT) output enable state, a signal whose polarity is reversed each time the timer 2 counter underflows is output from the TOUT pin. In this case, set the port P56 (this is used as the TOUT pin) for the output mode.
2-102
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.5.1 Explanation of operations As a serial I/O1, it is possible to select either the clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode or the clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART) mode. This section describes operations in both the clock synchronous mode and the clock asynchronous (UART) mode. When serial I/O1 is actually used, refer to "2.5.4 Register setting example." (1) Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode In the clock synchronous mode, 8 shift clocks generated in the clock control circuit are used as synchronizing clocks for transfer. In synchronization with these shift clocks, the transmit operation on the transmitter and the receive operation on the receiver are simultaneously executed. The transmitter transmits each 1-bit data from the P45/TxD pin in synchronization with the falling of the shift clocks. The receiver receives each 1-bit data from the P44/RxD pin in synchronization with the rising of the shift clocks. Figure 2.5.1 shows an external connection example in the clock synchronous mode.
3820 group
XIN 8 Receive buffer register Receive shift register 1/4 Clock control circuit BRG 1/(n+1) 1/4 Transmit shift register Transmit buffer register 8
3820 group
8 Transmit buffer register Transmit shift register Clock control circuit
RxD
TxD SCLK
SCLK
TxD
RxD
Receive shift register Receive buffer register 8
Internal clock is selected
External clock is selected
Fig. 2.5.1 External connection example in clock synchronous mode
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-103
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
sShift clock Ordinarily, when clock synchronous transfer is performed between microcomputers, an internal clock is selected for one of them, and it outputs 8 shift clocks generated by a start of transmit operation from the P46/SCLK1 pin. An external clock is selected for the other microcomputer, and it uses the clock input from the P46/SCLK1 pin as a shift clock. Figure 2.5.2 shows a shift clock.
3820 group
XIN 8 Receive buffer register Receive shift register 1/4 Clock control circuit BRG 1/(n+1) SCLK1 1/4 TxD RxD
3820 group
8 Transmit buffer register Transmit shift register Clock control circuit
RxD Shift clock
TxD SCLK1
Transmit shift register Transmit buffer register 8
Receive shift register Receive buffer register 8
Internal clock is selected
Fig. 2.5.2 Shift clock
External clock is selected
2-104
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
sData transfer rate (baud rate) When an internal clock is used, the data transfer rate (baud rate), which is a shift clock frequency in the clock synchronous mode, is determined by baud rate generator (BRG). When the BRG count source selection bit (bit 0) of the serial I/O1 control register (address 001A16) is "0," XIN pin input clock is input to the BRG, when this bit is "1," XIN pin input clock divided by 4 is input to the BRG. The expression for baud rate is shown below.
qWhen selecting an internal clock (Using BRG) Baud rate = Division ratio [bps] XIN pin input
V1
! (BRG setting value
V2
+ 1) ! 4
V1 Division ratio; Select "1," or "4" V2 BRG setting value; 0 to 255 (0016 to FF16)
qWhen selecting an external clock
Baud rate = Frequency of input clock to P46/SCLK1 pin [bps]
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-105
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
sTransmit operation in the clock synchronous mode Transmit operation in the clock synchronous mode is described below. qStart of transmit operation A transmit operation is started by writing transmit data into the transmit buffer register (address 001816) in the transmit enable state. V1 qTransmit operation By writing transmit data into the transmit buffer register, the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0) of the serial I/O1 status register (address 001916) is cleared to "0."
Data bus [Address 1816] Write transmit data Transmit buffer register b0 1 0
Serial I/O1 status register [Address 1916]
The transmit data written in the transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register.V2 When a data transfer from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register is completed, the transmit buffer empty flag is set to "1."V3 The transmit data transferred to the transmit shift register is output from the P45/TxD pin in synchronization with the falling of the shift clocks. The data is output from the least significant bit of the transmit shift register. Each time 1bit data is output, the data of the transmit shift register is shifted by 1 bit toward the least significant bit.
Transmit buffer register Transfer transmit data Transmit shift register
Serial I/O1 status register [Address 1916]
0 1 b0
b0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Transmit shift register
D0 P45/TxD
b0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Transmit shift register
D1 P45/TxD
V1: Initialization of register or others for a transmit operation. Refer to "2.5.4 Register setting example." V2: When the transmit interrupt source selection bit (bit 3) of the serial I/O1 control register (address 001A16) is set to "0," a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request occurs immediately after transfer in . When this bit is set to "1," a transmit interrupt request occurs at the time of . V3: While the transmit buffer empty flag is "1," it is possible to write the next transmit data into the transmit/receive buffer register.
2-106
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
At the time when a transmit shift operation starts, the transmit shift register shift completion flag (bit 2) of the serial I/O1 status register is cleared to "0." V4
b0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Transmit shift register Serial I/O1 status register [Address 1916]
D0 P45/TxD 1 0 b2
At the time when the transmit shift operation completes, the transmit shift register shift completion flag is set to "1." V2 V4
b0 D7 Transmit shift register Serial I/O1 status register [Address 1916] 0 1 b2 P45/TxD
V4: When an internal clock is used as a synchronizing clock, supplying the shift clock to the transmit shift register stops automatically at the completion of 8-bit transmission. However, when the next transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register while the transmit shift register shift completion flag is "0," supplying the shift clock is continued.
Shift clock
Transmit shift register
b7 b0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D0 D1 D2
D7
Fig. 2.5.3 Transmit operation in clock synchronous mode
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-107
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Write "1" Transmit enable bit Write transmit data to transmit buffer register Write next transmit data Transmit buffer empty flag Transmit shift register shift completion flag Shift clock
TxD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
Fig. 2.5.4 Transmit timing example in clock synchronous mode
2-108
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
sReceive operation in the clock synchronous mode Receive operation in the clock synchronous mode is described below. qStart of receive operation A receive operation is started by writing the following data into the receive buffer register (address 001816) in the receive enable state.V1 *Transmit data in the full duplex data transfer mode *Arbitrary dummy data in the half duplex data transfer mode qReceive operation Each 1-bit data is read into the receive shift register from the P44/RxD pin in synchronization with the rising of the shift clocks.
b0 D1 P44/RxD
D0
Receive shift register
The data enters first into the most significant bit of the receive shift register. Each time 1bit data is received, the data of the receive shift register is shifted by 1 bit toward the least significant bit. When 1-byte data has been input into the receive shift register, the data of the receive shift register is transferred to the receive buffer register (address 001816).V2
b0 D4 P44/RxD
D3 D2 D1 D0
Receive shift register
Receive shift register D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Transfer receive data [Address 1816] Receive buffer register
When a data transfer to the receive buffer register is completed, the receive buffer full flag (bit 1) of the serial I/O1 status register (address 001916) is set to "1,"V3 a serial I/O1 receive interrupt request occurs.
Serial I/O1 status register [Address 1916]
0 1 b1
V1: Initialization of register or others for a receive operation. Refer to "2.5.4 Register setting example." V2: When data remains without reading out the data of the receive buffer register (the receive buffer full flag is "1") and yet all the receive data has been input to the receive shift register, the overrun error flag of the serial I/O1 status register is set to "1." At this time, the data of the receive shift register is not transferred to the receive buffer register, but the former data of the receive buffer register is held. V3: The receive buffer full flag is cleared to "0" by reading out the receive buffer register.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-109
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Shift clock
b7
Receive shift register
b0
D0 D1 D0 D2 D1 D0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Fig. 2.5.5 Receive operation in clock synchronous mode
Write "1" Receive enable bit Read out receive buffer register Receive buffer full flag Write data to receive buffer register Shift clock
RxD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
Fig. 2.5.6 Receive timing example in clock synchronous mode
2-110
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
sTransmit/receive timing example in the clock synchronous mode Figure 2.5.7 shows a data transmit/receive timing example in the clock synchronous mode.
3820 group
TXD RXD SCLK1
3820 group
TXD RXD SCLK1
Write "1" Transmit enable bit Write transmit data to transmit buffer register Write next transmit data Transmit buffer empty flag Transmit shift register shift completion flag
Shift clock
TXD Write "1" Receive enable bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
Read out receive buffer register Receive buffer full flag D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1
RXD
Fig. 2.5.7 Transmit/receive timing example in clock synchronous mode
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-111
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(2) Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART) mode As the clock asynchronous mode (UART mode), data is transmitted and received in asynchronous form unifying the data transfer rate and the transfer data format between the transmitter and the receiver. Figure 2.5.8 shows an external connection example in the UART mode.
3820 group
XIN 8 Receive buffer register Receive shift register 1/4 Clock control circuit BRG 1/(n+1) 1/16 TxD RxD
3820 group
8 Transmit buffer register Transmit shift register Clock control circuit BRG 1/16 1/(n+1) XIN
RxD
TxD
1/4
Transmit shift register Transmit buffer register 8
Receive shift register Receive buffer register 8
3820 group
8 Transmit buffer register Transmit shift register Clock control circuit BRG 1/(n+1) 1/16 RxD XIN
TxD
1/4
Receive shift register Receive buffer register 8
Fig. 2.5.8 External connection example in UART mode
2-112
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
sData transfer rate (baud rate) When an internal clock is used, the data transfer rate (baud rate), which is a shift clock frequency in the UART mode, is determined by baud rate generator (BRG). When the BRG count source selection bit (bit 0) of the serial I/O1 control register (address 001A16) is "0," XIN pin input clock is input to the BRG, when this bit is "0," XIN pin input clock divided by 4 is input to the BRG. The expression for baud rate is shown below.
qWhen selecting an internal clock (Using BRG) Baud rate = Division ratio [bps] XIN pin input
V1
! (BRG setting value
V2
+ 1) ! 16
V1 Division ratio; Select "1," or "4" V2 BRG setting value; 0 to 255 (0016 to FF16)
qWhen selecting an external clock Frequency of input clock to P46/SCLK1 pin 16
Baud rate = [bps]
Table 2.5.1 Baud rate selection table (reference values) Baud rates [bps] BRG count source At XIN input = 4.9152 MHz 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 76800 153600 307200 At XIN input = 8 MHz 488.28125 976.5625 1953.125 3906.25 7812.5 15625 31250 62500 125000 250000 500000 XIN input/4 XIN input/4 XIN input/4 XIN input/4 XIN input/4 XIN input/4 XIN input/4 XIN input/4 XIN input/4 XIN input XIN input 255 (FF16) 127 (7F16) 63 (3F16) 31 (1F16) 15 (0F16) 7 (0716) 3 (0316) 1 (0116) 0 (0016) 1 (0116) 0 (0016) BRG setting value
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-113
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
sTransfer data format Data transfer format is set by the UART control register (address 001B16). Figure 2.5.9 shows a transfer data format in the UART mode, Table 2.5.2, the each bit function of UART transmit data, Figure 2.5.10, all transfer data formats in the UART mode.
qFor 1ST-8DATA-1PA-2SP
Transmit data Data bit (8 bits) ST LSB D0 D1 D6 MSB D7 PA SP SP ST D0 D1 Next transmit data (at continuous output)
Fig. 2.5.9 Transfer data format in UART mode Table 2.5.2 Each bit function of UART transmit data Bit ST (Start bit) DATA (Data bit) PA (Parity bit) Functions Indicates a start of data transmission. A "L" signal for one bit is added just before transmit data. Indicates the transmit data written in the transmit buffer register, "02" data is a "L" signal and "12" data is a "H" signal. These bits are called as character bits. To improve the reliability of data, this bit is added just after the last data bit. The value of this bit changes in accordance with the value of the parity selection bit so that the number of "1" in the transmit/receive data (including the parity bit) can always be an even or an odd number. Indicates an completion of data transmission. This bit is added just after the last data bit (or just after a parity bit in the parity checking enabled). As a stop bit, a "H" signal for 1 bit or 2 bits is output.
SP (Stop bit)
2-114
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
ST Di PA SP
: Start bit : Data bit : Parity bit : Stop bit
qFor 7-bit UART mode
ST ST ST ST LSB D0 LSB D0 LSB D0 LSB D0 D1 D1 D1 D1 D2 D2 D2 D2 D3 D3 D3 D3 D4 D4 D4 D4 D5 D5 MSB D6 MSB D6 SP SP PA PA SP SP SP SP
MSB D5 D6 D5 MSB D6
qFor 8-bit UART mode
ST ST ST ST LSB D0 LSB D0 LSB D0 LSB D0 D1 D1 D1 D1 D2 D2 D2 D2 D3 D3 D3 D3 D4 D4 D4 D4 D5 D5 D5 D5 D6 D6 D6 D6 MSB D7 MSB D7 MSB D7 MSB D7 SP SP PA PA SP SP SP SP
Fig. 2.5.10 All transfer data formats in UART mode
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-115
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
sTransmit operation in the UART mode Transmit operation in the UART mode is described below. qStart of transmit operation A transmit operation is started by writing transmit data into the transmit buffer register (address 001816) in the transmit enable state. V1 qTransmit operation By writing transmit data into the transmit buffer register, the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0) of the serial I/O1 status register (address 001916) is cleared to "0."
Data bus [Address 1816] Serial I/O1 status register [Address 1916] Write transmit data b0 1 0
Transmit buffer register
The transmit data written in the transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register.V2
Transmit buffer register Transfer transmit data Transmit shift register
When a data transfer from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register is completed, the transmit buffer empty flag is set to "1."V3
Serial I/O1 status register [Address 1916]
0 1 b0
The transmit data transferred to the transmit shift register is output from the P45/TxD pin in synchronization with the falling of the shift clock, beginning with the start bit. A start bit, a parity bit and a stop bit are automatically generated and output in accordance with the contents set in the UART control register. The data is output from the least significant bit of the transmit shift register. Each time 1bit data is output, the data of the transmit shift register is shifted by 1 bit toward the least significant bit.
b0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Transmit shift register
ST P45/TxD
b0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Transmit shift register
D0 P45/TxD
V1: Initialization of register or others for a transmit operation. Refer to "2.5.4 Register setting example." V2: When the transmit interrupt source selection bit (bit 3) of the serial I/O1 control register (address 001A16) is set to "0," a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request occurs immediately after transfer in . When this bit is set to "1," a transmit interrupt request occurs at the time of . V3: While the transmit buffer empty flag is "1," it is possible to write the next transmit data into the transmit/receive buffer register.
2-116
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
At the time when a transmit shift operation starts, the transmit shift register shift completion flag (bit 2) of the serial I/O1 status register is cleared to "0." V4
b0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Transmit shift register Serial I/O1 status register [Address 1916]
ST P45/TxD 1 0 b2 SP P45/TxD
After the lapse of a 1/2 period V5 of the shift clock from a transmission start of stop bit, the transmit shift register shift completion flag is set to "1." V2 V4
Serial I/O1 status register [Address 1916]
0 1 b2
V4: When an internal clock is used as a synchronizing clock, supplying the shift clock to the transmit shift register stops automatically at the completion of 8-bit transmission. However, when the next transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register while the transmit shift register shift completion flag is "0," supplying the shift clock is continued. V5: In the case of 2 stop bits, after the lapse of a 1/2 period of the shift clock from a start of the second stop bit transmission.
Shift clock Write transmit data to transmit buffer register Write next transmit data Transmit buffer empty flag Transmit shift register shift completion flag
TXD
ST
D0
D1
D2
D6
PAR
SP SP
ST
D0
Fig. 2.5.11 Transmit timing example in UART mode
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-117
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
sReceive operation in the UART mode Receive operation in the UART mode is described below. qStart of receive operation In the receive enable state, V1 set the receive enable bit (bit 5) of the serial I/O1 control register (address 001A16) into the enabled state ("1"). With this operation, a start bit is detected and a receive operation of serial data is started. qReceive operation With the lapse of a 1/2 period of the shift clock from detection of the falling of the P44/ RxD pin input, the P44/RxD pin level is checked. When it is "L" level, the bit is judged as a start bit. When it is "H" level, the bit is judged as noise, so the receive operation is stopped, being put into wait status for a start bit again. Each 1-bit data is read into the receive shift register from the P44/RxD pin in synchronization with the rising of the shift clocks.
P44/RXD
Shift clock
RXD (Noise)
RXD (ST)
b0 D1 D0 Receive shift register
The data after the detection of the start bit enters first into the most significant bit of the receive shift register. Each time 1-bit data is received, the data of the receive shift register is shifted by 1 bit toward the least significant bit. When a specified number of bits has been input into the receive shift register, the data of the receive shift register are transferred to the receive buffer register (address 001816). V2V3
b0 D4 P44/RXD D3 D2 D1 D0 Receive shift register
Receive shift register D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Transfer receive data [Address 1816] Receive buffer register
V1: Initialization of register or others for a receive operation. Refer to "2.5.4 Register setting example." V2: When the data bit length is 7 bits, bits 0 to 6 of the receive buffer register are receive data, and bit 7 (MSB) is cleared to "0." V3: When data remains without reading out the data of the receive buffer register (the receive buffer full flag is "1") and yet all the receive data has been input to the receive shift register, the overrun error flag of the serial I/O1 status register is set to "1." At this time, the data of the receive shift register is not transferred to the receive buffer register, but the former data of the receive buffer register is held.
2-118
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
After the lapse of a 1/2 period of the shift clock from a reception start of stop bit, the receive buffer full flag (bit 1) of the serial I/O1 status register is set to "1." And a serial I/O1 receive interrupt request occurs. Error flag detection is performed concurrently with the occurrence of a serial I/O1 receive interrupt request. V4: The receive buffer full flag is cleared to "0" by reading out the receive buffer register.
Shift clock RXD (SP)
Serial I/O1 status register [Address 1916]
0 1 b1
Write "1" Receive enable bit Start receiving at falling of ST Check that ST is "L" level RXD ST D0 D1 D2 D6 PAR SP SP ST D0
Shift clock
Fig. 2.5.12 Receive timing example in UART mode (3) Processing upon occurrence of errors sParity error, framing error, or summing error When a parity error, a framing error, or a summing error occurs, the flag corresponding to each error in the serial I/O1 status register is set to "1." These flags are not cleared to "0" automatically, so set them to "0" by software. These flags are set to "0" by one of the following operations. *Set the receive enable bit to "0" *Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register sOverrun error An overrun error occurs when data is already input in the receive buffer register and yet all data is input in the receive shift register. If an overrun error occurs, the data of the receive shift register is not transferred and the data of the receive buffer register is held. At this time, even if the data of the receive buffer register is read out, the data of the receive shift register is not transferred. Consequently, the data of the receive shift register becomes unreadable, so that the receive data becomes invalid. If an overrun error occurs, after set the overrun error flag of the serial I/O1 status register to "0," perform a receive operation again. The overrun error flag is set to "0" by one of the following operations. *Set the serial I/O1 enable bit to "0" *Set the receive enable bit to "0" *Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-119
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.5.2 Pins The serial I/O1 uses 4 pins, namely, pins for data transmit, data receive, shift clock transmit/receive, and receive enable signal output. All these pins are also used as port P4 and switched their functions by the serial I/O1 enable bit (bit 7) and SRDY1 output enable bit (bit 2) of the serial I/O1 control register (address 001A16). The function of each pin is described below. (1) Data transmit pin [TxD] This pin outputs each bit of transmit data and is used as port P45. When the serial I/O1 enable bit of the serial I/O1 control register is set to "1," this pin functions as a serial I/O1 data output pin. (2) Data receive pin [RxD] This pin inputs each bit of receive data and is used as port P44. When the serial I/O1 enable bit of the serial I/O1 control register is set to "1," this pin functions as a serial I/O1 data input pin. (3) Shift clock transmit/receive pin [SCLK1] sClock synchronous mode This pin inputs (receives from the outside) or outputs (supplies to the outside) a shift clock used for transmission and reception. When the serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit (bit 1) of the serial I/O1 control register is set to "0" (use of internal clock), a shift clock is output to the outside. When this bit is set to "1" (use of external clock), a shift clock is input from the outside. sUART mode When the serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit (bit 1) of the serial I/O1 control register is set to "1" (use of external clock), a shift clock is supplied from the outside. When this bit is set to "0" (use of internal clock), this pin does not function. (4) Receive enable signal output pin [SRDY1] This pin notifies the outside of the receive enable state in the clock synchronous mode. This pin does not function in the UART mode. *The SRDY1 output enable bit (bit 2) of the serial I/O1 control register is set to "1." *The transmit enable bit (bit 4) of the serial I/O1 control register is set to "1." When the above two conditions are satisfied, the pin level changes from "H" to "L" at the timing which data is written into the receive buffer register, notifying the outside of the receive enable state.
2-120
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.5.3 Related registers Figure 2.5.13 shows the memory allocation of serial I/O1-related registers. They are the transmit/receive buffer register, serial I/O1 status register, serial I/O1 control register, and UART control register. (1) Transmit/receive buffer register (TB/RB) This register (address 001816) is used to write serial I/O1 transmit data or to read receive data (used for both the clock synchronous mode and the UART mode). For data transmission, transmit data is written into this register. Received data is obtained by reading out this register.
Address 001816 001916 001A16 001B16 Transmit/receive buffer register (TB/RB) Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS) Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON) UART control register (UARTCON)
Fig. 2.5.13 Memory allocation of serial I/O1-related registers
Transmit/receive buffer register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Transmit/receive buffer register (TB/RB) [Address 1816] B Functions At reset R W 0 At transmit ? to *Set "0016 to FF16" as transmit data. 7 *The transmit data is transferred automatically to transmit shift register by writing transmit data. At receive *When all receive data has been input into the receive shift register, the receive data is automatically transferred to this register.
Fig. 2.5.14 Structure of transmit/receive buffer register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-121
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(2) Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS) This register (address 001916) consists of the following flags: *flags representing the states of the registers used for transmission/reception *error flags. This is a read-only register. Bit 7 is unused and set to "1" at reading.
Serial I/O1 status register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS) [Address 1916] B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE) Receive buffer full flag (RBF) Transmit shift register shift completion flag (TSC) Overrun error flag (OE) Parity error flag (PE) Framing error flag (FE) Summing error flag (SE) Functions 0: Buffer full 1: Buffer empty 0: Buffer empty 1: Buffer full 0: Transmit shift in progress 1: Transmit shift completed 0: No error 1: Overrun error 0: No error 1: Parity error 0: No error 1: Framing error 0: (OE) U (PE) U (FE) = 0 1: (OE) U (PE) U (FE) = 1 At reset R W x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x x 1x
Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and is fixed to "1" at reading.
Fig. 2.5.15 Structure of serial I/O1 status register sTransmit buffer empty flag (bit 0) This flag is automatically cleared to "0" by writing transmit data into the transmit buffer register. After the transmit data is written in the transmit buffer register, it is transferred to the transmit shift register. When this transfer is completed and the transmit buffer register becomes empty, this flag is automatically is set to "1." It is possible to write transmit data into the transmit buffer register only while the transmit buffer empty flag is "1." This flag is valid in both the clock synchronous mode and the UART mode. sReceive buffer full flag (bit 1) When all receive data has been input to the receive shift register and then this receive data is transferred to the receive buffer register, this flag is automatically is set to "1." When the transferred receive data is read out from the receive buffer register, the flag is automatically is cleared to "0." If all the next receive data is input to the receive shift register when the receive buffer flag is "1" (the receive buffer register is not yet read out), the overrun error flag is set to "1." This flag is valid in both the clock synchronous mode and the UART mode.
2-122
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
sTransmit shift register shift completion flag (bit 2) When a shift operation (transmission of the first data bit) is started by shift clock after transmit data is transferred to the transmit shift register, this flag is cleared to "0." When the shift operation is completed (completion of transmission of the last data bit), the flag is set to "1." This flag is valid in both the clock synchronous mode and the UART mode. sOverrun error flag (bit 3) If all the next receive data is input to the receive shift register when data has been input (not read out) in the receive buffer register, this flag is set to "1" (occurrence of an overrun error). This flag is set to "0" by one of the following operations. *Set the serial I/O1 enable bit to "0" *Set the receive enable bit to "0" *Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register This flag is valid in both the synchronous mode and the UART mode. sParity error flag (bit 4) In the UART mode, this flag checks an even parity or odd parity by hardware. When the parity of received data is different from the set parity, this flag is set to "1." This flag is set to "0" by one of the following operations. *Set the receive enable bit to "0" *Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register This flag is valid only in the parity enable state in the UART mode. sFraming error flag (bit 5) In the UART mode, this flag judges whether frame synchronization is abnormal. When the stop bit of receive data cannot be received at the set timing, this flag is set to "1." This flag is set to "0" by one of the following operations. *Set the receive enable bit to "0" *Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register This flag is valid only in the UART mode. sSumming error flag (bit 6) This flag is set to "1" when an overrun error, parity error, or framing error occurs. This flag is set to "0" by one of the following operations. *Set the receive enable bit to "0" *Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register This flag is valid in both the clock synchronous mode and the UART mode.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-123
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(3) Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON) This register (address 001A16) controls various functions related to the serial I/O1, such as transmit/ receive modes, clocks, and pin functions. All the bits of this register are read and written by software.
Serial I/O1 control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON) [Address 1A16] B 0 1 Name BRG count source selection bit (CSS) Functions 0: f(XIN) 1: f(XIN)/4 At reset R W 0 0
*In clock synchronous mode Serial I/O1 synchronization clock 0: BRG output/4 1: External clock input selection bit (SCS) *In UART mode 0: BRG output/16 1: External clock input/16 SRDY1 output enable 0: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as I/O port P47 1: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as signal output bit (SRDY) pin SRDY1 (SRDY1 signal indicates receive enable state) Transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) Transmit enable bit (TE) Receive enable bit (RE) Serial I/O1 mode selection bit (SIOM) 0: When transmit buffer has emptied 1: When transmit shift operation is completed 0: Transmit disabled 1: Transmit enabled 0: Receive disabled 1: Receive enabled 0: Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART) mode 1: Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode
2
0
3
0
4 5 6
0 0 0
7
Serial I/O1 enable bit 0: Serial I/O1 disabled (pins P44-P47 operate as I/O pins) (SIOE) 1: Serial I/O1 enabled (pins P44-P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
0
Fig. 2.5.16 Structure of serial I/O1 control register
2-124
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
sBRG count source selection bit (bit 0) This bit selects a count source to be input to the BRG. In the "0" state, an undivided XIN input signal is input to the BRG. In the "1" state, an XIN input signal divided by 4 is input to the BRG. sSerial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit (bit 1) This bit selects a synchronizing clock to be used in the serial I/O1. qClock synchronous mode When this bit is set to "0," a BRG output divided by 4 becomes a shift clock. In the "1" state, an external clock (P46/SCLK1 pin input) becomes a shift clock as it is. qUART mode In the "0" state, a BRG output divided by 16 becomes a shift clock. In the "1" state, an external clock (P46/SCLK1 pin input) divided by 16 becomes a shift clock. sSRDY1 output enable bit (bit 2) When the SRDY1 function is used in the clock synchronous mode, set this bit to "1." In the "0" state, the P47/SRDY1 pin functions as an I/O port P47. In the UART mode, the value of this bit is invalid, so that the P47/SRDY1 pin functions as an I/O port P47. sTransmit interrupt source selection bit (bit 3) This bit determines a source which generates a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request. In the "0" state, a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request occurs at the time when the values of the transmit buffer register are transferred to the transmit shift register. In the "1" state, a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request occurs at the time when the shift operation of the transmit shift register is completed. sTransmit enable bit (bit 4) This bit controls a transmit operation. This bit controls as shown in Table 2.5.3 only when the serial I/O1 enable bit is "1" (serial I/O1 enabled). When the serial I/O1 enable bit is "0" (serial I/O1 disabled), this bit is invalid. Table 2.5.3 Control contents of transmit enable bit Transmit enable bit 0 1 P45/TXD pin function Port P45 Data transmit pin TXD Transmit buffer empty flag Set to "0" Flag function is valid
V1
Transmit shift register shift completion flag V2
V1: Bit 0 of serial I/O1 status register V2: Bit 2 of serial I/O1 status register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-125
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
sReceive enable bit (bit 5) This bit controls receive operation. This bit controls as shown in Table 2.5.4 only when the serial I/O1 enable bit (bit 7) is "1" (serial I/O1 enabled). When the serial I/O1 enable bit is "0" (serial I/O1 disabled), this bit is invalid. Table 2.5.4 Control contents of receive enable bit Receive enable bit 0 1 P44/RXD pin function Port P44 Data receive pin RXD Receive buffer full flag Set to "0" Flag function is valid
V1
Each error flagV2
V1: Bit 1 of serial I/O1 status register V2: Bits 3, 4, 5, and 6 of serial I/O1 status register sSerial I/O1 mode selection bit (bit 6) This bit selects a transmit/receive mode of the serial I/O1. In the UART mode, set this bit to "0." In the clock synchronous mode, set it to "1." sSerial I/O1 enable bit (bit 7) When the serial I/O1 function is used, set this bit to "1." When the bit is set to "1," the pins P44/RxD, P45/TxD, and P46/SCLK1 function as RxD, TxD, and SCLK1 respectively (Furthermore, when the SRDY1 output enable bit is set to "1," the P47/SRDY1 pin functions as an SRDY1 pin). In the "0" state, they function as ports P44-P47 respectively.
2-126
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(4) UART control register (UARTCON) This register (address 001B16) controls the transfer data format in the UART mode and the output format of the P45/TxD pin.
UART control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 UART control register (UARTCON) [Address 1B16] B Name 0 Character length selection bit (CHAS) 1 2 3 4 Functions 0: 8 bits 1: 7 bits 0: Parity checking disabled 1: Parity checking enabled At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0
5 to 7
Parity enable bit (PARE) Parity selection bit 0: Even parity (PARS) 1: Odd parity 0: 1 stop bit Stop bit length selection bit (STPS) 1: 2 stop bits 0: CMOS output (in output mode) P45/TxD P-channel 1: N-channel open-drain output output disable bit (in output mode) (POFF) Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written to and are fixed to "1" at reading.
1
1x
Fig. 2.5.17 Structure of UART control register sCharacter length selection bit (bit 0) This bit selects data bit length of the UART transfer data format. In the "0" state, the data bit length is 8 bits. In the "1" state, the data bit length is 7 bits. sParity enable bit (bit 1) This bit is set to "1" to make a parity check and to "0" to make no parity check. In the "1" state, the parity error flag becomes valid. sParity selection bit (bit 2) This bit selects a parity type of the UART transfer data format. In the "0" state, the parity type is an even parity. In the "1" state, it is an odd parity. sStop bit length selection bit (bit 3) This bit selects a stop bit length of the UART transfer data format. In the "0" state, the stop bit length is 1 stop bit. In the "1" state, the stop bit length is 2 stop bits. sP45/TxD P-channel output disable bit (bit 4) This bit controls the output type of the P45/TxD pin. In the "0" state, the output type is CMOS output in the output mode. In the "1" state, the output type is N-channel open-drain output in the output mode. The 5 low-order bits of the UART control register can be read and written. The 3 high-order bits are unused and read-only bits. At reading, all the bits are set to "1."
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-127
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Table 2.5.5 Relation between UART control register and transfer data formats UART control register Transfer data format b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 X X X X X X X X 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ST-8 ST-7 ST-8 ST-7 ST-8 ST-7 ST-8 ST-7 DATA-1 DATA-1 DATA-1 DATA-1 DATA-2 DATA-2 DATA-1 DATA-1 SP SP PA-1 PA-1 SP SP PA-2 PA-2
SP SP
SP SP
X: "0" or "1" ST: Start bit DATA: Data bit PA: Parity bit SP: Stop bit
2-128
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.5.4 Register setting example (1) Clock synchronous serial I/O mode Figure 2.5.18 and Figure 2.5.19 show a transmitting method in the clock synchronous mode. Figure 2.5.20 and Figure 2.5.21 show a receiving method in the clock synchronous mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: To use an INT pin or input port for watching SRDY1, set as required. 2: When an external clock is selected in setting below, BRG setting is not required in setting below. 3: In the full duplex data transfer mode, set the receive enable bit (bit 5) to "1" (receive enabled) in setting below. 4: To use a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt, set in the following sequence. 5: When no serial I/O1 transmit interrupt is used, omit settings , , , and below. Disable Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
b7 0 b0
ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16] b3: Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit 0: Interrupts disabled
Set the value to baud rate generator (BRG) [Address 1C16]
Setting of serial I/O1 control register
Selection of clock synchronous, transmit, or others
b7 11 b0 1
SIO1CON: Serial I/O1 control register [Address 1A16] b0: BRG count source selection bit 0: f(XIN) 1: f(XIN)/4 b1: Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit (In clock synchronous mode) 0: BRG output/4 1: External clock input b2: SRDY1 output enable bit 0: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as I/O port P47 1: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as signal output pin SRDY1 (SRDY1 signal indicates receive enable state) b3: Transmit interrupt source selection bit 0: When transmit buffer has emptied 1: When transmit shift operation is completed b4: Transmit enable bit 1: Transmit enabled b5: Receive enable bit 0: Receive disabled 1: Receive enabled b6: Serial I/O1 mode selection bit 1: Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode b7: Serial I/O1 enable bit 1: Serial I/O1 enabled (pins P44-P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
Continued to Figure 2.5.19
Fig. 2.5.18 Transmitting method in clock synchronous mode (1)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-129
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Continued from Figure 2.5.18
One or more instructions (e.g., NOP) after
Set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request to "0"
b7 0 b0 IREQ1: Interrupt request register 1 [Address 3C16] b3: Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit 0: No interrupts request issued
Enable serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
b7 1 b0 ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16] b3: Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit 1: Interrupts enabled
Set transmit data to transmit buffer register (TB) [Address 1816]
Processing of serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
Fig. 2.5.19 Transmitting method in clock synchronous mode (2)
2-130
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: To use an INT pin or input port for watching SRDY1, set as required. 2: When an external clock is selected in setting below, BRG setting is not required in setting below. 3: In the full duplex data transfer mode, set the receive enable bit (bit 4) to "1" (receive enabled) in setting below. 4: To use a serial I/O1 receive interrupt, set in the following sequence. 5: When no serial I/O1 receive interrupt is used, omit setting , , , and below.
Disable Serial I/O1 receive interrupt
b7 0 b0
ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16] b2: Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit 0: Interrupts disabled
Set the value to baud rate generator (BRG) [Address 1C16] Setting of serial I/O1 control register
Selection of clock synchronous, receive, or others
b7 111 b0
SIO1CON: Serial I/O1 control register [Address 1A16] b0: BRG count source selection bit 0: f(XIN) 1: f(XIN)/4 b1: Serial I/O synchronization clock selection bit (In clock synchronous mode) 0: BRG output/4 1: External clock input b2: SRDY1 output enable bit 0: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as I/O port P47 1: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as signal output pin SRDY1 (SRDY1 signal indicates receive enable state) b3: Transmit interrupt source selection bit 0: When transmit buffer has emptied 1: When transmit shift operation is completed b4: Transmit enable bit 0: Transmit disabled 1: Transmit enabled b5: Receive enable bit 1: Receive enabled b6: Serial I/O1 mode selection bit 1: Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode b7: Serial I/O1 enable bit 1: Serial I/O1 enabled (pins P44-P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
Continued to Figure 2.5.21
Fig. 2.5.20 Receiving method in clock synchronous mode (1)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-131
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Continued from Figure 2.5.20 One or more instructions (e.g., NOP) after
Set the serial I/O1 receive interrupt request to "0"
b7 0 b0 IREQ1: Interrupt request register 1 [Address 3C16] b2: Serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit 0: No interrupt request issued
Enable serial I/O1 receive interrupt
b7 1 b0 ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16] b2: Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit 1: Interrupts enabled
Set transmit data to receive buffer register (RB) [Address 1816]
In full duplex data transfer mode, set transmit data. In half duplex data transfer mode, set arbitrary dummy data.
Processing of serial I/O1 receive interrupt
Fig. 2.5.21 Receiving method in clock synchronous mode (2)
2-132
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(2) Clock asynchronous serial I/O (UART) mode Figure 2.5.22 and Figure 2.5.23 show a transmitting method in the UART mode. Figure 2.5.24 and Figure 2.5.25 show a receiving method in the UART mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: When an external clock is selected in setting below, BRG setting is not required in setting below. 2: In the full duplex data transfer mode, set the receive enable bit (bit 5) to "1" (receive enabled) in setting below. 3: To use a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt, set in the following sequence. 4: When no serial I/O1 transmit interrupt is used, omit setting , , and below.
Disable Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
b7 0 b0
ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16] b3: Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit 0: Interrupts disabled
Set the value to baud rate generator (BRG) [Address 1C16]
Setting of serial I/O1 control register
Selection of clock asynchronous mode, transmit, or others
b7 10 b0 1
SIO1CON: Serial I/O1 control register [Address 1A16] b0: BRG count source selection bit 0: f(XIN) 1: f(XIN)/4 b1: Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit (In UART mode) 0: BRG output/16 1: External clock input/16 b2: SRDY1 output enable bit Invalied in UART mode b3: Transmit interrupt source selection bit 0: When transmit buffer has emptied 1: When transmit shift operation is completed b4: Transmit enable bit 1: Transmit enabled b5: Receive enable bit 0: Receive disabled 1: Receive enabled b6: Serial I/O1 mode selection bit 0: Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART) mode b7: Serial I/O1 enable bit 1: Serial I/O1 enabled (pins P44-P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
Continued to Figure 2.5.23
Fig. 2.5.22 Transmitting method in UART mode (1)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-133
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Continued from Figure 2.5.22
Setting of UART control register
b7 b0
UARTCON: UART control register [Address 1B16] b0: Character length selection bit 0: 8 bits 1: 7 bits b1: Parity enable bit 0: Parity checking disabled 1: Parity checking enabled b2: Parity selection bit 0: Even parity 1: Odd parity b3: Stop bit length selection bit 0: 1 stop bit 1: 2 stop bits b4: P45/TxD P-channel output disable bit 0: CMOS output (in output mode) 1: N-channel open-drain output (in output mode)
: Nothing is allocated
Set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request to "0"
b7 (Allow an interval of one or more instructions after ) b0 IREQ1: Interrupt request register 1 [Address 3C16] 0 b3: Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit 0: No interrupt request issued
Enable serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
b7 1 b0 ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16] b3: Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit 1: Interrupts enabled
Set transmit data to transmit buffer register (TB) [Address 1816] Processing of serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
Fig. 2.5.23 Transmitting method in UART mode (2)
2-134
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: When an external clock is selected in setting below, BRG setting is not required in setting below. 2: In the full duplex data transfer mode, set the receive enable bit (bit 4) to "1" (receive enabled) in setting below. 3: To use a serial I/O1 receive interrupt, set in the following sequence. 4: When no serial I/O1 receive interrupt is used, omit setting , , and below.
Disable Serial I/O1 receive interrupt
b7 0 b0
ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16] b2: Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit 0: Interrupts disabled
Set the value to baud rate generator (BRG) [Address 1C16]
Setting of serial I/O1 control register
Selection of clock asynchronous, receive, or others
b7 101 b0
SIO1CON: Serial I/O1 control register [Address 1A16] b0: BRG count source selection bit 0: f(XIN) 1: f(XIN)/4 b1: Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit (In UART mode) 0: BRG output/16 1: External clock input/16 b2: SRDY1 output enable bit Invalied in UART mode b3: Transmit interrupt source selection bit 0: When transmit buffer has emptied 1: When transmit shift operation is completed b4: Transmit enable bit 0: Transmit disabled 1: Transmit enabled b5: Receive enable bit 1: Receive enabled b6: Serial I/O1 mode selection bit 0: Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART) mode b7: Serial I/O1 enable bit 1: Serial I/O1 enabled (pins P44-P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
Continued to Figure 2.5.25
Fig. 2.5.24 Receiving method in UART mode (1)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-135
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Continued from Figure 2.5.24
Setting of UART control register
b7 b0
UARTCON: UART control register [Address 1B16] b0: Character length selection bit 0: 8 bits 1: 7 bits b1: Parity enable bit 0: Parity checking disabled 1: Parity checking enabled b2: Parity selection bit 0: Even parity 1: Odd parity b3: Stop bit length selection bit 0: 1 stop bit 1: 2 stop bits b4: P45/TxD P-channel output disable bit 0: CMOS output (in output mode) 1: N-channel open-drain output (in output mode) : Nothing is allocated
Clear the serial I/O1 receive interrupt request
(Allow an interval of one or more instruction after ) b0 b7 IREQ1: Interrupt request register 1 [Address 3C16] 0 b2: Serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit 0: No interrupt issued
Enable serial I/O1 receive interrupt
b7 1 b0 ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16] b2: Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit 1: Interrupts enabled
Processing of serial I/O1 receive interrupt
Fig. 2.5.25 Receiving method in UART mode (2)
2-136
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(3) Initialization of serial I/O1 operation The operating procedure of the serial I/O1 control register for initialization of the serial I/O1 operation is described below. sInitialization of receive operation By setting the receive enable bit (bit 5 of SIO1CON) to "0" or setting the serial I/O1 enable bit (bit 7 of SIO1CON) to "0," the receive operation is stopped and initialized as shown below. The initialization items of receive operation are as follows. *Stopping and initializing the shift clock to the receive shift register. *Setting the receive shift register to "0." *Setting each error flag (overrun error flag, parity error flag, framing error flag, summing error flag) to "0." *Setting the receive buffer full flag (RBF) to "0." sInitialization of transmit operation Basically, the transmit operation is stopped and initialized by setting the transmit enable bit (bit 4 of SIO1CON) to "0." The initialization items of transmit operation are as follows. *Stopping and initializing the shift clock to the transmit shift register. *Setting the receive shift register to "0." (However, when an external clock is used in the clock synchronous mode, the receive shift register is not set to "0" unless the input clock of the SCLK1 pin is "H.") *Setting the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0 of SIO1STS) and the transmit shift register shift completion flag (bit 2 of SIO1STS) to "0." (When bit 4 is set to "0," bits 0 and 2 are cleared to "0" forcibly. After that, when bit 4 is set to "1," bits 0 and 2 are set to "1.") When all conditions below are satisfied, initialization is not performed only by setting bit 4 of SIO1CON to "0." It is also necessary to set bit 5 of SIO1CON to "0." *In the full duplex data transfer *In the clock synchronous mode *When an internal clock is used *When bit 5 of SIO1CON is "1" (receive enabled) In the clock synchronous mode of the full duplex data transfer, the same clock is used for transmission and reception. When an internal clock is used, the shift clock is started by writing data into the transmit buffer at both transmission and reception, so both transmit and receive operations use a clock generating circuit of the transmitter. Because of this, the serial I/O1 is designed so that even if only a receive operation is performed, the transmit circuit may be operated internally to generate a shift clock when an internal clock is used in the clock synchronous mode. Accordingly, note that the transmitter may operate even when bit 4 of SIO1CON is "0." The transmit operation cannot be initialized only by setting the serial I/O1 enable bit (bit 7 of SIO1CON) to "0."
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-137
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(4) Processing upon occurrence of an errors sParity error, framing error, or summing error If a parity error, a framing error, or a summing error occurs, the flag corresponding to each error in the serial I/O1 status register is set to "1." These flags cannot be cleared to "0" automatically, so set them to "0" by software. The parity error flag, framing error flag, and summing error flag is set to "0" by setting the receive enable bit to "0" or writing dummy data into the serial I/O1 status register. sOverrun error An overrun error occurs when data is already input in the receive buffer register and yet all data is input in the receive shift register. If an overrun error occurs, the data of the receive shift register is not transferred and the data of the receive buffer register is held. At this time, even if the data of the receive buffer register is read out, the data of the receive shift register is not transferred. Consequently, the data of the receive shift register becomes unreadable, so that the receive data becomes invalid. If an overrun error occurs, after set the overrun error flag of the serial I/O1 status register to "0," perform a receive operation again. The overrun error flag is set to "0" by one of the following operations. *Set the serial I/O1 enable bit to "0" *Set the receive enable bit to "0" *Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register
2-138
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.5.5 Notes on use (1) Notes on clock selection The 3820 group can select either internal clock or external clock as a synchronizing clock. When an external clock is selected as an synchronizing clock in the clock synchronous mode, note the following. sIn the clock synchronous mode For an external clock source, when the duty cycle is 50%, use the following clock. 1.25 MHz or less....... at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 500 kHz or less.........at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V To change the duty cycle, set the both "H" and "L" widths as follows. 370 ns min. ............. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 950 ns min. ............. at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V The shift operation of the transmit shift register or the receive shift register is continued while synchronizing clocks are input to the serial I/O1 circuit. Accordingly, stop a synchronizing clock input after 8 clocks are input. When the internal clock is selected, the synchronizing clock input is automatically stopped. To select an external clock as a synchronizing clock at data transmission, set the transmit enable bit to "1" and write data into the transmit buffer register while the SCLK1 signal is "H."
When an external clock is selected as a synchronizing clock in the UART mode, note the following. sIn the UART mode For an external clock source, when the duty ratio is 50%, use the following clock. 5 MHz or less..... at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 2 MHz or less..... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V To change the duty cycle, set the "H" and "L" widths as follows. 93 ns min. ........at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 238 ns min. ........at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V (2) For serial I/O1 transmit or receive interrupts For a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt, set a value in the serial I/O1 control register, then set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit (bit 3 at address 003C16) to "0" with the CLB instruction. After setting , set the serial I/O1 transmit enable bit (bit 3 at address 003E16) to "1." For a serial I/O1 receive interrupt, set a value in the serial I/O1 control register, then set the serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit (bit 2 at address 003C16) to "0" with the CLB instruction. After setting , set the serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit (bit 2 at address 003E16) to "1." (3) Transmit interrupt request when the transmit enable bit is "1" When the transmit enable bit is set to "1," the transmit buffer empty flag and the transmit shift register shift completion flag are set to "1." Accordingly, even if either timing is selected as transmit interrupt generating timing, an serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request occurs and the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit is set to "1." To use a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt, set the transmit enable bit to "1," then set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit to "0" once. After that, set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit to "1" (interrupts enabled).
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-139
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(4) For disabling transmission after completion of 1-byte data transmission As a means to know the completion of data transmission, a reference to the transmit shift register shift completion flag (TSC flag) is available in the 3820 group. The TSC flag is cleared to "0" during data transmission. Upon the completion of data transmission, this flag is set to "1." Accordingly, after confirming that the TSC flag is set to "1," disable transmission. The transmission can thus be terminated after 1-byte transmission. However, the TSC flag is set to "1" even when the serial I/O1 enable bit is set to "1" (serial I/O1 enabled). After that, it is not cleared to "0" until transmission is started by generating a shift clock. For this reason, if transmission is disabled by referring to the TSC flag at this time, data is not transmitted. After the transmission is started, refer to the TSC flag. (5) When the P45/TxD pin is used as an N-channel open-drain output Bit 4 of the UART control register (address 001B16) is the P45/TxD P-channel output disable bit. The bit 4 is valid in an ordinary port, in the clock synchronous mode, or in the UART mode. When this bit is "0," the ordinary CMOS output is selected. When the bit is "1," the N-channel opendrain output is selected. However, do not apply to the P45/TXD a voltage of VCC + 0.3 V or more even when it is used as a serial I/O1 function pin of the N-channel open-drain output.
2-140
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.6.1 Explanation of operations The operations of the serial I/O2 are described below. The serial I/O2 operates only in the clock synchronous mode. When serial I/O2 is actually used, refer to "2.6.4 Register setting example." (1) Clock synchronous serial I/O mode In the clock synchronous mode, 8 shift clocks generated in the synchronization circuit are used as synchronizing clocks for transfer. In synchronization with these shift clocks, the transmit operation on the transmitter and the receive operation on the receiver are simultaneously executed. The transmitter transmits each 1-bit data from the P51/SOUT2 pin in synchronization with the falling of the shift clocks. The receiver receives each 1-bit data from the P50/SIN2 pin in synchronization with the rising of the shift clocks. Figure 2.6.1 shows an external connection example of the serial I/O2.
3820 group
XIN 1/8 1/16 1/32 1/64 1/128 1/256
3820 group
Divider
Synchronization circuit
SCLK2
SCLK2
Synchronization circuit
SIN2 Serial I/O2 register 8 SOUT2
SOUT2 SIN2
Serial I/O2 register 8
Internal clock is selected
Fig. 2.6.1 External connection example of serial I/O2
External clock is selected
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-141
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
sShift clock Ordinarily, when clock synchronous transfer is performed between microcomputers, an internal clock is selected for one of them, and it outputs 8 shift clocks generated by a start of transmit operation from the P52/SCLK2 pin. An external clock is selected for the other microcomputer, and it uses the clock input from the P52/SCLK2 pin as a shift clock. Figure 2.6.2 shows a shift clock.
3820 group
XIN 1/8 1/16 1/32 1/64 1/128 1/256 Shift clock
3820 group
Divider
Synchronization circuit
SCLK2
SCLK2
Synchronization circuit
SIN2 Serial I/O2 register SOUT2
SOUT2 SIN2 Serial I/O2 register
8
8
Internal clock is selected
Fig. 2.6.2 Shift clock
External clock is selected
2-142
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
sTransmit operation of the serial I/O2 Transmit operation of the serial I/O2 is described below (When LSB first is selected). qStart of transmit operation A transmit operation is started by writing transmit data into the serial I/O2 register (address 001F16) in the transmit enable state.V1 qTransmit operation The transmit data written in the serial I/O2 register is output from the P51/SOUT2 pin in synchronization with the falling of the shift clocks.
b0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Serial I/O2 register
D0 P51/SOUT2
The data is output from the least significant bit of the serial I/O2 register. Each time 1-bit data is output, the data of the serial I/O2 register is shifted by 1 bit toward the least significant bit.
b0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Serial I/O2 register
D1 P51/SOUT2
When 8-bit transmit data has been transferred, the serial I/O2 interrupt request bit is set to "1" in synchronization with the rising of a shift clock.V2
b0 D7 Serial I/O2 register Interrupt request register 2 [Address 3D16] 0 1 b6 P51/SOUT2
V1: Initialization of register or others for a transmit operation. Refer to "2.6.4 Register setting example." V2: When an internal clock is used as a synchronizing clock, supplying the shift clock to the serial I/O2 register stops automatically at the completion of 8-bit transmission.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-143
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
LSB first (when bit 5 of serial I/O2 control register is "0") is selected
b7 b0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D0 D1 D2
D7
Shift clock
Fig. 2.6.3 Transmit operation of serial I/O2
Serial I/O2 register
Shift clock
SOUT2
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Fig. 2.6.4 Transmit timing example of serial I/O2
2-144
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
sReceive operation of the serial I/O2 Receive operation of the serial I/O2 is described below (When LSB first is selected). qStart of receive operation A receive operation is started by writing the following data into the serial I/O2 register (address 001F16) in the receive enable state.V1 *Transmit data in the full duplex data transfer mode *Arbitrary dummy data in the half duplex data transfer mode qReceive operation Each 1-bit data is read into the serial I/O2 register from the P50/SIN2 pin in synchronization with the rising of the shift clocks.
P50/SIN2
b0 D1
D0
Serial I/O2 register
The data enters first into the most significant bit of the serial I/O2 register. Each time 1-bit data is received, the data of the serial I/O2 register is shifted by 1 bit toward the least significant bit.
b0 D4 P50/SIN2 D3 D2 D1 D0 Serial I/O2 register
When 8-bit receive data transfer is completed, the serial I/O2 interrupt request bit is set to "1" in synchronization with the rising of a shift clock.V2
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 P50/SIN2 Interrupt request register 2 [Address 3D16] Serial I/O2 register 0 1 b6
V1: Initialization of register or others for a transmit operation. Refer to "2.6.4 Register setting example." V2: When an internal clock is used as a synchronizing clock, supplying the shift clock to the serial I/O2 register stops automatically at the completion of 8-bit transmission.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-145
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
LSB first (when bit 5 of serial I/O2 control register is "0") is selected
b7 b0
D0 D1 D0 D2 D1 D0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Shift clock
Fig. 2.6.5 Receive operation of serial I/O2
Serial I/O2 register
Shift clock
RxD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Fig. 2.6.6 Receive timing example of serial I/O2
2-146
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
sTransmit/receive timing example of the serial I/O2 Figure 2.6.7 shows a transmit/receive timing example of the serial I/O2 (the P53/SRDY2 pin is used).
3820 group
SCLK2 SOUT2 P53(SRDY2)
3820 group
SCLK2 SIN2 SRDY2
Shift clock Serial I/O2 register write signal Serial I/O2 output SOUT2 Serial I/O2 input SIN2 Receive enable signal SRDY2
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
(Note)
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Set an interrupt request bit
Note: When an internal clock is selected, the P51/SOUT2 pin is put into the high-impedance state after the completion of a transmit/receive.
Fig. 2.6.7 Transmit/receive timing example of serial I/O2 (P53/SRDY2 pin is used)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-147
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.6.2 Pins The serial I/O2 uses 4 pins, namely, pins for data transmit, data receive, shift clock transmit/receive, and receive enable signal output. All these pins are also used as port P5 and switched their functions by the serial I/O2 port selection bit (bit 3), SRDY2 output enable bit (bit 4) and synchronization clock selection bit (bit 6) of the serial I/O2 control register (address 001D16). The function of each pin is described below. (1) Data transmit pin [SOUT2] This pin outputs each bit of transmit data and is used as port P51. When the serial I/O2 port selection bit (bit 3) of the serial I/O2 control register is set to "1," this pin functions as a serial I/O2 data output pin. (2) Data receive pin [SIN2] This pin inputs each bit of receive data and is used as port P50. There is no register for selecting between port function and data input pin function. Clear bit 5 of the port P5 direction register to "0" (input mode). (3) Shift clock transmit/receive pin [SCLK2] This pin inputs (receives from the outside) or outputs (supplies to the outside) a shift clock used for transmission and reception. When the synchronization clock selection bit (bit 6) of the serial I/O2 control register is set to "0" (use of external clock), a shift clock is input from the outside. When this bit is set to "1" (use of internal clock), a shift clock is output to the outside. (4) Receive enable signal output pin [SRDY2] This pin notifies the outside of the receive enable state in the clock synchronous mode. This pin functions as the receive enable signal output pin by setting the SRDY2 output enable bit (bit 4) of the serial I/O2 control register to "1." The pin level changes from "H" to "L" at the timing which data is written into the serial I/O2 register, notifying the outside of the receive enable state.
2-148
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.6.3 Related registers Figure 2.6.8 shows the memory allocation of the serial I/O2-related registers. They are the serial I/O2 control register and serial I/O2 register.
Address 001D16 Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON)
001F16
Serial I/O2 register (SIO2)
Fig. 2.6.8 Memory allocation of serial I/O2-related registers (1) Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON) The serial I/O2 control register (address 001D16) controls the serial I/O2 function.
Serial I/O2 control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON) [Address 1D16] Name Internal 0 synchronization clock select bits 1 B Functions
b2b1b0
At reset R W 0
2 3 Serial I/O2 port selection bit 4 5 SRDY2 output enable bit Transfer direction selection bit
0 0 0: f(XIN)/8 0 0 1: f(XIN)/16 0 1 0: f(XIN)/32 0 1 1: f(XIN)/64 1 0 0: Do not set 1 0 1: 1 1 0: f(XIN)/128 1 1 1: f(XIN)/256 0: I/O port (P51, P52) 1: SOUT2, SCLK2 signal output 0: I/O port (P53) 1: SRDY2 signal output 0: LSB first 1: MSB first 0: External clock 1: Internal clock
0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0x
6 Synchronization clock selection bit 7
Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and is fixed to "0" at reading.
Fig. 2.6.9 Structure of serial I/O2 control register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-149
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
sInternal synchronization clock select bits (bit 2-bit 0) When an internal clock is selected as serial I/O2 synchronization clocks (bit 6 = 1), these bits select an internal clock division ratio. Table 2.6.1 Relation between internal synchronization clock selection bit and synchronizing clock b2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 b1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 b0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 XIN XIN XIN XIN pin pin pin pin Synchronizing clock of serial I/O2 (when internal clock is selected) input input input input clock/8 clock/16 clock/32 clock/64
Do not set. XIN pin input clock/128 XIN pin input clock/256
sSerial I/O2 port selection bit (bit 3) This bit is used to select the functions of the P51/SOUT2 pin and P52/SCLK2 pin. When this bit is set to "0," the I/O port P51 and P52 functions are selected. When the bit is set to "1," the SOUT2 and SCLK2 pin functions for serial I/O2 are selected. sSRDY2 output enable bit (bit 4) This bit is used to select the P53/SRDY2 pin function. When this bit is set to "1," the I/O port P53 function is selected. When the bit is set to "1," the SRDY2 pin function for serial I/O2 is selected. sTransfer direction selection bit (bit 5) This bit is used to select a transfer direction for serial data of the serial I/O2. When this bit is set to "0," LSB first (transfer from the least significant bit) is selected. When the bit is set to "1," MSB first (transfer from the most significant bit) is selected. sSynchronization clock selection bit (bit 6) This bit is used to select a synchronizing clock of the serial I/O2. When this bit is set to "0," an external clock is selected. When the bit is set to "1," an internal clock is selected.
2-150
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
(2) Serial I/O2 register (SIO2) A transmit/receive operation is started by writing transfer data into the serial I/O2 register (address 001F16). Figure 2.6.10 shows the structure of the serial I/O2 register.
Serial I/O2 register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Serial I/O2 register (SIO2) [Address 1F16] B Functions At reset R W 0 At transmit ? to *Set "0016 to FF16" as transmit data. 7 *The transmit data is transferred automatically to the serial I/O shift register 2 by writing transmit data. At receive *When all receive data has been input into the serial I/O shift register 2, the receive data is automatically transferred to this register.
Fig. 2.6.10 Structure of serial I/O2 register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-151
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.6.4 Register setting example Figure 2.6.11 shows a transmitting method of the serial I/O2, Figure 2.6.12 shows a receiving method of the serial I/O2.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: To use an INT pin or input port for SRDY2 watchdog, set as required. 2: To use a serial I/O2 interrupt, set in the following sequence. 3: When no serial I/O2 interrupt is used, omit settings , , , and below. Disable Serial I/O2 interrupt
b7 00 b0
ICON2: Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16] b6: Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit 0: Interrupts disabled
Setting of serial I/O2 control register
Selection of serial I/O2, or others
b7 1 b0
SIO2CON: Serial I/O2 control register [Address 1D16] b2-b0: Internal synchronization clock select bits 000: f(XIN)/8 011: f(XIN)/64 001: f(XIN)/16 110: f(XIN)/128 010: f(XIN)/32 111: f(XIN)/256 b3: Serial I/O2 port selection bit 1: SOUT2, SCLK2 signal output b4: SRDY2 output enable bit 0: I/O port 1: SRDY2 signal output b5: Transfer direction selection bit 0: LSB first 1: MSB first b6: Synchronization clock selection bit 0: External clock 1: Internal clock : Nothing is allocated
One or more instructions (e.g., NOP) after Set the serial I/O2 interrupt request to "0"
b7 0 b0 IREQ2: Interrupt request register 2 [Address 3D16] b6: Serial I/O2 interrupt request bit 0: No interrupts request issued : Nothing is allocated
Enable serial I/O2 interrupt
b7 01 b0 ICON2: Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16] b6: Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit 1: Interrupts enabled
Set transmit data to serial I/O2 register SIO2 [Address 1F16] Processing of serial I/O2 interrupt
Fig. 2.6.11 Transmitting method of serial I/O2 2-152
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: When SRDY2 signal output is not used, set the SRDY2 output enable bit (bit 4) to "0" in below. 2: In the duplex data transfer mode, write transmit data in below. 3: To use a serial I/O2 interrupt, set in the following sequence. 4: When no serial I/O2 interrupt is used, omit settings , , , and below. Disable Serial I/O2 interrupt
b7
00
b0
ICON2: Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16] b6: Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit 0: Interrupts disabled
Setting of serial I/O2 control register
Selection of serial I/O2, or others
b7
1
b0
SIO2CON: Serial I/O2 control register [Address 1D16] b2-b0: Internal synchronization clock select bits 000: f(XIN)/8 011: f(XIN)/64 001: f(XIN)/16 110: f(XIN)/128 010: f(XIN)/32 111: f(XIN)/256 b3: Serial I/O2 port selection bit 1: SOUT2, SCLK2 signal output b4: SRDY2 output enable bit 0: I/O port 1: SRDY2 signal output b5: Transfer direction selection bit 0: LSB first 1: MSB first b6: Synchronization clock selection bit 0: External clock 1: Internal clock : Nothing is allocated
One or more instructions (e.g., NOP) after Set the serial I/O2 interrupt request to "0"
b7 b0
0
IREQ2: Interrupt request register 2 [Address 3D16] b6: Serial I/O2 interrupt request bit 0: No interrupts request issued : Nothing is allocated
Enable serial I/O2 interrupt
b7 b0
01
ICON2: Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16] b6: Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit 1: Interrupts enabled
Set dummy data to serial I/O2 register SIO2 [Address 1F16] (When SRDY2 is used, "L" is output from the P53/SRDY2 pin) Processing of serial I/O2 interrupt
Fig. 2.6.12 Receiving method of serial I/O2
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-153
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.6.5 Notes on use (1) Notes on synchronizing clock selection Whether an internal clock or an external clock is selected as a serial I/O2 synchronizing clock source, the serial I/O2 interrupt request bit is set to "1" when 8 shift clocks are input. However, while the shift clocks are input to the serial I/O2 synchronization circuit, the contents of the serial I/O2 register are continuously shifted. For this reason, it is necessary to stop the shift clocks at the time when 8 shift clocks have been input. When an internal clock is selected, the shift clocks are automatically stopped at the time when 8 shift clocks have been input. When an external clock is selected, control shift clocks externally. As an external clock, satisfy the following conditions when the duty cycle is 50%. 1 MHz or less (1000 ns min.) ........................ at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 500 kHz or less (2000 ns min.) ..................... at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V Furthermore, satisfy the following conditions of both "H" and "L" width when changing the duty cycle. 400 ns or more ................................................. at VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 950 ns or more ................................................. at VCC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V (2) Notes on shift clock source switching When the shift clock of the serial I/O2 has been switched, initialize the serial I/O counter 2 (i.e., write to the serial I/O2 register). (3) Serial I/O counter 2 initialization when an external clock is selected When an external clock is selected, initialize the serial I/O counter 2 (i.e., write to the serial I/O2 register) at "H" level of the external clock. (4) For serial I/O2 interrupts To use a serial I/O2 interrupt, set according to the following procedure. Set the serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit (bit 6 at address 003F16) to "0" with the CLB instruction. Set a value in the serial I/O2 control register (address 001D16). After executing one or more instructions (e.g., NOP instruction), set the serial I/O2 interrupt request bit (bit 6 at address 003D16) to "0" with the CLB instruction. Set the serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit to "1" with the SEB instruction. (5) Restart of communication after stopping it during serial transmission or reception To restart communication after stopping it during serial I/O2 transmission or reception, execute from writing into the serial I/O2 control register.
2-154
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
The 3820 group includes the controller/drivers of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). This section describes an explanation of LCD control circuit operations, pins, related registers, usage and application examples. 2.7.1 Explanation of operations (1) LCD drive waveform example Refer to "CHAPTER 1 Hardware, LCD drive control circuit." (2) LCD drive timing The frequency of the internal signal LCDCK and the frame frequency to generate LCD drive timing are as follows.
f (LCDCK) =
Count source frequency for LCDCK Division ratio of LCD circuit divider
Frame frequency =
f (LCDCK) Duty ratio number
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-155
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.7.2 Pins SEG0-SEG15 are used as pins for LCD display. The pins P30/SEG16-P37/SEG23 and P00/SEG24-P07/ SEG31 and P10/SEG32-P17/SEG39 are available as segment output pins (SEG16-SEG39). By switching the corresponding registers, the segment output pin, I/O pin or input pin is selected. Table 2.7.1 shows the pin function by setting segment output enable register and Table 2.7.2 shows the pin functions by setting the corresponding registers when they are not used as segment output pins.
Table 2.7.1 Pin functions by setting segment output enable register Setting Pins Register SEG (Address 003816) b0
(Bit 0 of segment output enable register)
Value 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Pin function Segment output Input port Segment output I/O port Segment output I/O port Segment output I/O port Segment output I/O port Segment output I/O port
P30/SEG16 -P37/SEG23
P00/SEG24, P01/SEG25
SEG (Address 003816) b1
(Bit 1 of segment output enable register)
P02/SEG26- P07/SEG31
SEG (Address 003816) b2
(Bit 2 of segment output enable register)
P10/SEG32, P11/SEG33
SEG (Address 003816) b3
(Bit 3 of segment output enable register)
P12/SEG34
SEG (Address 003816) b4
(Bit 4 of segment output enable register)
P13/SEG35- P17/SEG39
SEG (Address 003816) b5
(Bit 5 of segment output enable register)
Note: When the microcomputer is in the reset state, the I/O or segment output pins are pulled down, so that a "L" level is output from segment-only pins.
2-156
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
Table 2.7.2 Pin functions by setting the corresponding registers when they are not used as segment output pins Setting Ports Register PULLA (Address 001616) b3
(Bit 3 of PULL register A)
Value 1 0 1 0 1 Pull-down pin No pull-down Output port Input port
Pin function
P30-P37
P0D (Address 000116) b0
(Bit 0 of port P0 direction register)
P00-P07 PULLA (Address 001616) b0
(Bit 0 of PULL register A)
Pull-down pin (When being set for the input mode) No pull-down (When being set for the input mode) Output port Input port Pull-down pin (When being set for the input mode) No pull-down (When being set for the input mode)
0 1 0 1 PULLA (Address 001616) b1
(Bit 1 of PULL register A)
P1D (Address 000316) b0
(Bit 0 of port P1 direction register)
P10-P17
0
(1) Segment output pins (SEG0-SEG39) Up to 40 segment outputs can be selected. Table 2.7.3 shows setting of segment output pins for LCD display. Table 2.7.3 Setting of segment output pins for LCD display Pins SEG0-SEG15 P30/SEG16- P37/SEG23 P00/SEG24, P01/SEG25 P02/SEG26- P07/SEG31 P10/SEG32, P11/SEG33 P12/SEG34 P13/SEG35- P17/SEG39 Segment output-only pin Ports P30-P37 are used as segment signal output pins (SEG16-SEG23) by setting bit 0 of the segment output enable register (address 003816) to "1." Ports P00 and P01 are used as segment signal output pins (SEG24, SEG25) by setting bit 1 of the segment output enable register (address 003816) to "1." Ports P02-P07 are used as segment signal output pins (SEG26-SEG31) by setting bit 2 of the segment output enable register (address 003816) to "1." Ports P10 and P11 are used as segment signal output pins (SEG32, SEG33) by setting bit 3 of the segment output enable register (address 003816) to "1." Port P12 is used as segment signal output pins (SEG34) by setting bit 4 of the segment output enable register (address 003816) to "1." Ports P13-P17 are used as segment signal output pins (SEG35-SEG39) by setting bit 5 of the segment output enable register (address 003816) to "1." Setting
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-157
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(2) Ports P0, P1 and P3 When pins P30/SEG16-P37/SEG23, P00/SEG24-P07/SEG31, P10/SEG32-P17/SEG39 are not used as segment outputs, they can be used as input port P3 and as I/O ports P0 and P1. Table 2.7.4 shows the setting of input port P3 and I/O ports P0, P1.
Table 2.7.4 Setting of input port P3 and I/O ports P0, P1 Ports P30-P37 P00, P01 P02-P07 P10, P11 P12 P13-P17 Setting By setting bit 0 of segment output enable register (address 003816) to "0" By setting bit 1 of segment output enable register (address 003816) to "0" By setting bit 2 of segment output enable register (address 003816) to "0" By setting bit 3 of segment output enable register (address 003816) to "0" By setting bit 4 of segment output enable register (address 003816) to "0" By setting bit 5 of segment output enable register (address 003816) to "0"
(3) P3, P1 and P0 pull-down pins When pins P30/SEG16-P37/SEG23, P00/SEG24-P07/SEG31, P10/SEG32-P17/SEG39 are not used as ports, it is possible to exert pull-down control. Table 2.7.5 shows the setting of pull-down pins. Table 2.7.5 Setting of pull-down pins Pins P30/SEG16- P37/SEG23 P00/SEG24- P07/SEG31 P10/SEG32- P17/SEG39 Setting By setting bit 0 of the segment output enable register (address 003816) to "0," then setting bit 3 of PULL register A (address 001616) to "1." By setting bits 1 and 2 of the segment output enable register (address 003816) to "0," next setting bit 0 of the port P0 direction register (address 000116) to "0," then setting bit 0 of PULL register A (address 001616) to "1." By setting bits 3 to 5 of the segment output enable register (address 003816) to "0," next setting bit 1 of the port P1 direction register (address 000316) to "0," then setting bit 1 of PULL register A (address 001616) to "1."
2-158
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.7.3 Related registers Figure 2.7.1 shows the memory allocation of LCD display-related registers.
Address 000116 Port P0 direction register (P0D)
000316
Port P1 direction register (P1D)
001616
PULL register A (PULLA)
003816 003916
Segment output enable register (SEG) LCD mode register (LM)
Fig. 2.7.1 Memory allocation of LCD display-related registers
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-159
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(1) Segment output enable register (address 003816) The pins P30/SEG16-P37/SEG23, P00/SEG24-P07/SEG31, P10/SEG32-P17/SEG39 can be used as segment output pins by setting bits 0 to 5 of the segment output enable register (address 003816). The pins corresponding to the bits which are set to "1" among bits 0 to 5 of the segment output enable register (address 003816) are used as segment output pins. The pins corresponding to the bits which are set to "0" are used as I/O ports or input ports. Figure 2.7.2 shows the structure of the segment output enable register.
Segment output enable register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 00 Segment output enable register (SEG) [Address 3816] Name Segment output 0 enable bit 0 1 Segment output enable bit 1 2 Segment output enable bit 2 3 Segment output enable bit 3 4 Segment output enable bit 4 5 Segment output enable bit 5 B Functions At reset R W 0: Input ports P30-P37 0 1: Segment output SEG16-SEG23 0: I/O ports P00, P01 0 1: Segment output SEG24, SEG25 0: I/O ports P02-P07 0 1: Segment output SEG26-SEG31 0: I/O ports P10, P11 1: Segment output SEG32, SEG33 0: I/O port P12 1: Segment output SEG34 0: I/O ports P13-P17 1: Segment output SEG35-SEG39 0 0 0 0 00
6,7 Fix these bits to "0."
Fig. 2.7.2 Structure of segment output enable register
2-160
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(2) LCD mode register (LM) The LCD mode register (address 003916) controls various functions of the LCD controller/driver. Figure 2.7.3 shows the structure of the LCD mode register. qBits 0, 1 : Duty ratio selection bits Select a duty ratio number fit for the LCD panel used. qBit 2 : Bias control bit Select a bias value fit for the LCD panel used. qBit 3 : LCD enable bit Turns on and off the LCD. When this bit is set to "1," the bits which are set to "1" in the LCD display RAM are displayed on the LCD. When this bit is set to "0," the whole LCD display is turned off. qBit 4 : Unused Always set this bit to "0." qBits 5, 6 : LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits These bits are used to select a division ratio for generating the frequency of the LCDCK, which is the clock for the LCD timing controller. Select a division ratio so as to generate LCDCK fit for the LCD panel used. qBit 7 : LCDCK count source selection bit This bit is used to select a count source of the above LCDCK. At transition from the high-speed, middle-speed or low-speed mode to the low-power operation, or others, change the count source as required.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-161
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
LCD mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 LCD mode register (LM) [Address 3916] B 0 1 Name Duty ratio selection bits
b1b0
Functions 00: Not available 01: 2 (use COM0, COM1) 10: 3 (use COM0-COM2) 11: 4 (use COM0-COM3) 0: 1/3 bias 1: 1/2 bias 0: LCD OFF 1: LCD ON
At reset R W 0 0
2 Bias control bit 3 LCD enable bit 4 Fix this bit to "0." 5 LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits (Note 1) 6 7 LCDCK count source selection bit (Note 2)
0 0 0 00
b6b5
00: LCDCK count source 01: 2 division of LCDCK count source 10: 4 division of LCDCK count source 11: 8 division of LCDCK count source 0: f(XCIN)/32 1: f(XIN)/8192
0
0
Notes 1: Reference values at f(XIN) = 8 MHz 00: 977 Hz 01: 488 Hz 10: 244 Hz 11: 122 Hz 2: LCDCK is a clock for a LCD timing controller.
Fig. 2.7.3 Structure of LCD mode register
2-162
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(3) Port P0 direction register (P0D) When it is specified that pins P00/SEG24-P07/SEG31 are used as I/O ports by bits 1 and 2 of the segment output enable register (address 003816), the setting of the port P0 direction register (address 000116) is valid. When bit 0 of the port P0 direction register is set to "1," port P0 is an output port. When this bit is set to "0," the port is an input port, so that the setting of bit 0 of the PULL register A (address 001616) becomes valid. At reset, bit 0 of the port P0 direction register is set to "0." Figure 2.7.4 shows the structure of the port P0 direction register.
Port P0 direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Port P0 direction register (P0D) [Address 0116] B 0 Name Port P0 direction register Functions At reset R W x 0: All bits are input mode 0 1: All bits are output mode xx 0 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be
1 to written to and be read out. 7
Fig. 2.7.4 Structure of port P0 direction register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-163
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(4) Port P1 direction register (P1D) When it is specified that pins P10/SEG32-P17/SEG39 are used as I/O ports by bits 3 to 5 of the segment output enable register (address 003816), the setting of the port P1 direction register (address 000316) is valid. When bit 0 of the port P1 direction register (address 000316) is set to "1," port P1 is an output port. When this bit is set to "0," the port is an input port, so that the setting of bit 1 of the PULL register A (address 001616) becomes valid. At reset, bit 0 of the port P1 direction register is set to "0." Figure 2.7.5 shows the structure of the port P1 direction register.
Port P1 direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Port P1 direction register (P1D) [Address 0316] B 0 Name Port P1 direction register Functions At reset R W x 0: All bits are input mode 0 1: All bits are output mode xx 0 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be
1 to written to and be read out. 7
Fig. 2.7.5 Structure of port P1 direction register
2-164
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(5) PULL register A (PULLA) When ports P0, P1 and P3 are set for the input mode, the setting of bits 0, 1 and 3 of the PULL register A (address 001616) is valid. The pull-down function of ports P0, P1 and P3 is made effective by setting bits 0, 1 and 3 of the PULL register A to "1." When ports P0 and P1 are set for output mode by bit 0 of the port P0/P1 direction registers, the setting of the PULL register A is invalid. Figure 2.7.6 shows the structure of the PULL register A.
PULL register A
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PULL register A (PULLA) [Address 1616] Name Function B 0 Ports P00-P07 pull-down bit 0 : No pull-down 1 : Pull-down 1 Ports P10-P17 pull-down bit 0 : No pull-down 1 : Pull-down 0 : No pull-up 2 Ports P20-P27 pull-up bit 1 : Pull-up 3 Ports P30-P37 pull-down bit 0 : No pull-down 1 : Pull-down 0 : No pull-up 4 Ports P70, P71 pull-up bit 1 : Pull-up 5 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be to written to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 7 At reset R W 1 1 0 1 0 0 0x
Note: For ports set for the output mode, pull-up or pull-down is impossible.
Fig. 2.7.6 Structure of PULL register A
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-165
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.7.4 Register setting example Figure 2.7.7 and Figure 2.7.8 show an example of setting registers for LCD display.
[Note on use]
Note : For pulling down ports P0, P1 and P3, refer to "2.7.2 Pins, (3) Ports P3, P1 and P0 pull-down pins"
Setting of segment output enable register
Select segment pins or others
b7 00 b0
SEG: Segment output enable register [Address 3816] b0: Segment output enable bit 0 0: Input ports P30-P37 1: Segment output SEG16-SEG23 b1: Segment output enable bit 1 0: Input ports P00, P01 1: Segment output SEG24, SEG25 b2: Segment output enable bit 2 0: Input ports P02-P07 1: Segment output SEG26-SEG31 b3: Segment output enable bit 3 0: Input ports P10, P11 1: Segment output SEG32, SEG33 b4: Segment output enable bit 4 0: Input port P12 1: Segment output SEG34 b5: Segment output enable bit 5 0: Input ports P13-P17 1: Segment output SEG35-SEG39 b7, b6: Fix these bits to "0"
Continued to Figure 2.7.8
Fig. 2.7.7 Example of setting registers for LCD display (1)
2-166
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
Continued from Figure 2.7.7
Setting of LCD mode register
Select count source, bias, or others
b7 0 b0
LM: LCD mode register [Address 3916] b1, b0: Duty ratio selection bits
b1b0
00: Not used 01: 2 (use COM0, COM1) 10: 3 (use COM0-COM2) 11: 4 (use COM0-COM3) b2: Bias control bit 0: 1/3 bias 1: 1/2 bias b3: LCD enable bit 0: LCD OFF 1: LCD ON b4: Fix this bit to "0" b6, b5: LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits
b6b5
00: LCDCK count source 01: 2 division of LCDCK count source 10: 4 division of LCDCK count source 11: 8 division of LCDCK count source b7: LCDCK count source selection bit 0: f(XCIN)/32 1: f(XIN)/8192
Setting display data into the RAM (Address 4016 to 5316) for LCD display
By writing "1" to bits in the RAM for LCD display, the corresponding segments of the LCD panel becomes ready for lighting
Fig. 2.7.8 Example of setting registers for LCD display (2)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-167
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.7.5 Application examples (1) LCD panel display pattern example Figure 2.7.9 shows an 8-segment LCD panel display pattern example when the duty ratio number is 4.
A B G E D C H
F
SEGb
D E G F
SEGa
COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0
H C B A
Display RAM map high-order Display RAM map low-order
SEG6 SEG7 SEG8 SEG9 SEG10 SEG11 SEG12 SEG13 SEG14 SEG15 SEG16 SEG17 SEG18 SEG19 SEG20 SEG21 SEG22 SEG23 SEG24 SEG25 SEG26 SEG27 SEG28 SEG29 SEG30 SEG31 SEG32 SEG33 SEG34 SEG35 SEG36 SEG37 SEG38 SEG39
COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
5316 5216 5116 5016 4F16 4E16 4D16 4C16 4B16 4A16 4916 4816 4716 4616 4516 4416 4316 4216 4116 4016 (Address)
Fig. 2.7.9 8-segment LCD panel display pattern example when duty ratio number is 4
SEG0 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 b0
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
LCD display RAM b7
2-168
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(2) LCD panel example Figure 2.7.10 to Figure 2.7.12 show an LCD panel example and a segment allocation example for it, and an LCD display RAM setting example.
'
AUTO SLOW PRINT
Fig. 2.7.10 LCD panel example
1
2
3
4
5
6
'
AUTO SLOW PRINT 7
Fig. 2.7.11 Segment allocation example
a Bit Address 004016 004116 004216 004316 004416 004516 004616 7 6 g g g g g g SLOW AUTO 5 f f f f f f 4 e e e e e e 3 d d d d d d 2 c c c c c c 1 b b b b b b PRINT 0 a a a a a a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 f e d g b c
'
Fig. 2.7.12 LCD display RAM setting example
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-169
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(3) Control procedure Figure 2.7.13 shows the setting of related registers to turn on all the LCD display in Figure 2.7.10, and Figure 2.7.14 shows the control procedure. Specifications: *Frame frequency = 122 Hz *Duty ratio number = 4, Bias value = 1/3 *Segment output; SEG0 to SEG13 are used. *Ports P0 and P1 are set as I/O ports, port P3 is set as input port.
b7 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEG: Segment output enable register [Address 3816] b0: Segment output enable bit 0 0: Input ports P30-P37 b1: Segment output enable bit 1 0: I/O ports P00, P01 b2: Segment output enable bit 2 0: I/O ports P02-P07 b3: Segment output enable bit 3 0: I/O ports P10, P11 b4: Segment output enable bit 4 0: I/O port P12 b5: Segment output enable bit 5 0: I/O ports P13-P17 b7, b6: Fix these bits to "0" b7 b0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 LM: LCD mode register [Address 3916] b1, b0: Duty ratio selection bits
b1b0
11: 4 (use COM0-COM3) b2: Bias control bit 0: 1/3 bias b3: LCD enable bit 0: LCD OFF (after setting data into the RAM for LCD display, turn on) b4: Fix this bit to "0" b6, b5: LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits
b6b5
01: 2 division of LCDCK count source V b7: LCDCK count source selection bit 1: f(XIN)/8192 V
V: *f(LCDCK) = Count source frequency for LCDCK/LCD circuit division ratio *Frame frequency = f(LCDCK)/duty ratio number From the above, the frame frequency at f(XIN) = 8 MHz is as follows: Frame frequency f = 8 ! 10 8192
6
1 !2
1 ! 4 122.070 Hz
Fig. 2.7.13 Setting of related registers 2-170
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
RESET Initialization CLT CLD SEI SEG (Address 3816) LM (Address 3916) P0D (Address 0116) P1D (Address 0316) PULLA (Address 1616) 000000012 101000112 XXXXXXXX2 XXXXXXXX2 XXXXXXXX2 All interrupts; Disabled Set ports/segments Set LCD mode register Set port P0 I/O direction Set port P1 I/O direction Set pull-up, pull-down VSet in the order of ports P0/P1 direction registers and PULL register A Set values in LCDRAMX (Set it to "1" to turn on or to "0" to turn it off)
LCDRAM0 (Address 4016) 111111112 LCDRAM1 (Address 4116) 111111112 LCDRAM2 (Address 4216) 111111112 LCDRAM3 (Address 4316) 111111112 LCDRAM4 (Address 4416) 011111112 LCDRAM5 (Address 4516) 011111112 LCDRAM6 (Address 4616) 111111112 LM (Address 3916), bit 3 1 CLI
Turn on LCD Interrupts; Enabled
When switching LCD ON (OFF) segments LCDRAMX (Address XX16) XXXXXXXX2 Rewrite bits corresponding to LCD ON (OFF) segments
Fig. 2.7.14 Control procedure
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-171
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.7.6 Notes on use (1) For transition from the high-speed or the middle-speed mode to the low-power operation of the lowspeed mode: Select oscillation at 32 kHz (CM4 = 1) Count source for LCDCK; select f(XCIN)/32 (LM7 = 0) Internal system clock; select XCIN-XCOUT (CM7 = 1) Stop main clock XIN-XOUT (CM5 = 1) In the above order, execute transition. Execute the setting after the oscillation at 32 kHz (setting ) becomes completely stable. (2) If the STP instruction is executed while the LCD is turned on by setting bit 3 of the LCD mode register to "1," a DC voltage is applied to the LCD. For this reason, do not execute the STP instruction while the LCD is lighting. (3) When the LCD is not used, open the segment and the common pins. Connect VL1-VL3 to VSS.
2-172
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.8 Watchdog timer
2.8 Watchdog timer
2.8.1 Explanation of operations The watchdog timer is a down-count timer consisting of 14 bits (6 high-order bits and 8 low-order bits). Each time a count source is input, a count value is decremented by 1. The watchdog timer is also available as a 6-bit timer. (1) Basic operations By executing a write instruction to the watchdog timer control register (address 003716), "3F16" and "FF16" are automatically set in the watchdog timer H and watchdog timer L respectively, with the result that a count operation starts. A count source can be selected by the watchdog timer H count source selection bit (bit 7 at address 003716) (Refer to "(2) and (3)" on the next page). When a specified count value is counted and the watchdog timer H underflows, an internal reset signal is generated, so that a microcomputer is put into the reset status. Table 2.8.1 shows the program runaway detection time V1 (maximum) and Figure 2.8.1 shows an internal reset signal output timing diagram. The program starts from the contents of the vector address at reset. V1: The time from start of count operation until output of internal reset signal. Table 2.8.1 Program runaway detection time (maximum) Detection time (maximum) f(XIN) = 8 MHz f(XCIN) = 32 kHz 32.768 ms 8.19 s
When the watchdog timer H count source selection bit is "0."
XIN input signal
XCIN input signal
Approximately 1 ms at f(XIN) = 8 MHz
Internal reset signal
Detection of program runaway (Underflow of watchdog timer H)
Fig. 2.8.1 Internal reset signal output timing When using the watchdog timer, set by software so that data is written into the watchdog timer control register before the watchdog timer H underflows (within the program runaway detection time shown in Table 2.8.1). If a write instruction has not been executed to the watchdog timer control register because of a program runaway, internal reset occurs, so that the program restores to a normal routine.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-173
APPLICATION
2.8 Watchdog timer
(2) Operations when the 14-bit timer is used (bit 7 of watchdog timer control register = "0") By executing a write instruction to the watchdog timer control register, a count operation is started. The underflow of the watchdog timer L becomes a count source of the watchdog timer H. When the watchdog timer H underflows, a microcomputer is put into reset status. The program starts from the contents of the vector address at reset. (3) Operations when the 6-bit timer is used (bit 7 of watchdog timer control register = "1") By executing a write instruction to the watchdog timer control register, a count operation is started. f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16 becomes a count source of the watchdog timer H. When watchdog timer H underflows, a microcomputer is put into the reset status. The program starts from the contents of the vector address at reset. (4) Operations in the stop mode or the wait mode sWhen the stop mode is provided by executing the STP instruction, the watchdog timer stops its count operation. When the stop mode is released by an interrupt request, the oscillation of a count source is restarted and the watchdog timer restarts its count operation at the same time. Because the count operation is continued even in the wait time for stop release (about 8000 cycles of f(XIN) or f(XCIN)), be careful not to cause watchdog timer H to underflow. sWhen the wait mode is provided by executing the WIT instruction, the CPU operation stops but the watchdog timer continues to count down.
2-174
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.8 Watchdog timer
2.8.2 Related register The related register is only the watchdog timer control register (address 003716). The operation of the watchdog timer is started by executing a write instruction to the watchdog timer control register after reset. The watchdog timer being operated is made ineffective by reset. When the watchdog timer is not used, do not execute a write instruction to the watchdog timer control register after reset. Figure 2.8.2 shows the structure of the watchdog timer control register.
Watchdog timer control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON) [Address 3716] B Name 0 Watchdog timer H to bits 5 6 Functions At reading, the count value of watchdog timer H is read. At reset R W x 1 (Note) 1 1x
Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and is fixed to "1" at reading. 0: Underflow from watchdog timer L (WDT is used as 14-bit timer) 1: f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16 (WDT is used as 6-bit timer)
7 Watchdog timer H count source selection bit
0
Note: When a value is written to address 3716, the following values are set, so that the watchdog timer starts a count operation. Watchdog timer H = "3F16" Watchdog timer L = "FF16"
Fig. 2.8.2 Structure of watchdog timer control register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-175
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
2.9 Standby function
The 3820 group is provided with a standby function to stop the CPU by software and put the CPU into the low-power operation. The following two types of standby function are available. *Stop mode by the STP instruction *Wait mode by the WIT instruction 2.9.1 Stop mode The stop mode is set by executing the STP instruction. In the stop mode, the oscillation of both XIN and XCIN stops and the internal clock stops at the "H" level. The CPU stops and peripheral units stop operating. As a result, power dissipation is reduced. (1) State in the stop mode The stop mode is set by executing the STP instruction.V1 In the stop mode, the oscillation of both XIN and XCIN stops, so that all the functions stop, providing a low-power operation. Table 2.9.1 shows the state in the stop mode. V1: After setting the LCD enable bit (bit 3) of the LCD mode register to "0," execute the STP instruction. Table 2.9.1 State in stop mode Item Oscillation CPU Internal clock I/O ports P0-P7 State in stop mode Stop Stop Stop at "H" level The state where STP instruction is executed is held
Timer, serial I/O, Stop LCD display functions, watchdog timer
2-176
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
(2) Release of stop mode The stop mode is released by reset input or by the occurrence of an interrupt request. There is a difference in restore processing from the stop mode by reset input and by an interrupt request. sRestoration by reset input By holding the "L" input level of the RESET pin in the stop mode for 2 s or more, the reset state is set, so that the stop mode is released. At the time when the stop mode is released, oscillation is started. At this time, the inside of the microcomputer is in the reset state. After the input level of the RESET pin is returned to the "H," the reset state is released in approximately 8,000 cycles of the XIN input. The oscillation is unstable at start of oscillation. For this reason, time for stabilizing of oscillation (oscillation stabilizing time) is required. The time to hold the internal reset state is reserved as the oscillation stabilizing time. Figure 2.9.1 shows the oscillation stabilizing time at restoration by reset input. At release of the stop mode, the contents of the internal RAM previous to the reset are held. However, the contents of the CPU register and SFR are not held. For resetting, refer to "2.10 Reset."
Time to hold internal reset state = approximately 8000 cycles of XIN input Stop mode VCC RESET XIN (Note) Execute STP instruction Restored by reset input Note: No waveform may be input to XIN (in low-speed mode) Oscillation stabilizing time
2 s or more
Fig. 2.9.1 Oscillation stabilizing time at restoration by reset input
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-177
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
sRestoration by an interrupt request The occurrence of an interrupt request in the stop mode releases the stop mode. As a result, oscillation is resumed. The interrupt requests available for restoration are: *INT0-INT3 *Serial I/O1 transmit/receive and serial I/O2 using an external clock *Timer X/Y using an external clock *Key input (key-on wake up) However, to use the above interrupt requests for restoration from the stop mode, after setting the following, execute the STP instruction in order to enable the interrupt request to be used. [Necessary register setting] Interrupt disable flag I = "0" (interrupts enabled) Both timers 1 and 2 interrupt enable bits = "0" (interrupts disabled) Interrupt request bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = "0" (no interrupt request issued) Interrupt enable bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = "1" (interrupts enabled) For interrupts, refer to "2.2 Interrupts." The oscillation is unstable at start of oscillation. For this reason, time for stabilizing of oscillation (oscillation stabilizing time) is required. At restoration by an interrupt request, the time to wait for supplying the internal clock to the CPU is automatically generatedV1 by timers 1V2 and 2.V2 This wait time is reserved as the oscillation stabilizing time on the system clock side. Figure 2.9.2 shows an execution sequence example at restoration by the occurrence of an INT0 interrupt request.
V1: At restoration from the stop mode, all bits except bit 4 of the timer 123 mode register (address 002916) are set to "0." As a count source of the timer 1, an f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16 clock is selected. As a count source of the timer 2, the timer 1 underflow is selected. Immediately after the oscillation is started, the count source is supplied to the timer 1 counter, so that a count operation is started. The supplying the internal clock to the CPU is started at the timer 2 underflow. V2: When the STP instruction is executed, "FF16" and "0116" are automatically set in the timer 1 counter/latch and timer 2 counter/latch respectively.
2-178
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
qWhen restoring from stop mode by using INT0 interrupt (rising edge selected)
Stop mode Oscillation stabilizing time (approximately 8000 cycles) XIN or XCIN (System clock) INT0 pin
"FF16" XIN; "H" XCIN; in high-impedance state
512 counts
Timer 1 counter Timer 2 counter INT0 interrupt request bit Peripheral device CPU
Operating Operating
"0116"
Stopping Stopping
Operating Operating
*Execute STP instruction
*512 counts down by timer 1 *INT0 interrupt *Start supplying internal clock signal input (INT0 interrupt to CPU request occurs) *Accept INT0 interrupt request *Oscillation start *Timer 1 count start
Note: As a count source, f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16 is input. Either f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16 is selected by bit 7 of CPU mode register.
Fig. 2.9.2 Execution sequence example at restoration by occurrence of INT0 interrupt request
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-179
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
(3) Notes on using the stop mode sRelease sources The release sources of the stop mode are shown below. *Reset input *INT0-INT3 interrupts *Serial I/O1 transmit/receive and serial I/O2 interrupts using an external clock *Timers X/Y interrupts using an external clock *Key input interrupt (key-on wake up) Each INT pin (INT0, INT1, INT2, INT3) is also used as ports P42, P43, P57 or P60 and each key input pin is also used as port P2. To use INT0 to INT3 interrupts, after setting the corresponding bits of the following direction registers to "0" to set them for the input mode, execute the STP instruction. *Port P2 direction register (address 000516) *Port P4 direction register (address 000916) *Port P5 direction register (address 000B16) *Port P6 direction register (address 000D16) sRegister setting To use the above interrupt requests for restoration from the stop mode, after setting the following, execute the STP instruction in order to enable the interrupt request to be used. [Necessary register setting] Interrupt disable flag I = "0" (interrupts enabled) Both timers 1 and 2 interrupt enable bits = "0" (interrupts disabled) Interrupt request bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = "0" (no interrupt request issued) Interrupt enable bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = "1" (interrupts enabled) *At restoration from the stop mode, the values of the timers 1, 2 and 123 mode registers are automatically rewritten. Accordingly, set each of them again. *To prevent a DC voltage from being applied to the LCD, after setting the LCD enable bit (bit 3) of the LCD mode register to "0," execute the STP instruction. *Write to the watchdog timer control register (address 003716) before the STP instruction execution. If the STP instruction is executed without writing, an internal reset may occures. sClock after restoration After restoration from the stop mode by an interrupt request, the contents of the CPU mode register previous to the STP instruction execution are held. Accordingly, when both XIN and XCIN were oscillating before execution of the STP instruction, the oscillation of both XIN and XCIN is resumed at restoration from the stop mode by an interrupt request. In the above case, when the XIN side is set as a system clock, the oscillation stabilizing time for approximately 8,000 cycles of the XIN input is reserved at restoration from the stop mode. At this time, note that the oscillation on the XCIN side may not be stabilized even after the lapse of the oscillation stabilizing time (of the XIN side).
2-180
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
2.9.2 Wait mode The wait mode is set by execution of the WIT instruction. In the wait mode, the oscillation is continued, but the internal clock stops at the "H" level. Since the oscillation is continued regardless of the CPU stop, the peripheral units operate.
(1) States in the wait mode By executing the WIT instruction, the wait mode is set. In the wait mode, the internal clock which is supplied to the CPU stops at the "H" level. The continuation of oscillation permits clock supply to the peripheral units. Table 2.9.2 shows the state in the wait mode.
Table 2.9.2 State in wait mode Item Oscillation CPU Internal clock I/O ports P0-P7 State in wait mode Operating Stop Stop at "H" level The state where WIT instruction is executed is held.
Operating Timer, serial I/O, LCD display functions, watchdog timer
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-181
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
(2) Release of wait mode The wait mode is released by reset input or by the occurrence of an interrupt request. There is a difference in restore processing from the wait mode by use of reset input and by use of an interrupt request. In the wait mode, oscillation is continued, so an instruction can be executed immediately after the wait mode is released. sRestoration by reset input The reset state is provided by holding the input level of the RESET pin at "L" for 2 s or more in the wait mode. As a result, the wait mode is released. At the time when the wait mode is released, the supplying the internal clock to the CPU is started. The reset state is released in approximately 8,000 cycles of the XIN input after the input of the RESET pin is returned to the "H" level. At release of the wait mode, the contents of the internal RAM previous to the reset are held. However, the contents of the CPU mode register and SFR are not held. Figure 2.9.3 shows the reset input time. For reset, refer to "2.10 Reset."
Time to hole internal reset state = approximately 8000 cycles of XIN input Wait mode VCC RESET XIN (Note) Execute WIT instruction Restored by reset input Oscillation stabilizing time 2 s or more
Note: No waveform may be input to XIN (in low-speed mode)
Fig. 2.9.3 Reset input time
2-182
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
sRestoration by an interrupt request In the wait mode, the occurrence of an interrupt request releases the wait mode and the supplying the internal clock to the CPU is started. At the same time, the interrupt request used for restoration is accepted, so the interrupt processing routine is executed. However, to use an interrupt for restoration from the wait mode, after setting the following, execute the WIT instruction in order to enable the interrupt to be used. [Necessary Interrupt Interrupt issued) Interrupt register setting] disable flag I = "0" (interrupts enabled) request bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = "0" (no interrupt request enable bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = "1" (interrupts enabled)
For interrupts, refer to "2.2 Interrupts." (3) Notes on the wait mode sRestoration by INT0 to INT3 interrupt requests Each INT pin (INT0, INT1, INT2, INT3) is also used as ports P42, P43, P57 or P60 and each key input pin is also used as port P2. To use INT0 to INT3 interrupts, set the corresponding bits of the following direction registers to "0" for setting the input mode. And then, execute the WIT instruction. *Port P2 direction register (address 000516) *Port P4 direction register (address 000916) *Port P5 direction register (address 000B16) *Port P6 direction register (address 000D16) sRestoration by key input interrupt request The pins for a key input interrupt is also used as port P2. To use a key input interrupt, set the corresponding bits of the port P2 direction register (address 000516) to "0" for setting the input mode. And then, execute the WIT instruction. sRegister setting To use the above interrupt requests for restoration from the stop mode, after setting the following, execute the WIT instruction in order to enable the interrupt request to be used. [Necessary Interrupt Interrupt issued) Interrupt register setting] disable flag I = "0" (interrupts enabled) request bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = "0" (no interrupts request enable bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = "1" (interrupts enabled)
sOperation of the watchdog timer The watchdog timer continues to count down in the wait mode. The CPU stops in the wait mode, however, the watchdog timer cannot be written by software. As a result, an internal reset occurs at an underflow of the watchdog timer, the wait mode is released automatically.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-183
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
2.9.3 State transitions of internal clock Figure 2.9.4 shows the state transitions of the internal clock when the standby function is used.
RESET
Middle-speed mode (f () = 1 MHz) CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected) CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed) CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating) CM4 = 0 (32 kHz stopped)
CM6 "1""0"
High-speed mode (f () = 4 MHz) CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected) CM6 = 0 (High-speed) CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating) CM4 = 0 (32 kHz stopped)
CM4 "1""0"
"1 CM " 4 "1 CM "0 " 6 " "0 "
Middle-speed mode (f () = 1 MHz) CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected) CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed) CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating) CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM6 "1""0"
High-speed mode (f () = 4 MHz) CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected) CM6 = 0 (High-speed) CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating) CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM7 "1""0"
CM7 "1""0"
CM4 "1""0"
4 M 1" C" " 6 " "0 CM "0 " "1
b7
b4 CPU mode register (CPUM) [Address 3B16] CM4: Port Xc switch bit 0: I/O port 1: XCIN, XCOUT CM5: Main clock (XIN-XOUT) stop bit 0: Oscillating 1: Stopped CM6: Main clock division ratio selection bit 0: f(XIN)/2 (high-speed mode) 1: f(XIN)/8 (middle-speed mode) CM7: Internal system clock selection bit 0: XIN-XOUT selected (middle-/high-speed mode) 1: XCIN-XCOUT selected (low-speed mode)
Low-speed mode (f () = 16 kHz) CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected) CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed) CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating) CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM6 "1""0"
Low-speed mode (f () = 16 kHz) CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected) CM6 = 0 (High-speed) CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating) CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
M 1" C" " 6 " "0 CM "0 " "1
"1 CM " C "0 5 "1 M " 6 " "0 "
CM5 "1""0"
Low-speed mode (f () = 16 kHz) CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected) CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed) CM5 = 1 (8 MHz stopped) CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM6 "1""0"
Low-speed mode (f () = 16 kHz) CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected) CM6 = 0 (High-speed) CM5 = 1 (8 MHz stopped) CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
Notes 1: Switch the mode by the allows shown between the mode blocks.( Do not switch between the mode directly without an allow.) 2: The all modes can be switched to the stop mode or the wait mode and returned to the source mode when the stop mode or the wait mode is released. 3: Timer and LCD operate in the wait mode. 4: In middle-/high-speed mode, when the stop mode is released, a delay of approximately 1 ms occurs automatically by timer 1 and timer 2. 5: In low-speed mode, when the stop mode is released, a delay of approximately 0.25 s occurs automatically by timer 1 and timer 2. 6: Wait until oscillation stabilizes after oscillating the main clock XIN before the switching from the low-speed mode to the middle-/high-speed mode. 7: The example assumes that 8 MHz is being applied to the XIN pin and 32 kHz to the XCIN pin. indicates the internal clock.
Fig. 2.9.4 State transitions of internal clock 2-184
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
CM5 "1""0"
5
APPLICATION
2.10 Reset
2.10 Reset
The internal reset state is provided by applying a "L" level to the RESET pin. After that, the reset state is released by applying a "H" level to the RESET pin, so that the program is executed in the middle-speed mode starting from the contents at the reset vector address. 2.10.1 Explanation of operations Figure 2.10.1 shows the internal reset state hold/release timing.
Internal processing sequence Internal clock 2 s or more RESET Hold reset state
Middle-speed = approximately 8000 cycles of XIN input
Fig. 2.10.1 Internal reset state hold/release timing
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-185
APPLICATION
2.10 Reset
The reset state is provided by applying a "L" level to the RESET pin at power source voltage of 2.5 V to 5.5 V. Allow 2 s or more as "L" level applying time. By applying a "H" level to the RESET pin in the internal reset state, the timers and their count source shown in Table 2.10.1 is automatically set. After that, the internal reset state is released by the timer 2 underflow. After applying "H" level, only the main clock oscillates in the middle-speed mode regardless of the oscillation state previous to internal resetting. The XCIN pin on the sub-clock side becomes the input port. After the internal reset state is released, the program is run from the address determined with the contents (high-order address) at address FFFD16 and the contents (low-order address) at address FFFC16. Figure 2.10.2 shows the internal processing sequence immediately after reset release. Table 2.10.1 Timers 1 and 2 at reset Item Timer 1 Timer 2 FF16 Value 0116 Count source f (XIN)/16 Timer 1 underflow
VCC f(XIN) 1 s at f(XIN) = 8 MHz Internal clock 2 s or more RESET Approximately 8000 cycles of XIN input Internal reset Address bus Data bus SYNC Internal clock : CPU reference clock frequency = f(XIN)/8 (middle-speed mode immediately after reset) AH, AL : Interrupt jump destination addresses SYNC : CPU operation code fetch cycle (This is a internal signal, so that it cannot be observed from the external unit) : Undefined
FFFC16 FFFD16
AL,AH
AL
AH
Fig. 2.10.2 Internal processing sequence immediately after reset release 2-186
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.10 Reset
2.10.2 Internal state of the microcomputer immediately after reset release Figure 2.9.3 shows the internal state of the microcomputer immediately after reset release. The contents of all other registers except registers in Figure 2.10.3 and internal RAM are undefined at poweron reset.
Port P0 direction register Port P1 direction register Port P2 direction register Port P4 direction register Port P5 direction register Port P6 direction register Port P7 direction register PULL register A PULL register B Serial I/O1 status register Serial I/O1 control register UART control register Serial I/O2 control register Timer X (low-order) Timer X (high-order) Timer Y (low-order) Timer Y (high-order) Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 Timer X mode register Timer Y mode register Timer 123 mode register output control register Watchdog timer control register Segment output enable register LCD mode register Interrupt edge selection register CPU mode register Interrupt request register 1 Interrupt request register 2 Interrupt control register 1 Interrupt control register 2 Processor status register Program counter
Address b7 Contents of register b1 0016 000116 0016 000316 0016 000516 0016 000916 000B16 0016 000D16 0016 000F16 0016 00 1 01 1 001616 0 0 001716 0016 001916 1 00 0 0 00 0 001A16 0016 001B16 1 11 0 0 00 0 001D16 0016 002016 FF16 002116 FF16 002216 FF16 002316 FF16 002416 FF16 002516 0116 002616 FF16 002716 0016 002816 0016 002916 0016 002A16 0016 003716 0 11 1 1 11 1 003816 0016 003916 0016 003A16 0016 003B16 0 10 0 1 00 0 003C16 0016 003D16 0016 003E16 0016 003F16 0016 (PS) X X X X X 1 X X (PCH) Contents of address FFFD16 (PCL) Contents of address FFFC16
Notes X : Undefined The contents of all other registers and internal RAM are undefined at poweron reset, so they must be initialized by software.
Fig. 2.10.3 Internal state of microcomputer immediately after reset release
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-187
APPLICATION
2.10 Reset
2.10.3 Reset circuit Design a configuration of the reset circuit so that the reset input voltage may be 0.5 V or less at the time when the power sorce voltage passes 2.5 V. Figure 2.10.4 shows the poweron reset conditions and Figure 2.10.5 shows poweron reset circuit examples.
Power on VCC 2.5 V
0V
RESET 0V
0.5 V
Fig. 2.10.4 Poweron reset conditions
3820 group
RESET 27 VCC 73
3820 group
RESET 27 VCC 73
Power source voltage detection circuit
Fig. 2.10.5 Poweron reset circuit examples
2-188
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.10 Reset
2.10.4 Notes on the RESET pin In case where the reset signal rise time is long, connect a ceramic capacitor or others across the RESET pin and the VSS pin. And use a 1000 pF or more capacitor for high frequency use. When connecting the capacitor, note the following: qMake the length of the wiring which is connected to a capacitor as short as possible. qBe sure to check the operation of application products on the user side. REASON If the several nanosecond or several ten nanosecond impulse noise enters the RESET pin, it may cause a microcomputer failure.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-189
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
2.11 Oscillation circuit
2.11.1 Oscillation circuit Two oscillation circuits are included to obtain clocks required for operations. * XIN-XOUT oscillation circuit............Main clock (XIN input) oscillation circuit * XCIN-XCOUT oscillation circuit........Sub-clock (XCIN input) oscillation circuit A clockV1 obtained by dividing the frequency input to the clock input pins XIN or XCIN is an internal clock . The internal clock is used as a standard for operations. V1: The internal clock varies with modes. *High-speed mode ........Frequency input to the XIN pin/2 *Middle-speed mode .....Frequency input to the XIN pin/8 *Low-speed mode .........Frequency input to the XCIN pin/2 (1) Oscillation circuit using ceramic resonators Figure 2.11.1 shows an oscillation circuit example using ceramic resonators. As shown in the figure, an oscillation circuit can be formed by connecting a ceramic resonator or a quartz-crystal oscillator between the pins XIN and the XOUT and between the pins XCIN and XCOUT. As the XIN-XOUT oscillation circuit includes a feedback resistor, an external resistor is omissible. As the XCIN-XCOUT oscillation circuit does not include any feedback resistor, connect a feedback resistor externally. Regarding circuit constants for Rf, Rd, CIN, COUT, CCIN and CCOUT, ask the resonator manufacturer for information, and set the values recommended by the resonator manufacturer.
3820 group
XCIN 28 XCOUT 29 Rf Rd XIN 30 XOUT 31
CCIN
CCOUT
CIN
COUT
Fig. 2.11.1 Oscillation circuit example using ceramic resonators
2-190
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
(2) External clock input circuit An external clock can also be supplied to the main clock oscillation circuit. Figure 2.11.2 shows an external clock input circuit example. As an external clock to be input to the XIN pin, use a pulse signal with a duty ratio of 50%. At this time, open the XOUT pin. Any clock externally generated cannot be input to the XCIN pin directly. Cause oscillation with an external ceramic resonator.
3820 group
XCIN 28 Rf XCOUT 29 XIN 30 XOUT 31 Open External oscillation circuit CCIN CCOUT VCC VSS
Rd
Fig. 2.11.2 External clock input circuit example
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-191
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
2.11.2 Internal clock The internal clock is the standard for operations. (1) Clock generating circuit The clock generating circuit controls the oscillation of the oscillation circuit. The generated clock (internal clock ) is supplied to the CPU and peripheral units. Figure 2.11.3 shows the clock generating circuit block diagram. Oscillation can be stopped and resumed by the clock generating circuit.
XCIN
XCOUT "1" "0" Port Xc switch bit
XIN
XOUT Internal system clock selection bit (Note) "1" Low-speed mode 1/2 "0" Middle-/high-speed mode 1/4 1/2
Timer 1 count source selection bit "1" Timer 1 "0"
Timer 2 count source selection bit "0" "1" Timer 2
Main clock division ratio selection bit "1" Middle-speed mode "0" High-/low-speed mode Timing (Internal clock)
Main clock stop bit
QS R STP instruction WIT instruction
SQ R
QS R STP instruction
Reset Interrupt disable flag (I) Interrupt request
Note: When using the low-speed mode, set the port Xc switch bit to "1."
Fig. 2.11.3 Clock generating circuit block diagram
2-192
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
(2) Clock output function The internal clock can be output from the pin by setting the output control bit (bit 0) of the output control register (address 002A16) to "1." The pin is also used as port P41. Accordingly, to use it as an pin, set bit 1 of the port P4 direction register to "1." Figure 2.11.4 shows the structure of the output control register.
output control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 output control register (CKOUT) [Address 2A16] Name 0 output control bit B Functions 0: Port function 1: clock output (Port direction register = "1") At reset R W 0
1 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be to written to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 7
0
0x
Fig. 2.11.4 Structure of output control register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-193
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
2.11.3 Oscillating operation The start and stop sources for oscillating operation are described below. (1) Oscillating operation At reset release, the middle-speed mode is provided. At this time, only the main clock oscillates and the XCIN and XCOUT pins function as I/O ports. To use the sub-clock, set the P70, P71 pull-up (bit 4) of the PULL register A (address 001616) to "0" and disconnect each pull-up resistor of the XCIN and XCOUT pins. sMiddle-speed mode The internal clock after reset release is obtained by dividing f(XIN) by 8 (f(XIN) is the frequency which is input to the XIN pin). When changing to the high-speed mode: Set the main clock division ratio selection bit (bit 6) of the CPU mode register (address 003B16) to "0." When changing to the low-speed mode: Change the mode according to the following procedure. Set the port Xc switch bit (bit 4) of the CPU mode register to "1." Generate the oscillation stabilizing time of XCIN input by software. Set the internal system clock selection bit (bit 7) of the CPU mode register to "1." sHigh-speed mode The clock obtained by dividing f(XIN) by 2 is an internal clock . When changing to the middle-speed mode: Set the main clock division ratio selection bit (bit 6) of the CPU mode register to "1." When changing to the low-speed mode: Change the mode according to the following procedure. Set the port Xc switch bit (bit 4) of the CPU mode register to "1." Generate the oscillation stabilizing time of XCIN input by software. Set the internal system clock selection bit (bit 7) of the CPU mode register to "1."
2-194
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
sLow-speed mode The clock obtained by dividing the frequency f(XCIN) input to the XCIN pin by 2 is an internal clock . In the low-speed mode, the oscillation of the main clock is stopped by setting the main clock (XIN- XOUT) stop bit to "1," so that the low-power operation can be attained. When changing to the middle- or high-speed modes: Change the mode according to the following procedure. Set the main clock (XIN-XOUT) stop bit (bit 5) of the CPU mode register to "0." Generate the oscillation stabilizing time of XIN input by software. Set the internal system clock selection bit (bit 7) of the CPU mode register to "0." Specify the main clock division ratio selection bit (bit 6) of the CPU mode register. Notes 1: Make a mode change from the middle- or high-speed modes to the low-speed mode after the oscillation of both the main clock and the sub-clock is stabilized (for oscillation stabilizing time, ask the resonator manufacturer for information). 2: For the sub-clock, the stabilizing of oscillation requires much time. When making a change from the middle-speed or high-speed modes to the stop mode and then making a return from the stop mode while the sub-clock oscillates, the oscillation of the sub-clock is not yet stabilized even when the main clock has become stable and the CPU has been restored. 3: For a mode change, set to f(XIN) > f(XCIN) ! 3. (2) Oscillating operation in the stop mode After the stop mode is provided by executing the STP instruction, every oscillation stops and the internal clock stops at the "H" level. At the time when restoration is made from the stop mode by rest input or by the occurrence of an interrupt request for restoration, oscillation starts. For the details of the stop mode, refer to "2.9.1 Stop mode." (3) Oscillating operation in the wait mode After the wait mode is provided by executing the WIT instruction, the internal clock supplied to the CPU stops at the "H" level. As oscillation is continued, the supply of internal clock to the peripheral units is continued. At the time when restoration is made from the wait mode by reset input or by the occurrence of an interrupt request for restoration, the supply of internal clock to the CPU starts. For the details of the wait mode, refer to "2.9.2 Wait mode."
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-195
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
(4) State transitions of internal clock Figure 2.11.5 shows the state transitions of the internal clock .
RESET
Middle-speed mode (f () = 1 MHz) CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected) CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed) CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating) CM4 = 0 (32 kHz stopped)
CM6 "1""0"
High-speed mode (f () = 4 MHz) CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected) CM6 = 0 (High-speed) CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating) CM4 = 0 (32 kHz stopped)
CM4 "1""0"
"1 CM " C "0 4 "1 M " 6 " "0 "
Middle-speed mode (f () = 1 MHz) CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected) CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed) CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating) CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM6 "1""0"
High-speed mode (f () = 4 MHz) CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected) CM6 = 0 (High-speed) CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating) CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM7 "1""0"
CM7 "1""0"
CM4 "1""0"
4 M 1" C" " 6 " "0 CM "0 " "1
b7
b4 CPU mode register (CPUM) [Address 3B16] CM4: Port Xc switch bit 0: I/O port 1: XCIN, XCOUT CM5: Main clock (XIN-XOUT) stop bit 0: Oscillating 1: Stopped CM6: Main clock division ratio selection bit 0: f(XIN)/2 (high-speed mode) 1: f(XIN)/8 (middle-speed mode) CM7: Internal system clock selection bit 0: XIN-XOUT selected (middle-/high-speed mode) 1: XCIN-XCOUT selected (low-speed mode)
Low-speed mode (f () = 16 kHz) CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected) CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed) CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating) CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM6 "1""0"
Low-speed mode (f () = 16 kHz) CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected) CM6 = 0 (High-speed) CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating) CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
M 1" C" " 6 " "0 CM "0 " "1
"1 CM " 5 "1 CM "0 " 6 " "0 "
CM5 "1""0"
Low-speed mode (f () = 16 kHz) CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected) CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed) CM5 = 1 (8 MHz stopped) CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM6 "1""0"
Low-speed mode (f () = 16 kHz) CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected) CM6 = 0 (High-speed) CM5 = 1 (8 MHz stopped) CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
Notes 1: Switch the mode by the allows shown between the mode blocks.( Do not switch between the mode directly without an allow.) 2: The all modes can be switched to the stop mode or the wait mode and returned to the source mode when the stop mode or the wait mode is released. 3: Timer and LCD operate in the wait mode. 4: In middle-/high-speed mode, when the stop mode is released, a delay of approximately 1 ms occurs automatically by timer 1 and timer 2. 5: In low-speed mode, when the stop mode is released, a delay of approximately 0.25 s occurs automatically by timer 1 and timer 2. 6: Wait until oscillation stabilizes after oscillating the main clock XIN before the switching from the low-speed mode to the middle-/high-speed mode. 7: The example assumes that 8 MHz is being applied to the XIN pin and 32 kHz to the XCIN pin. indicates the internal clock.
Fig. 2.11.5 State transitions of internal clock 2-196
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
CM5 "1""0"
5
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
2.11.4 Oscillation stabilizing time In the oscillating circuit using ceramic resonators, the oscillation is unstable for a certain time when the oscillation of the resonators starts. The time required for stabilizing of oscillation is called oscillation stabilizing time. An appropriate oscillation stabilizing time is required in accordance with the conditions of the oscillation circuit in use. For oscillation stabilizing time, ask the resonator manufacturer for information. (1) Oscillation stabilizing time at poweron In the oscillating circuit using ceramic resonators, oscillation is unstable for a certain time immediately after poweron. At reset release, the oscillation stabilizing time for approximately 8,000 cycles of XIN input is automatically generated. Figure 2.11.6 shows the oscillation stabilizing time at poweron.
qMiddle-/high-speed mode
VCC RESET XIN Oscillation stabilizing time Internal reset
2.5 V
2 s or more
Release internal reset state
Fig. 2.11.6 Oscillation stabilizing time at poweron
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
2-197
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
(2) Oscillation stabilizing time at restoration from the stop mode In the stop mode, oscillation stops. When restoration is made from the stop mode by reset input or an interrupt request, the oscillation stabilizing time for approximately 8,000 cycles of XIN input or XCIN input is automatically generated as at poweron. At restoration made by reset, XIN input is a clock source of oscillation stabilizing time. At restoration made by an interrupt request, either XIN input or XCIN input set as a system clock immediately before execution of the STP instruction becomes a count source of oscillation stabilizing time. When XIN input is a system clock, the oscillation stabilizing time at restoration becomes approximately 8,000 cycles of XIN input. However, note that the oscillation on the XCIN side may not be stable even after the lapse of this oscillation stabilizing time. For the details of the stop mode, refer to "2.9.1 Stop mode." (3) Oscillation stabilizing time at reoscillation of XIN When starting the oscillation of XIN which was stopped by setting the main clock (XIN-XOUT) stop bit of the CPU mode register to "1," set this bit to "0." At this time, generate oscillation stabilizing time by software. Figure 2.11.7 shows the oscillation stabilizing time at reoscillation of XIN.
VCC Main clock (XIN-XOUT) stop bit XIN Note: For oscillation stabilizing time, ask the resonator manufacturer for information. Oscillation stabilizing time (Note)
Fig. 2.11.7 Oscillation stabilizing time at reoscillation of XIN
2-198
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
CHAPTER 3 APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version 3.2 Countermeasures against noise 3.3 Control registers 3.4 List of instruction codes 3.5 Machine instructions 3.6 Mask ROM ordering method 3.7 Mark specification form 3.8 Package outlines 3.9 SFR allocation 3.10 Pin configuration
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
3.1 Built-in PROM version
In contrast with the mask ROM version, the microcomputer with a built-in programmable ROM is called the built-in programmable ROM version (referred as "the built-in PROM version"). The following two types of built-in PROM version are available. *EPROM version.....................The contents of the built-in EPROM version can be written, deleted and rewritten. *One Time PROM version.......The contents of the built-in PROM can be written only once and cannot be deleted and rewritten. The EPROM version has the function of the One Time PROM version and also permits deleting and rewriting the contents of the PROM.
3-2
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
3.1.1 Product expansion Table 3.1.1 shows the product expansion of the built-in PROM version. Table 3.1.1 Product expansion of built-in PROM version Product M38203E4-XXXFP 80P6N-AV1 PCA4738F-80A M38203E4FP M38203E4-XXXGP M38203E4GP M38203E4-XXXHP 80P6D-A V3 PCA4738H-80 M38203E4HP EPROM 16384 bytes (16254 bytes) 80D0 V4 One Time PROM 16384 bytes (16254 bytes) PROM RAM Package Programming adapter Remarks Shipped after programming and inspection at plant Shipped in blankV5 Shipped after programming and inspection at plant Shipped in blankV5 512 bytes Shipped after programming and inspection at plant Shipped in blankV5
80P6S-A V2 PCA4738G-80
M38203E4FS
PCA4738L-80A EPROM version Shipped after programming and inspection at plant Shipped in blankV5
M38207E8-XXXFP 80P6N-AV1 PCA4738F-80A M38207E8FP M38207E8-XXXGP M38207E8GP M38207E8-XXXHP 80P6D-A V3 PCA4738H-80 M38207E8HP EPROM 32768 bytes (32638 bytes) 80D0 V4 One Time PROM 32768 bytes (32638 bytes)
80P6S-A V2 PCA4738G-80 1024 bytes
Shipped after programming and inspection at plant Shipped in blankV5 Shipped after programming and inspection at plant Shipped in blankV5
M38207E8FS
PCA4738L-80A EPROM version
V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
80P6N-A : 80P6S-A : 80P6D-A : 80D0 : Shipped in blank :
0.8 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP 0.65 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP 0.5 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP 0.8 mm-pitch ceramic LCC The product is shipped without writing any data in the built-in PROM
Note: The number in parentheses denotes a user ROM capacity.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-3
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
3.1.2 Performance overview Table 3.1.2 shows a performance overview of the built-in PROM version. The performance of the built-in PROM version is the same as that of the mask ROM version with the exception that the PROM is built in.
Table 3.1.2 Performance overview of built-in PROM version Parameter Basic instructions Instruction execution time Memory sizes PROM Performance 71 0.5 s (minimum instructions at 8MHz oscillation frequency) M38203E4 16384 bytes (user ROM capacity; 16254 bytes) M38207E8 32768 bytes (user ROM capacity; 32638 bytes) M38203E4 512 bytes M38207E8 1024 bytes 43 8 MHz (maximum) 32 kHz (standard) to 50 kHz (maximum) 16 sources, 16 vectors (includes key input interrupt) 8-bit ! 3 16-bit ! 2 8-bit ! 1 (operable in clock synchronous mode and UART mode) 8-bit ! 1 (operable only in clock synchronous mode) Select 1/2 or 1/3 Select duty ratio value of 2, 3, or 4 40 (maximum) 4 (maximum) 14-bit ! 1 1-bit output 2 built-in circuits (connect an external ceramic resonator or an external quartz-crystal oscillator) 2.5 V (minimum) to 5.0 V (standard) to 5.5 V (maximum) V4.0 V (minimum) in high-speed mode. However, at f(XIN) = (4 ! VCC - 8) MHz, 2.5 V to 4.0 V is possible. 32 mW (at 8 MHz oscillation frequency, VCC = 5 V) 0.045 mW (at 32 kHz oscillation frequency, VCC = 3 V) -20 C to 85 C CMOS silicon gate 80D0 (0.8 mm-pitch ceramic LCC) 80P6N-A (0.8 mm-pitch plastic mold QFP) 80P6S-A (0.65 mm-pitch plastic mold QFP) 80P6D-A (0.5 mm-pitch plastic mold QFP)
RAM Programmable I/O ports Oscillation frequency Main clock f(XIN) Sub-clock f(XCIN) Interrupts Timers Serial I/O1 Serial I/O2 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) drive control functions Watchdog timer clock output function Clock generating circuit Power source voltage
Bias Duty ratio Segment output Common output
Power dissipation
High-speed mode Low-speed mode
Operating temperature range Device structure Packages EPROM version One Time PROM version
Note: The parts enclosed by thick line denotes performance peculiar to the PROM version.
3-4
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
3.1.3 Pin configuration The pin configuration of the built-in PROM version is the same as that of the mask ROM version. Figure 3.1.1 shows the pin configuration of the EPROM version.
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9 SEG8 VCC SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 65 66 67 68 69 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 VSS XOUT XIN P70/XCOUT P71/XCIN RESET P40 P41/
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SEG0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 VL3 VL2 VL1 P61/RTP1 P60/INT3/RTP0 P57/INT2 P56/TOUT P55/CNTR1 P54/CNTR0 P53/SRDY2 P52/SCLK2 P51/SOUT2 P50/SIN2 P47/SRDY1 P46/SCLK1
M38203E4FS M38207E8FS
Package Type : 80D0
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
JAPAN
Fig. 3.1.1 Pin configuration of EPROM version (top view)
P44/RXD P43/INT1 P42/INT0
P45/TXD
P30/SEG16 P31/SEG17 P32/SEG18 P33/SEG19 P34/SEG20 P35/SEG21 P36/SEG22 P37/SEG23 P00/SEG24 P01/SEG25 P02/SEG26 P03/SEG27 P04/SEG28 P05/SEG29 P06/SEG30 P07/SEG31 P10/SEG32 P11/SEG33 P12/SEG34 P13/SEG35 P14/SEG36 P15/SEG37 P16/SEG38 P17/SEG39
3-5
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
Figure 3.1.2 and Figure 3.1.3 show the pin configurations of the One Time PROM version.
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9 SEG8 VCC SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 40 39 38 37 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 VSS XOUT XIN P70/XCOUT P71/XCIN RESET P40 P41/
P30/SEG16 P31/SEG17 P32/SEG18 P33/SEG19 P34/SEG20 P35/SEG21 P36/SEG22 P37/SEG23 P00/SEG24 P01/SEG25 P02/SEG26 P03/SEG27 P04/SEG28 P05/SEG29 P06/SEG30 P07/SEG31 P10/SEG32 P11/SEG33 P12/SEG34 P13/SEG35 P14/SEG36 P15/SEG37 P16/SEG38 P17/SEG39
M38203E4-XXXFP M38203E4FP M38207E8-XXXFP M38207E8FP
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SEG0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 VL3 VL2 VL1 P61/RTP1 P60/INT3/RTP0 P57/INT2 P56/TOUT P55/CNTR1 P54/CNTR0 P53/SRDY2 P52/SCLK2 P51/SOUT2 P50/SIN2 P47/SRDY1 P46/SCLK1
Package type : 80P6N-A
Fig. 3.1.2 Pin configuration of One Time PROM version (top view) (1)
3-6
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
P44/RXD P43/INT1 P42/INT0
P45/TXD
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 P31/SEG17 P30/SEG16 SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9 SEG8 VCC SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 COM3 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 P16/SEG38 P17/SEG39 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 VSS XOUT XIN P70/XCOUT P71/XCIN RESET P40 P41/ P42/INT0 P43/INT1
COM2 COM1 COM0 VL3 VL2 VL1 P61/RTP1 P60/INT3/RTP0 P57/INT2 P56/TOUT P55/CNTR1 P54/CNTR0 P53/SRDY2 P52/SCLK2 P51/SOUT2 P50/SIN2 P47/SRDY1 P46/SCLK1
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
Package type : 80P6S-A/80P6D-A
Fig. 3.1.3 Pin configuration of One Time PROM version (top view) (2)
P45/TXD P44/RXD
P32/SEG18 P33/SEG19 P34/SEG20 P35/SEG21 P36/SEG22 P37/SEG23 P00/SEG24 P01/SEG25 P02/SEG26 P03/SEG27 P04/SEG28 P05/SEG29 P06/SEG30 P07/SEG31 P10/SEG32 P11/SEG33 P12/SEG34 P13/SEG35 P14/SEG36 P15/SEG37
M38203E4-XXXGP M38203E4GP M38203E4-XXXHP M38203E4HP M38207E8-XXXGP M38207E8GP M38207E8-XXXHP M38207E8HP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
3-7
INT2
INT0, INT1
3-8
Reset input RESET
27 32 73
Main clock input XIN
31
Main clock output XOUT Date bus
(5V) VCC
(0V) VSS
APPENDIX
30
Clock generating circuit CPU PROM RAM
3.1 Built-in PROM version
8 VL1 7 VL2 6 VL3
XCIN Timer X(16) Timer Y(16) Timer 1(8) Timer 2(8) Address bus Timer 3(8)
XCOUT
Sub-clock input
Sub-clock output
PCH LCD drive control circuit
A X Y S PCL PS LCD display RAM (20 bytes)
5 4 3 2
COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3
Watchdog timer
Reset
Fig. 3.1.4 Functional block diagram of built-in PROM version
Serial I/O2(8) Serial I/O1(8)
3.1.4 Functional block diagram Figure 3.1.4 shows the functional block diagram of the built-in PROM version.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
Key-on wake up
P4(8) P3(8) P2(8) P1(8)
1 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
SEG0 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 SEG7 SEG8 SEG9 SEG10 SEG11 SEG12 SEG13 SEG14 SEG15
XCOUT
XCIN
P7(2)
P6(2)
P5(8)
P0(8)
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
28 29
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
I/O port P7 I/O port P4
I/O port P6
I/O port P5
Input port P3
I/O port P2
I/O port P1
I/O port P0
Note : Pin numbers are for package type 80P6N-A.
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
3.1.5 Notes on use Notes on using the built-in PROM version are described below. (1) All products of built-in PROM version sNotes on programming qWhen programming the contents of the PROM, use the dedicated programming adapter. This permits programming with a general-purpose PROM programmer. At that time, set all of SW1, SW2 and SW3 in the above programming adapter to "OFF." qAs a high voltage is used for programming, be careful not to apply overvoltage to pins. Special care must be exercised at poweron. sNotes on reading When reading out the contents of the PROM, use the dedicated programming adapter as in programming. This permits reading out with a general-purpose PROM programmer. At that time, set all of SW1, SW2 and SW3 in the programmer to "OFF." sNotes on using port P40 When using port P40 as an input port in the One Time PROM/EPROM version, connect a resistors of several k externally to port P40 in series. If this pin is not used, connect a resistor of several k externally to VSS in series (for improvement of the value withstand noise operation failure). For details, refer to "3.2 Countermeasures against noise, 3.2.1 Shortest wiring length, (3) Wiring to the VPP pin of the One Time PROM version and the EPROM version." (2) EPROM Version sNotes on deleting qSunlight and fluorescent lamps include light which may delete programmed information. For use in the read mode, cover the transparent glass part of the delete window with a seal or others. qThe seal to cover the transparent glass part is prepared by us. This seal is metallic (aluminium) for reasons of prevention of information-deleting light and toughness. Be careful not to bring this seal into contact with lead pins of the microcomputer. qBefore deleting information, clean the transparent glass. Finger marks and seal paste may block ultraviolet rays and effect delete characteristics. sNotes on mounting qTo mount the EPROM version for a purpose other than evaluation, use a suitable mounting socket. When mounting a ceramic package on the socket, fix it securely with silicone resin.
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-9
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
(3) One Time PROM version sNotes on setting the PROM programmer area qFor products shipped in blank, access to the first 128 bytes and addresses FFFE16 and FFFF16 in the built-in PROM user area is inhibited. Note the above point when setting the PROM programmer area. sNotes before actual use The programming test and screening for PROM of the One Time PROM version (shipped in blank) are not performed in the assembly process and the following processes. To ensure reliability after programming, performing programming and test according to the Figure 3.1.5 before actual use are recommended.
Programming with PROM programmer
Screening (Caution) (Leave at 150 C for 40 hours)
Verification with PROM programmer Caution: The screening temperature is far higher than the storage temperature. Never expose to 150C exceeding 100 hours.
Functional check in target device
Fig. 3.1.5 Programming and testing of One Time PROM version (shipped in blank)
3-10
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.2 Countermeasures against noise
3.2 Countermeasures against noise
Countermeasures against noise are described below. The following countermeasures are effective against noise in theory, however, it is necessary not only to take measures as follows but to evaluate before actual use. 3.2.1 Shortest wiring length The wiring on a printed circuit board can function as an antenna which feeds noise into the microcomputer. The shorter the total wiring length (by mm unit), the less the possibility of noise insertion into a microcomputer. (1) Wiring for the reset input pin Make the length of wiring which is connected to the RESET input pin as short as possible. Especially, connect a capacitor across the RESET input pin and the VSS pin with the shortest possible wiring (within 20 mm). Reason The reset works to initialize the internal state of a microcomputer. The width of a pulse input into the RESET pin is determined by the timing necessary conditions. If noise having a shorter pulse width than the standard is input to the RESET input pin, the reset is released before the internal state of the microcomputer is completely initialized. This may cause a program runaway.
Noise
Reset circuit VSS
RESET VSS
Reset circuit VSS
RESET VSS
Fig. 3.2.1 Wiring for the RESET input pin (2) Wiring for clock input/output pins qMake the length of wiring which is connected to clock I/O pins as short as possible. qMake the length of wiring (within 20 mm) across the grouding lead of a capacitor which is connected to an oscillator and the VSS pin of a microcomputer as short as possible. qSeparate the VSS pattern only for oscillation from other VSS patterns.
Noise
XIN XOUT VSS
XIN XOUT VSS
Fig. 3.2.2 Wiring for clock I/O pins
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-11
APPENDIX
3.2 Countermeasures against noise
Reason A microcomputer's operation synchronizes with a clock generated by the oscillator (circuit). If noise enters clock I/O pins, clock waveforms may be deformed. This may cause a program failure or program runaway. Also, if a potential difference is caused by the noise between the VSS level of a microcomputer and the VSS level of an oscillator, the correct clock will not be input in the microcomputer. (3) Wiring to the VPP pin of the One Time PROM version and the EPROM version qMake the length of wiring which is connected to the VPP pin as short as possible. qConnect an approximately 5 k resistor to the VPP pin in serial (refer to Figure 3.2.3).
3820
Approximately 5 k
P40/VPP RESET When the microcomputer does not have the CNVSS pin, the VPP pin is also used as the input pin adjacent to the RESET pin.
V1 When a microcomputer does not have the CNVSS pin, the VPP pin is also as the input pin adjacent to the RESET input pin. Reason The VPP pin of the One Time PROM and the EPROM version is the power source input pin for the built-in PROM. When programming in the built-in PROM, the impedance of the VPP pin is low to allow the electric current for writing flow into the PROM. Because of this, noise can enter easily. If noise enters the VPP pin, abnormal instruction codes or data are read from the built-in PROM, which may cause a program runaway. 3.2.2 Connection of a bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the VCC line Connect an approximately 0.1 F bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the VCC line as follows: qConnect a bypass capacitor across the VSS pin and the VCC pin at equal length. qConnect a bypass capacitor across the VSS pin and the VCC pin with the shortest possible wiring. qUse lines with a larger diameter than other signal lines for VSS line and VCC line.
Fig. 3.2.3 Wiring for the VPP pin of the One Time PROM and the EPROM version
Chip VCC VSS
Fig. 3.2.4 Bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the VCC line
3-12
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.2 Countermeasures against noise
3.2.3 Oscillator concerns Take care to prevent an oscillator that generates clocks for a microcomputer operation from being affected by other signals. (1) Installing an oscillator away from large current signal lines Install a microcomputer (and especially an oscillator) as far as possible from signal lines where a current larger than the tolerance of current value flows. Reason In the system using a microcomputer, there are signal lines for controlling motors, LEDs, and thermal heads or others. When a large current flows through those signal lines, strong noise occurs because of mutual inductance. 3.2.4 Installing an oscillator away from signal lines where potential levels change frequently Install an oscillator away from signal lines where potential levels change frequently. Also, do not cross such signal lines over the clock lines or the signal lines which are sensitive to noise. Reason Signal lines where potential levels change frequently (such as the CNTR pin signal line) may affect other lines at signal rising edge or falling edge. If such lines cross over a clock line, clock waveforms may be deformed, which causes a microcomputer failure or a program runaway.
Microcomputer Mutual inductance M Large current GND XIN XOUT VSS
Fig. 3.2.5 Wiring for a large current signal line
Do not cross
CNTR XIN XOUT VSS
Fig. 3.2.6 Wiring to a signal line where potential levels change frequently
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-13
APPENDIX
3.2 Countermeasures against noise
3.2.5 Oscillator protection using VSS pattern As for a two-sided printed circuit board, print a VSS pattern on the underside (soldering side) of the position (on the component side) where an oscillator is mounted. Connect the VSS pattern to the microcomputer VSS pin with the shortest possible wiring. Besides, separate this VSS pattern from other VSS patterns.
An example of VSS patterns on the underside of a printed circuit board Oscillator wiring pattern example
XIN XOUT VSS
Separate the VSS line for oscillation from other VSS lines
Fig. 3.2.7 VSS pattern on the underside of an oscillator 3.2.6 Setup for I/O ports Setup I/O ports using hardware and software as follows: qConnect a resistor of 100 or more to an I/O port in series. qAs for an input port, read data several times by a program for checking whether input levels are equal or not. qAs for an output port, since the output data may reverse because of noise, rewrite data to its data register at fixed periods. qRewirte data to direction registers and pull-up control registers (only the product having it) at fixed periods.
When a direction register is set for input port again at fixed periods, a several-nanosecond short pulse may be output from this port. If this is undesirable, connect a capacitor to this port to remove the noise pulse.
Noise
Data bus
Direction register Data register I/O port pins Noise
Fig. 3.2.8 Setup for I/O ports
3-14
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.2 Countermeasures against noise
3.2.7 Providing of watchdog timer function by software If a microcomputer runs away because of noise or others, it can be detected by a software watchdog timer and the microcomputer can be reset to normal operation. This is equal to or more effective than program runaway detection by a hardware watchdog timer. The following shows an example of a watchdog timer provided by software. In the following example, to reset a microcomputer to normal operation, the main routine detects errors of the interrupt processing routine and the interrupt processing routine detects errors of the main routine. This example assumes that interrupt processing is repeated multiple times in a single main routine processing. qAssigns a single byte of RAM to a software watchdog timer (SWDT) and writes the initial value N in the SWDT once at each execution of the main routine. The initial value N should satisfy the following condition: N+1 (Counts of interrupt processing executed in each main routine)
As the main routine execution cycle may change because of an interrupt processing or others, the initial value N should have a margin. N
qDecrements the SWDT contents by 1 at each interrupt processing. qDetermins that the main routine operates normally when the SWDT contents are reset to the initial value N at almost fixed cycles (at the fixed interrupt processing count). qDetects that the main routine has failed and determines to branch to the program initialization routine for recovery processing in the following case: xIf the SWDT contents are not initialized to the initial value N but continued to decrement and if they exceed the limit (and reach 0 or less)
Main routine (SWDT) N CLI Main processing (SWDT) = N? =N
Interrupt processing routine (SWDT) (SWDT) - 1 Interrupt processing >0 RTI Return Main routine errors
(SWDT) 0? 0
qWatches the operation of the interrupt processing routine by comparing the SWDT contents with countsof interrupt processing after the initial value N has been set. qDetects that the interrupt processing routine has failed and determines to branch to the program initialization routine for recovery processing in the following cases: xIf the SWDT contents do not change after interrupt processing If the changed SWDT contents are abnormal (In Figure 3.2.9, the main routine determines that the interrupt processing routine has failed only if the SWDT contents do not change).
Interrupt processing routine errors
Fig. 3.2.9 Watchdog timer by software
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-15
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
3.3 Control registers
Port P0 direction register, port P1 direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port P0 direction register (P0D) [Address 0116] Port P1 direction register (P1D) [Address 0316] Name B 0 Port P0 direction register / Port P1 direction register At reset R W Functions 0 : All bits are input mode x 0 1 : All bits are output mode
1 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written to to and be read out. 7
0
xx
Note: In ports P0 and P1, input/output switching is performed by a port unit. By setting bit 0 of the corresponding port direction register to "0", the port is set for the input mode. By setting to "1", the port is set for the output mode. Nothing is allocated for bits 1 to 7 of the ports P0 and P1 direction registers, and these bits cannot be written to.
Fig. 3.3.1 Structure of port P0 and P1 direction registers
Port Pi direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port Pi direction register (PiD) (i = 2, 4 to 7) [Address 0516, 0916, 0B16, 0D16, 0F16] B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name Port Pi direction register Functions 0 : Port Pi0 input mode 1 : Port Pi0 output mode 0 : Port Pi1 input mode 1 : Port Pi1 output mode 0 : Port Pi2 input mode 1 : Port Pi2 output mode 0 : Port Pi3 input mode 1 : Port Pi3 output mode 0 : Port Pi4 input mode 1 : Port Pi4 output mode 0 : Port Pi5 input mode 1 : Port Pi5 output mode 0 : Port Pi6 input mode 1 : Port Pi6 output mode 0 : Port Pi7 input mode 1 : Port Pi7 output mode At reset
0
RW x x x x x x x x
0 0 0 0 0
0 0
Notes 1: Nothing is allocated bit 0 of port P4 direction register and bit 2 to bit 7 of port P7 direction register. These bits cannot be written to. 2: The contents of the port Pi direction register cannot be read out (refer to "2.1.4 Notes on use").
Fig. 3.3.2 Structure of port Pi (i = 2, 4 to 7) direction registers 3-16
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
PULL register A
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PULL register A (PULLA) [Address 1616] B 0 Name P00-P07 pull-down Functions 0 : No pull-down 1 : Pull-down 0 : No pull-down 1 : Pull-down 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up 0 : No pull-down 1 : Pull-down 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up At reset R W 1 1 0 1 0 0 0x
1 P10-P17 pull-down 2 3 4 P20-P27 pull-up P30-P37 pull-down P70, P71 pull-up
5 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written to to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 7
Note: For ports set for the output mode, pull-up or pull-down is impossible.
Fig. 3.3.3 Structure of PULL register A
PULL register B
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PULL register B (PULLB) [Address 1716] B Name 0 P41-P43 pull-up 1 P44-P47 pull-up 2 P50-P53 pull-up 3 P54-P57 pull-up 4 P60, P61 pull-up Functions 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up 0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x
0 : No pull-up 1 : Pull-up 5 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written to to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 7
Note: For ports set for the output mode, pull-up is impossible.
Fig. 3.3.4 Structure of PULL register B
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-17
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Serial I/O1 status register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS) [Address 1916] B Name 0 Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE) 1 Receive buffer full flag (RBF) 2 Transmit shift register shift completion flag (TSC) 3 4 5 6 7 Functions At reset R W x 0 0: Buffer full 1: Buffer empty x 0: Buffer empty 0 1: Buffer full x 0: Transmit shift in progress 0 1: Transmit shift completed x Overrun error flag 0 0: No error (OE) 1: Overrun error x Parity error flag 0: No error 0 (PE) 1: Parity error x 0: No error Framing error flag 0 1: Framing error (FE) x Summing error flag 0 0: (OE) U (PE) U (FE) = 0 (SE) 1: (OE) U (PE) U (FE) = 1 Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to 1x 1 and is fixed to "1" at reading.
Fig. 3.3.5 Structure of serial I/O1 status register
3-18
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Serial I/O1 control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON) [Address 1A16] B 0 1 Name BRG count source selection bit (CSS) Functions 0: f(XIN) 1: f(XIN)/4 At reset R W 0 0
Serial I/O1 *In clock synchronous mode synchronization clock 0: BRG output/4 selection bit 1: External clock input (SCS) *In UART mode 0: BRG output/16 1: External clock input/16 SRDY1 output enable 0: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as I/O port P47 1: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as signal output bit (SRDY) pin SRDY1 (SRDY1 signal indicates receive enable state) Transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) Transmit enable bit (TE) Receive enable bit (RE) 0: When transmit buffer has emptied 1: When transmit shift operation is completed 0: Transmit disabled 1: Transmit enabled 0: Receive disabled 1: Receive enabled
2
0
3
0
4 5 6
0 0 0
Serial I/O1 mode 0: Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART) selection bit (SIOM) mode 1: Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode Serial I/O1 enable bit (SIOE) 0: Serial I/O1 disabled (pins P44-P47 operate as I/O pins) 1: Serial I/O1 enabled (pins P44-P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
7
0
Fig. 3.3.6 Structure of serial I/O1 control register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-19
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
UART control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 UART control register (UARTCON) [Address 1B16] B Name 0 Character length selection bit (CHAS) 1 2 3 4 Functions 0: 8 bits 1: 7 bits 0: Parity checking disabled 1: Parity checking enabled 0: Even parity 1: Odd parity 0: 1 stop bit 1: 2 stop bits At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0
5 to 7
Parity enable bit (PARE) Parity selection bit (PARS) Stop bit length selection bit (STPS) 0: CMOS output (in output mode) P45/TxD P-channel 1: N-channel open-drain output output disable bit (in output mode) (POFF) Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written to and are fixed to "1" at reading.
1
1x
Fig. 3.3.7 Structure of UART control register
Serial I/O2 control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON) [Address 1D16] Name Internal 0 synchronization clock select bits 1 B Functions
b2b1b0
At reset R W 0
2 3 Serial I/O2 port selection bit 4 5 SRDY2 output enable bit Transfer direction selection bit
0 0 0: f(XIN)/8 0 0 1: f(XIN)/16 0 1 0: f(XIN)/32 0 1 1: f(XIN)/64 1 0 0: 1 0 1: Do not set 1 1 0: f(XIN)/128 1 1 1: f(XIN)/256 0: I/O port (P51, P52) 1: SOUT2, SCLK2 signal output 0: I/O port (P53) 1: SRDY2 signal output 0: LSB first 1: MSB first 0: External clock 1: Internal clock
0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0x
6 Synchronization clock selection bit 7
Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and is fixed to "0" at reading.
Fig. 3.3.8 Structure of serial I/O2 control register 3-20
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Timer X mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer X mode register (TXM) [Address 2716] B 0 Name Timer X write control bit Real time port control bit Functions 0 : Write value in latch and counter 1 : Write value in latch only At reset R W 0
1
2 3 4 5
6
0 : Real time port function invalid 1 : Real time port function valid P60 data for real time 0 : "L" level output port 1 : "H" level output P61 data for real time 0 : "L" level output 1 : "H" level output port b5b4 Timer X operating 0 0 : Timer mode mode bits 0 1 : Pulse output mode 1 0 : Event counter mode 1 1 : Pulse width measurement mode *CNTR0 interrupt CNTR0 active edge 0 : Falling edge active switch bit 1 : Rising edge active *Pulse output mode 0 : Start at initial level "H" output 1 : Start at initial level "L" output *Event counter mode 0 : Rising edge active 1 : Falling edge active *Pulse width measurement mode 0 : Measure "H" level width 1 : Measure "L" level width 0 : Count start 1 : Count stop
0
0 0 0 0
0
7
Timer X stop control bit
0
Fig. 3.3.9 Structure of timer X mode register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-21
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Timer Y mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer Y mode register (TYM) [Address 2816] Name Functions At reset R W Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written 0 0 0x to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 3 b5b4 0 4 Timer Y operating 0 0 : Timer mode mode bits 0 1 : Period measurement mode 1 0 : Event counter mode 0 5 1 1 : Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode *CNTR1 interrupt 0 6 CNTR1 active edge 0 : Falling edge active switch bit 1 : Rising edge active *Period measurement mode 0 : Measure falling edge to falling edge 1 : Measure rising edge to rising edge *Event counter mode 0 : Rising edge active 1 : Falling edge active 7 Timer Y stop control 0 : Count start bit 1 : Count stop B
0
Fig. 3.3.10 Structure of timer Y mode register
3-22
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Timer 123 mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Timer 123 mode register (T123M) [Address 2916] B 0 Name TOUT output active edge switch bit TOUT output control bit Functions 0 : Start at "H" output 1 : Start at "L" output 0 : TOUT output disabled 1 : TOUT output enabled At reset R W 0
1
0
Timer 2 write control 0 : Write value in latch and counter bit 1 : Write value in latch only 3 Timer 2 count source 0 : Timer 1 underflow 1 : f(XIN)/16 selection bit (Middle-/high-speed mode) f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode) (Note) 4 Timer 3 count source 0 : Timer 1 underflow 1 : f(XIN)/16 selection bit (Middle-/high-speed mode) f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode) (Note) 5 Timer 1 count source 0 : f(XIN)/16 (Middle-/high-speed mode) selection bit f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode) (Note) 1 : f(XCIN) 2 6, 7 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written to and are fixed to "0" at reading. Note: Internal clock is f(XCIN)/2 in the low-speed mode.
0 0
0
0
0
0x
Fig. 3.3.11 Structure of timer 123 mode register
output control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 output control register (CKOUT) [Address 2A16] B Name 0 output control bit Functions 0: Port function 1: clock output (Port direction register = "1") At reset R W 0
1 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be to written to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 7
0
0x
Fig. 3.3.12 Structure of output control register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-23
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Watchdog timer control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON) [Address 3716] B Name 0 Watchdog timer H to bits 5 6 Functions At reading, the count value of watchdog timer H is read. At reset R W x 1 (Note) 1 1x
Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and is fixed to "1" at reading. 0: Underflow from watchdog timer L (WDT is used as 14-bit timer) 1: f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16 (WDT is used as 6-bit timer)
7 Watchdog timer H count source selection bit
0
Note: When a value is written to address 3716, the following values are set, so that the watchdog timer starts a count operation. Watchdog timer H = "3F16" Watchdog timer L = "FF16"
Fig. 3.3.13 Structure of watchdog timer control register
Segment output enable register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 00 Segment output enable register (SEG) [Address 3816] B Name Functions At reset R W 0: Input ports P30-P37 0 Segment output 0 1: Segment output SEG16-SEG23 enable bit 0 0: I/O ports P00, P01 1 Segment output 0 enable bit 1 1: Segment output SEG24, SEG25 0: I/O ports P02-P07 2 Segment output 0 enable bit 2 1: Segment output SEG26-SEG31 0: I/O ports P10, P11 3 Segment output 0 1: Segment output SEG32, SEG33 enable bit 3 0: I/O port P12 4 Segment output 0 enable bit 4 1: Segment output SEG34 0: I/O ports P13-P17 5 Segment output 0 1: Segment output SEG35-SEG39 enable bit 5 6,7 Fix these bits to "0." 0 00
Fig. 3.3.14 Structure of segment output register
3-24
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
LCD mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 LCD mode register (LM) [Address 3916] B Name
b1b0
Functions 00: Not available 01: 2 (use COM0, COM1) 10: 3 (use COM0-COM2) 11: 4 (use COM0-COM3) 0: 1/3 bias 1: 1/2 bias 0: LCD OFF 1: LCD ON
At reset R W 0 0
0 Duty ratio selection bits 1
2 Bias control bit 3 LCD enable bit 4 Fix this bit to "0." 5 LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits (Note 1) 6 7 LCDCK count source selection bit (Note 2)
0 0 0 00
b6b5
00: LCDCK count source 01: 2 division of LCDCK count source 10: 4 division of LCDCK count source 11: 8 division of LCDCK count source 0: f(XCIN)/32 1: f(XIN)/8192
0
0
Notes 1: Reference values at f(XIN) = 8 MHz 00: 977 Hz 01: 488 Hz 10: 244 Hz 11: 122 Hz 2: LCDCK is a clock for a LCD timing controller.
Fig. 3.3.15 Structure of LCD mode register
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-25
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Interrupt edge selection register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE) [Address 3A16]
Name Functions 0 : Falling edge active 0 INT0 interrupt edge 1 : Rising edge active selection bit 0 : Falling edge active 1 INT1 interrupt edge 1 : Rising edge active selection bit 0 : Falling edge active 2 INT2 interrupt edge 1 : Rising edge active selection bit 0 : Falling edge active 3 INT3 interrupt edge 1 : Rising edge active selection bit 4 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be to written to and are fixed to "0" at reading. 7 B At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0x
Fig. 3.3.16 Structure of interrupt edge selection register
CPU mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 1 CPU mode register (CPUM) [Address 3B16] B Name 0 Processor mode bits 1 Functions
b1b0
At reset R W 0 0
00: Single-chip mode 01: 10: Not available 11: 0: 0 page 1: 1 page
2
Stack page selection bit
0 1 11
3 Fix this bit to "1." 4 Port XC switch bit 0: I/O port 1: XCIN, XCOUT
0 0 1
5 Main clock (XIN-XOUT) 0: Oscillating stop bit 1: Stopped 6 Main clock division ratio selection bit 0: f(XIN)/2 (high-speed mode) 1: f(XIN)/8 (middle-speed mode) 0: XIN-XOUT selected (middle-/high-speed mode) 1: XCIN-XCOUT selected (low-speed mode)
7 Internal system clock selection bit
0
Fig. 3.3.17 Structure of CPU mode register 3-26
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Interrupt request register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) [Address 3C16] B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name INT0 interrupt request bit INT1 interrupt request bit Serial I/O receive interrupt request bit Serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit Timer X interrupt request bit Timer Y interrupt request bit Timer 2 interrupt request bit Timer 3 interrupt request bit Functions 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued 1 : Interrupt request issued At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V V V V V V V V
V : "0" is set by software, but not "1."
Fig. 3.3.18 Structure of interrupt request register 1
Interrupt request register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) [Address 3D16] B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name Functions At reset R W V 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V V V V V V 0x
CNTR0 interrupt 0 : No interrupt request issued request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued 0 : No interrupt request issued CNTR1 interrupt 1 : Interrupt request issued request bit Timer 1 interrupt 0 : No interrupt request issued request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued INT2 interrupt 0 : No interrupt request issued request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued INT3 interrupt 0 : No interrupt request issued request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued Key input interrupt 0 : No interrupt request issued request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued Serial I/O2 0 : No interrupt request issued interrupt request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and is fixed to "0" at reading.
V : "0" can be set by software, but "1" cannot be set.
Fig. 3.3.19 Structure of interrupt request register 2
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-27
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Interrupt control register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) [Address 3E16] B 0 1 2 Name INT0 interrupt enable bit INT1 interrupt enable bit Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit Functions 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit 4 Timer X interrupt enable bit 5 Timer Y interrupt enable bit 6 Timer 2 interrupt enable bit 7 Timer 3 interrupt enable bit
Fig. 3.3.20 Structure of interrupt control register 1
Interrupt control register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) [Address 3F16] B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name CNTR0 interrupt enable bit CNTR1 interrupt enable bit Timer 1 interrupt enable bit INT2 interrupt enable bit INT3 interrupt enable bit Key input interrupt enable bit Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit Fix this bit to "0." Functions 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled 0 : Interrupts disabled 1 : Interrupts enabled At reset R W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
Fig. 3.3.21 Structure of interrupt control register 2
3-28
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.4 List of instruction codes
3.4 List of instruction codes
D3 - D0 Hexadecimal notation 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
D7 - D4
0
1
2
3 BBS 0, A BBC 0, A BBS 1, A BBC 1, A BBS 2, A BBC 2, A BBS 3, A BBC 3, A BBS 4, A BBC 4, A BBS 5, A BBC 5, A BBS 6, A BBC 6, A BBS 7, A BBC 7, A
4
5 ORA ZP ORA ZP, X AND ZP AND ZP, X EOR ZP EOR ZP, X ADC ZP ADC ZP, X STA ZP STA ZP, X LDA ZP LDA ZP, X CMP ZP CMP ZP, X SBC ZP SBC ZP, X
6 ASL ZP ASL ZP, X ROL ZP ROL ZP, X LSR ZP LSR ZP, X ROR ZP ROR ZP, X STX ZP STX ZP, Y LDX ZP LDX ZP, Y DEC ZP DEC ZP, X INC ZP INC ZP, X
7 BBS 0, ZP BBC 0, ZP BBS 1, ZP BBC 1, ZP BBS 2, ZP BBC 2, ZP BBS 3, ZP BBC 3, ZP BBS 4, ZP BBC 4, ZP BBS 5, ZP BBC 5, ZP BBS 6, ZP BBC 6, ZP BBS 7, ZP BBC 7, ZP
8
9 ORA IMM ORA ABS, Y AND IMM AND ABS, Y EOR IMM EOR ABS, Y ADC IMM ADC ABS, Y -- STA ABS, Y LDA IMM LDA ABS, Y CMP IMM CMP ABS, Y SBC IMM SBC ABS, Y
A ASL A DEC A ROL A INC A LSR A -- ROR A --
B SEB 0, A CLB 0, A SEB 1, A CLB 1, A SEB 2, A CLB 2, A SEB 3, A CLB 3, A SEB 4, A CLB 4, A SEB 5, A CLB 5, A SEB 6, A CLB 6, A SEB 7, A CLB 7, A
C
D ORA ABS
E ASL ABS
F SEB 0, ZP
0000
BRK
ORA JSR IND, X ZP, IND ORA IND, Y AND IND, X AND IND, Y CLT JSR SP SET
--
PHP
--
0001
1
BPL JSR ABS BMI
-- BIT ZP -- COM ZP -- TST ZP -- STY ZP STY ZP, X LDY ZP LDY ZP, X CPY ZP -- CPX ZP --
CLC
-- BIT ABS LDM ZP JMP ABS -- JMP IND -- STY ABS -- LDY ABS
ORA ASL CLB ABS, X ABS, X 0, ZP AND ABS ROL ABS SEB 1, ZP
0010
2
PLP
0011
3
SEC
AND ROL CLB ABS, X ABS, X 1, ZP EOR ABS LSR ABS SEB 2, ZP
0100
4
RTI
EOR STP IND, X (Note) EOR IND, Y --
PHA
0101
5
BVC
CLI
EOR LSR CLB ABS, X ABS, X 2, ZP ADC ABS ROR ABS SEB 3, ZP
0110
6
RTS
ADC MUL IND, X (Note) ADC IND, Y STA IND, X STA IND, Y LDA IND, X -- RRF ZP -- LDX IMM
PLA
0111
7
BVS
SEI
ADC ROR CLB ABS, X ABS, X 3, ZP STA ABS STA ABS, X LDA ABS STX ABS -- LDX ABS SEB 4, ZP CLB 4, ZP SEB 5, ZP
1000
8
BRA
DEY
TXA
1001
9
BCC LDY IMM BCS CPY IMM BNE CPX IMM BEQ
TYA
TXS
1010
A
TAY
TAX
1011
B
LDA JMP IND, Y ZP, IND SLW CMP (Note) IND, X WIT CMP IND, Y --
CLV
TSX
LDY LDA LDX CLB ABS, X ABS, X ABS, Y 5, ZP CPY ABS -- CPX ABS -- CMP ABS DEC ABS SEB 6, ZP
1100
C
INY
DEX
1101
D
CLD
--
CMP DEC CLB ABS, X ABS, X 6, ZP SBC ABS INC ABS SEB 7, ZP
1110
E
FST SBC (Note) IND, X DIV SBC IND, Y --
INX
NOP
1111
F
SED
--
SBC INC CLB ABS, X ABS, X 7, ZP
3-byte instruction 2-byte instruction 1-byte instruction
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-29
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode Symbol Function Details IMP OP n ADC (Note 1) (Note 5) When T = 0 AA+M+C When T = 1 M(X) M(X) + M + C Adds the carry, accumulator and memory contents. The results are entered into the accumulator. Adds the contents of the memory in the address indicated by index register X, the contents of the memory specified by the addressing mode and the carry. The results are entered into the memory at the address indicated by index register X. "AND's" the accumulator and memory contents. The results are entered into the accumulator. "AND's" the contents of the memory of the address indicated by index register X and the contents of the memory specified by the addressing mode. The results are entered into the memory at the address indicated by index register X. Shifts the contents of accumulator or contents of memory one bit to the left. The low order bit of the accumulator or memory is cleared and the high order bit is shifted into the carry flag. Branches when the contents of the bit specified in the accumulator or memory is "0". Branches when the contents of the bit specified in the accumulator or memory is "1". Branches when the contents of carry flag is "0". Branches when the contents of carry flag is "1". Branches when the contents of zero flag is "1". 24 3 IMM # OP n 69 2 A # OP n 2 BIT, A # OP n ZP # OP n 65 3 BIT, ZP # OP n 2 #
ASL
C
7
0
0
BBC (Note 4) BBS (Note 4) BCC (Note 4) BCS (Note 4) BEQ (Note 4) BIT
Ab or Mb = 0?
Ab or Mb = 1?
C = 0?
C = 1?
Z = 1? V
A
M
BMI (Note 4) BNE (Note 4) BPL (Note 4) BRA
N = 1?
Z = 0?
N = 0? PC PC offset B1 M(S) PCH SS-1 M(S) PCL SS-1 M(S) PS SS-1 PCL ADL PCH ADH
BRK
3-30
V
When T = 1 M(X) M(X)
V
AND (Note 1)
When T = 0 AA M
29 2
2
25 3
2
M
0A 2
1
06 5
2
13 4 + 2i 03 4 + 2i
2
17 5 + 2i 07 5 + 2i
3
2
3
"AND's" the contents of accumulator and memory. The results are not entered anywhere. Branches when the contents of negative flag is "1". Branches when the contents of zero flag is "0".
2
Branches when the contents of negative flag is "0". Jumps to address specified by adding offset to the program counter. Executes a software interrupt. 00 7 1
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode ZP, X OP n 75 4 ZP, Y # OP n 2 ABS # OP n 6D 4 ABS, X # OP n 3 7D 5 ABS, Y IND ZP, IND # OP n IND, X IND, Y REL SP # OP n # 7
Processor status register 6 V V 5 T * 4 B * 3 D * 2 I * 1 Z Z 0 C C
# OP n 3 79 5
# OP n 3
# OP n 61 6
# OP n 2 71 6
# OP n 2
N N
35 4
2
2D 4
3 3D 5
3 39 5
3
21 6
2 31 6
2
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
16 6
2
0E 6
3 1E 7
3
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
C
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* 90 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
B0 2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
F0 2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
2C 4
3
M7 M6 *
*
*
*
Z
*
30 2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
D0 2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
10 2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
80 4
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1
*
1
*
*
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-31
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode Symbol Function Details IMP OP n BVC (Note 4) BVS (Note 4) CLB V = 0? Branches when the contents of overflow flag is "0". Branches when the contents of overflow flag is "1". Clears the contents of the bit specified in the accumulator or memory to "0". Clears the contents of the carry flag to "0". 18 2 1 1B 2 + 2i 1 1F 5 + 2i 2 IMM # OP n A # OP n BIT, A # OP n ZP # OP n BIT, ZP # OP n #
V = 1? Ab or Mb 0 C0 D0 I0 T0 V0 When T = 0 A-M When T = 1 M(X) - M MM X-M
CLC
CLD
Clears the contents of decimal mode flag to "0". Clears the contents of interrupt disable flag to "0". Clears the contents of index X mode flag to "0". Clears the contents of overflow flag to "0".
D8 2
1
CLI
58 2
1
CLT
12 2
1
CLV
B8 2
1
CMP (Note 3)
Compares the contents of accumulator and memory. Compares the contents of the memory specified by the addressing mode with the contents of the address indicated by index register X. Forms a one's complement of the contents of memory, and stores it into memory. Compares the contents of index register X and memory. Compares the contents of index register Y and memory. Decrements the contents of the accumulator or memory by 1. Decrements the contents of index register X CA 2 by 1. Decrements the contents of index register Y by 1. Divides the 16-bit data that is the contents of M (zz + x + 1) for high byte and the contents of M (zz + x) for low byte by the accumulator. Stores the quotient in the accumulator and the 1's complement of the remainder on the stack. "Exclusive-ORs" the contents of accumulator and memory. The results are stored in the accumulator. "Exclusive-ORs" the contents of the memory specified by the addressing mode and the contents of the memory at the address indicated by index register X. The results are stored into the memory at the address indicated by index register X. Connects oscillator output to the XOUT pin. E2 2 1 88 2 1
C9 2
2
C5 3
2
COM
44 5
2
CPX
E0 2
2
E4 3
2
CPY
Y-M A A - 1 or MM-1 XX-1 YY-1 A (M(zz + X + 1), M(zz + X)) / A M(S) 1's complememt of Remainder SS-1 When T = 0 - A AVM When T = 1 - M(X) M(X) V M
C0 2
2
C4 3
2
DEC
1A 2
1
C6 5
2
DEX
DEY
1
DIV
EOR (Note 1)
49 2
2
45 3
2
FST A A + 1 or MM+1 XX+1 YY+1
INC
Increments the contents of accumulator or memory by 1. Increments the contents of index register X by 1. Increments the contents of index register Y by 1. E8 2 1
3A 2
1
E6 5
2
INX
INY
C8 2
1
3-32
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode ZP, X OP n ZP, Y # OP n ABS # OP n ABS, X # OP n ABS, Y IND ZP, IND # OP n IND, X IND, Y REL SP # OP n 2 # 7
Processor status register 6 V * 5 T * 4 B * 3 D * 2 I * 1 Z * 0 C *
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n 50 2
N *
70 2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
*
* D5 4 CD 4
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
2
3 DD 5
3 D9 5
3
C1 6
2 D1 6
2
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
C
N EC 4
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
3
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
C
CC 4
3
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
C
D6 6
2
CE 6
3 DE 7
3
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
N E2 16 2
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
55 4
2
4D 4
3 5D 5
3 59 5
3
41 6
2 51 6
2
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
* F6 6 EE 6
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
2
3 FE 7
3
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-33
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode Symbol Function Details IMP OP n JMP If addressing mode is ABS PCL ADL PCH ADH If addressing mode is IND PCL M (ADH, ADL) PCH M (ADH, ADL + 1) If addressing mode is ZP, IND PCL M(00, ADL) PCH M(00, ADL + 1) M(S) PCH SS-1 M(S) PCL SS-1 After executing the above, if addressing mode is ABS, PCL ADL PCH ADH if addressing mode is SP, PCL ADL PCH FF If addressing mode is ZP, IND, PCL M(00, ADL) PCH M(00, ADL + 1) When T = 0 AM When T = 1 M(X) M M nn XM YM Jumps to the specified address. IMM # OP n A # OP n BIT, A # OP n ZP # OP n BIT, ZP # OP n #
JSR
After storing contents of program counter in stack, and jumps to the specified address.
LDA (Note 2)
Load accumulator with contents of memory. Load memory indicated by index register X with contents of memory specified by the addressing mode. Load memory with immediate value.
A9 2
2
A5 3
2
LDM
3C 4
3
LDX
Load index register X with contents of memory. Load index register Y with contents of memory. 0 C Shift the contents of accumulator or memory to the right by one bit. The low order bit of accumulator or memory is stored in carry, 7th bit is cleared. Multiplies the accumulator with the contents of memory specified by the zero page X addressing mode and stores the high byte of the result on the stack and the low byte in the accumulator. No operation. EA 2 1
A2 2
2
A6 3
2
LDY
A0 2
2
A4 3
2
LSR
7 0
4A 2
1
46 5
2
MUL (Note 5)
M(S) * A A ! M(zz + X) SS-1
NOP
PC PC + 1 When T = 0 AAVM When T = 1 M(X) M(X) V M
ORA (Note 1)
"Logical OR's" the contents of memory and accumulator. The result is stored in the accumulator. "Logical OR's" the contents of memory indicated by index register X and contents of memory specified by the addressing mode. The result is stored in the memory specified by index register X.
09 2
2
05 3
2
3-34
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode ZP, X OP n ZP, Y # OP n ABS # OP n 4C 3 ABS, X # OP n 3 ABS, Y IND ZP, IND # OP n 3 B2 4 IND, X IND, Y REL SP # OP n # 7
Processor status register 6 V * 5 T * 4 B * 3 D * 2 I * 1 Z * 0 C *
# OP n
# OP n 6C 5
# OP n 2
# OP n
# OP n
N *
20 6
3
02 7
2
22 5
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
B5 4
2
AD 4
3 BD 5
3 B9 5
3
A1 6
2 B1 6
2
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
B6 4 B4 4 56 6
2 AE 4 AC 4 4E 6
3
BE 5
3
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
2
3 BC 5
3
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
2
3 5E 7
3
0
*
*
*
*
*
Z
C
62 15 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
15 4
2
0D 4
3 1D 5
3 19 5
3
01 6
2 11 6
2
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-35
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode Symbol Function Details IMP OP n PHA M(S) A SS-1 Saves the contents of the accumulator in memory at the address indicated by the stack pointer and decrements the contents of stack pointer by 1. Saves the contents of the processor status register in memory at the address indicated by the stack pointer and decrements the contents of the stack pointer by 1. Increments the contents of the stack pointer by 1 and restores the accumulator from the memory at the address indicated by the stack pointer. Increments the contents of stack pointer by 1 and restores the processor status register from the memory at the address indicated by the stack pointer. Shifts the contents of the memory or accumulator to the left by one bit. The high order bit is shifted into the carry flag and the carry flag is shifted into the low order bit. Shifts the contents of the memory or accumulator to the right by one bit. The low order bit is shifted into the carry flag and the carry flag is shifted into the high order bit. Rotates the contents of memory to the right by 4 bits. 48 3 IMM # OP n 1 A # OP n BIT, A # OP n ZP # OP n BIT, ZP # OP n #
PHP
M(S) PS SS-1
08 3
1
PLA
SS+1 A M(S)
68 4
1
PLP
SS+1 PS M(S)
28 4
1
ROL
7
0 C
2A 2
1
26 5
2
ROR
7 C
0
6A 2
1
66 5
2
RRF
7 SS+1 PS M(S) SS+1 PCL M(S) SS+1 PCH M(S) SS+1 PCL M(S) SS+1 PCH M(S)
0
82 8
2
RTI
Returns from an interrupt routine to the main routine.
40 6
1
RTS
Returns from a subroutine to the main routine.
60 6
1
SBC (Note 1) (Note 5)
When T = 0 AA-M-C When T = 1 M(X) M(X) - M - C
Subtracts the contents of memory and complement of carry flag from the contents of accumulator. The results are stored into the accumulator. Subtracts contents of complement of carry flag and contents of the memory indicated by the addressing mode from the memory at the address indicated by index register X. The results are stored into the memory of the address indicated by index register X. Sets the specified bit in the accumulator or memory to "1". Sets the contents of the carry flag to "1". 38 2 1
E9 2
2
E5 3
2
SEB
Ab or Mb 1 C1 D1 I1 T1
0B 2 + 2i
1
0F 5 + 2i
2
SEC
SED
Sets the contents of the decimal mode flag to "1". Sets the contents of the interrupt disable flag to "1". Sets the contents of the index X mode flag to "1". Disconnects the oscillator output from the XOUT pin.
F8 2
1
SEI
78 2
1
SET
32 2
1
SLW
C2 2
1
3-36
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode ZP, X OP n ZP, Y # OP n ABS # OP n ABS, X # OP n ABS, Y IND ZP, IND # OP n IND, X IND, Y REL SP # OP n # 7
Processor status register 6 V * 5 T * 4 B * 3 D * 2 I * 1 Z * 0 C *
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n
N *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
(Value saved in stack)
36 6
2
2E 6
3 3E 7
3
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
C
76 6
2
6E 6
3 7E 7
3
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
C
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
(Value saved in stack)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
F5 4
2
ED 4
3 FD 5
3 F9 5
3
E1 6
2 F1 6
2
N
V
*
*
*
*
Z
C
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1
*
*
*
*
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1
*
*
*
*
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-37
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode Symbol Function Details IMP OP n STA MA Stores the contents of accumulator in memory. IMM # OP n A # OP n BIT, A # OP n ZP # OP n 85 4 42 2 BIT, ZP # OP n 2 #
STP MX MY XA YA M = 0? XS AX SX AY
Stops the oscillator.
1
STX
Stores the contents of index register X in memory. Stores the contents of index register Y in memory. Transfers the contents of the accumulator to AA 2 index register X. Transfers the contents of the accumulator to index register Y. Tests whether the contents of memory are "0" or not. Transfers the contents of the stack pointer to BA 2 index register X. Transfers the contents of index register X to the accumulator. Transfers the contents of index register X to the stack pointer. Transfers the contents of index register Y to the accumulator. Stops the internal clock. 8A 2 1 A8 2 1
86 4 84 4
2
STY
2
TAX
TAY
1
TST
64 3
2
TSX
TXA
1
TXS
9A 2
1
TYA
98 2
1
WIT Notes 1 2 3 4 5
C2 2
1
: The number of cycles "n" is increased by 3 when T is 1. : The number of cycles "n" is increased by 2 when T is 1. : The number of cycles "n" is increased by 1 when T is 1. : The number of cycles "n" is increased by 2 when branching has occurred. : N, V, and Z flags are invalid in decimal operation mode.
3-38
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode ZP, X OP n 95 5 ZP, Y # OP n 2 ABS # OP n 8D 5 ABS, X # OP n 3 9D 6 ABS, Y IND ZP, IND # OP n IND, X IND, Y REL SP # OP n # 7
Processor status register 6 V * 5 T * 4 B * 3 D * 2 I * 1 Z * 0 C *
# OP n 3 99 6
# OP n 3
# OP n 81 7
# OP n 2 91 7
# OP n 2
N *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
96 5
2 8E 5
3
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
94 5
2
8C 5
3
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
N
*
*
*
*
*
Z
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Symbol IMP IMM A BIT, A ZP BIT, ZP ZP, X ZP, Y ABS ABS, X ABS, Y IND ZP, IND IND, X IND, Y REL SP C Z I D B T V N
Contents Implied addressing mode Immediate addressing mode Accumulator or Accumulator addressing mode Accumulator bit relative addressing mode Zero page addressing mode Zero page bit relative addressing mode Zero page X addressing mode Zero page Y addressing mode Absolute addressing mode Absolute X addressing mode Absolute Y addressing mode Indirect absolute addressing mode Zero page indirect absolute addressing mode Indirect X addressing mode Indirect Y addressing mode Relative addressing mode Special page addressing mode Carry flag Zero flag Interrupt disable flag Decimal mode flag Break flag X-modified arithmetic mode flag Overflow flag Negative flag + - V - V - X Y S PC PS PCH PCL ADH ADL FF nn M V
Symbol
Contents Addition Subtraction Logical OR Logical AND Logical exclusive OR Negation Shows direction of data flow Index register X Index register Y Stack pointer Program counter Processor status register 8 high-order bits of program counter 8 low-order bits of program counter 8 high-order bits of address 8 low-order bits of address FF in Hexadecimal notation Immediate value Memory specified by address designation of any addressing mode Memory of address indicated by contents of index register X Memory of address indicated by contents of stack pointer Contents of memory at address indicated by ADH and ADL, in ADH is 8 high-order bits and ADL is 8 low-order bits. Contents of address indicated by zero page ADL 1 bit of accumulator 1 bit of memory Opcode Number of cycles Number of bytes
M(X) M(S) M(ADH, ADL)
M(00, ADL) Ab Mb OP n #
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-39
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-14B<25B0>
Mask ROM number
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Note : Please fill in all items marked g. ) Issuance signature Company name Date issued Date: TEL ( Submitted by Supervisor
g Customer
g 1. Confirmation Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted. Three EPROMs are required for each pattern. If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data. Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs. Microcomputer name : M38203M4-XXXFP Checksum code for entire EPROM EPROM type (indicate the type used) M38203M4-XXXGP M38203M4-XXXHP (hexadecimal notation)
27256
EPROM address 000016 Product name 000F16 001016 407F16 408016 7FFD16 7FFE16 7FFF16
ASCII code : `M38203M4-'
27512
EPROM address 000016 Product name 000F16 001016 C07F16 C08016 FFFD16 FFFE16 FFFF16
ASCII code : `M38203M4-'
In the address space of the microcomputer, the internal ROM area is from address C08016 to FFFD16. The reset vector is stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16.
data ROM 16254 bytes
data ROM 16254 bytes
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of the diagram) to "FF16". (2) The ASCII codes of the product name "M38203M4-" must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816. And set the data "FF16" in addresses 000916 to 000F16. The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right in hexadecimal notation.
Receipt
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M4-XXXFP/GP/HP
Date: Section head Supervisor signature signature
Address 000016 000116 000216 000316 000416 000516 000616 000716
`M' = 4D16 `3' = 3316 `8' = 3816 `2' = 3216 `0' = 3016 `3' = 3316 `M' = 4D16 `4' = 3416
Address 000816 000916 000A16 000B16 000C16 000D16 000E16 000F16
` - ' = 2D16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16
(1/2)
3-40
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-14B<25B0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M4-XXXFP/GP/HP MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembier source program. assembler EPROM type The pseudo-command 27256 *= $8000 .BYTE `M38203M4-' 27512 *= $0000 .BYTE `M38203M4-'
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM will not be processed.
g 2. Mark specification Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark specification form (80P6N for M38203M4-XXXFP,80P6S for M38203M4-XXXGP,80P6D for M38203M4-XXXHP) and attach it to the mask ROM confirmation form. g 3. Usage conditions Please answer the following questions about usage for use in our product inspection : (1) How will you use the XIN-XOUT oscillator? Ceramic resonator External clock input At what frequency? Quartz crystal Other ( f(XIN) = ) MHz
(2) Which function will you use the pins P71/XCIN and P70/XCOUT as P71 and P70, or XCIN and XCOUT? Ports P71 and P70 function XCIN and XCOUT function (external resonator)
g 4. Comments
(2/2)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-41
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH07-60B<36A0>
Mask ROM number
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Note : Please fill in all items marked g. ) Issuance signature Company name Date issued Date: TEL ( Submitted by Supervisor
g Customer
g 1. Confirmation Specify the type of EPROMs submitted. Three EPROMs are required for each pattern. If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data. Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
Receipt
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M4DXXXFP
Date: Section head Supervisor signature signature
Checksum code for entire EPROM EPROM type (indicate the type used)
(hexadecimal notation)
27256
EPROM address 000016 Product name 000F16 001016 407F16 408016 7FFD16 7FFE16 7FFF16
ASCII code : `M38203M4D'
27512
EPROM address 000016 Product name 000F16 001016 C07F16 C08016 FFFD16 FFFE16 FFFF16
ASCII code : `M38203M4D'
In the address space of the microcomputer, the internal ROM area is from address C08016 to FFFD16. The reset vector is stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16.
data ROM 16254 bytes
data ROM 16254 bytes
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of the diagram) to "FF16". (2) The ASCII codes of the product name "M38203M4D" must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816. And set the data "FF16" in addresses 000916 to 000F16. The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right in hexadecimal notation.
Address 000016 000116 000216 000316 000416 000516 000616 000716
`M' = 4D16 `3' = 3316 `8' = 3816 `2' = 3216 `0' = 3016 `3' = 3316 `M' = 4D16 `4' = 3416
Address 000816 000916 000A16 000B16 000C16 000D16 000E16 000F16
`D' = 4416 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16
(1/2)
3-42
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH07-60B<36A0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M4DXXXFP MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembier source program. assembler EPROM type The pseudo-command 27256 *= $8000 .BYTE `M38203M4D' 27512 *= $0000 .BYTE `M38203M4D'
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM will not be processed.
g 2. Mark specification Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark specification form (80P6N for M38203M4DXXXFP) and attach it to the mask ROM confirmation form. g 3. Usage conditions Please answer the following questions about usage for use in our product inspection : (1) How will you use the XIN-XOUT oscillator? Ceramic resonator External clock input At what frequency? Quartz crystal Other ( f(XIN) = ) MHz
(2) Which function will you use the pins P71/XCIN and P70/XCOUT as P71 and P70, or XCIN and XCOUT? Ports P71 and P70 function XCIN and XCOUT function (external resonator)
g 4. Comments
(2/2)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-43
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-58B<2XB0>
Mask ROM number
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Note : Please fill in all items marked g. ) Issuance signature Company name Date issued Date: TEL ( Submitted by Supervisor
g Customer
g 1. Confirmation Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted. Three EPROMs are required for each pattern. If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data. Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs. Microcomputer name : M38207M8-XXXFP Checksum code for entire EPROM EPROM type (indicate the type used) M38207M8-XXXGP M38207M8-XXXHP (hexadecimal notation)
27512
EPROM address 000016 Product name 000F16 001016 807F16 808016 FFFD16 FFFE16 FFFF16
ASCII code : `M38207M8-'
In the address space of the microcomputer, the internal ROM area is from address 808016 to FFFD16. The reset vector is stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16.
data ROM 32638 bytes
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of the diagram) to "FF16". (2) The ASCII codes of the product name "M38207M8-" must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816. And set the data "FF16" in addresses 000916 to 000F16. The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right in hexadecimal notation.
Receipt
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38207M8-XXXFP/GP/HP
Date: Section head Supervisor signature signature
Address 000016 000116 000216 000316 000416 000516 000616 000716
`M' = 4D16 `3' = 3316 `8' = 3816 `2' = 3216 `0' = 3016 `7' = 3716 `M' = 4D16 `8' = 3816
Address 000816 000916 000A16 000B16 000C16 000D16 000E16 000F16
` - ' = 2D16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16
(1/2)
3-44
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-58B<2XB0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38207M8-XXXFP/GP/HP MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembier source program. assembler EPROM type The pseudo-command 27512 *= $0000 .BYTE `M38207M8-'
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM will not be processed.
g 2. Mark specification Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark specification form (80P6N for M38207M8-XXXFP,80P6S for M38207M8-XXXGP,80P6D for M38207M8-XXXHP) and attach it to the mask ROM confirmation form. g 3. Usage conditions Please answer the following questions about usage for use in our product inspection : (1) How will you use the XIN-XOUT oscillator? Ceramic resonator External clock input At what frequency? Quartz crystal Other ( f(XIN) = ) MHz
(2) Which function will you use the pins P71/XCIN and P70/XCOUT as P71 and P70, or XCIN and XCOUT? Ports P71 and P70 function XCIN and XCOUT function (external resonator)
g 4. Comments
(2/2)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-45
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-64B<45A0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38207M8DXXXFP/GP
Date: Section head Supervisor signature signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked g. ) Issuance signature Company name Date issued Date: TEL ( Submitted by Supervisor
g Customer
g 1. Confirmation Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted. Three EPROMs are required for each pattern. If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data. Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs. Microcomputer name : M38207M8DXXXFP Checksum code for entire EPROM EPROM type (indicate the type used) M38207M8DXXXGP (hexadecimal notation)
27512
EPROM address 000016 Product name 000F16 001016 807F16 808016 FFFD16 FFFE16 FFFF16
ASCII code : `M38207M8D'
In the address space of the microcomputer, the internal ROM area is from address 808016 to FFFD16. The reset vector is stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16.
data ROM 32638 bytes
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of the diagram) to "FF16". (2) The ASCII codes of the product name "M38207M8D" must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816. And set the data "FF16" in addresses 000916 to 000F16. The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right in hexadecimal notation.
Address 000016 000116 000216 000316 000416 000516 000616 000716
`M' = 4D16 `3' = 3316 `8' = 3816 `2' = 3216 `0' = 3016 `7' = 3716 `M' = 4D16 `8' = 3816
Address 000816 000916 000A16 000B16 000C16 000D16 000E16 000F16
`D' = 4416 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16
(1/2)
3-46
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-64B<45A0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38207M8DXXXFP/GP MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembier source program. assembler EPROM type The pseudo-command 27512 *= $0000 .BYTE `M38207M8D'
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM will not be processed.
g 2. Mark specification Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark specification form (80P6N for M38207M8DXXXFP,80P6S for M38207M8DXXXGP) and attach it to the mask ROM confirmation form. g 3. Usage conditions Please answer the following questions about usage for use in our product inspection : (1) How will you use the XIN-XOUT oscillator? Ceramic resonator External clock input At what frequency? Quartz crystal Other ( f(XIN) = ) MHz
(2) Which function will you use the pins P71/XCIN and P70/XCOUT as P71 and P70, or XCIN and XCOUT? Ports P71 and P70 function XCIN and XCOUT function (external resonator)
g 4. Comments
(2/2)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-47
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-63B<45B0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M4LXXXFP/GP/HP
Date: Section head Supervisor signature signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked g. ) Issuance signature Company name Date issued Date: TEL ( Submitted by Supervisor
g Customer
g 1. Confirmation Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted. Three EPROMs are required for each pattern. If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data. Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs. Microcomputer name : M38203M4LXXXFP Checksum code for entire EPROM EPROM type (indicate the type used) M38203M4LXXXGP M38203M4LXXXHP (hexadecimal notation)
27256
EPROM address 000016 Product name 000F16 001016 407F16 408016 7FFD16 7FFE16 7FFF16
ASCII code : `M38203M4L'
27512
EPROM address 000016 Product name 000F16 001016 C07F16 C08016 FFFD16 FFFE16 FFFF16
ASCII code : `M38203M4L'
In the address space of the microcomputer, the internal ROM area is from address C08016 to FFFD16. The reset vector is stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16.
data ROM 16254 bytes
data ROM 16254 bytes
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of the diagram) to "FF16". (2) The ASCII codes of the product name "M38203M4L" must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816. And set the data "FF16" in addresses 000916 to 000F16. The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right in hexadecimal notation.
Address 000016 000116 000216 000316 000416 000516 000616 000716
`M' = 4D16 `3' = 3316 `8' = 3816 `2' = 3216 `0' = 3016 `3' = 3316 `M' = 4D16 `4' = 3416
Address 000816 000916 000A16 000B16 000C16 000D16 000E16 000F16
` L ' = 4C16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16
(1/2)
3-48
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-63B<45B0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M4LXXXFP/GP/HP MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembier source program. assembler EPROM type The pseudo-command 27256 *= $8000 .BYTE `M38203M4L' 27512 *= $0000 .BYTE `M38203M4L'
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM will not be processed.
g 2. Mark specification Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark specification form (80P6N for M38203M4LXXXFP,80P6S for M38203M4LXXXGP,80P6D for M38203M4LXXXHP) and attach it to the mask ROM confirmation form. g 3. Usage conditions Please answer the following questions about usage for use in our product inspection : (1) How will you use the XIN-XOUT oscillator? Ceramic resonator External clock input At what frequency? Quartz crystal Other ( f(XIN) = ) MHz
(2) Which function will you use the pins P71/XCIN and P70/XCOUT as P71 and P70, or XCIN and XCOUT? Ports P71 and P70 function XCIN and XCOUT function (external resonator)
g 4. Comments
(2/2)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-49
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-46B<43B0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M2LXXXFP/GP/HP
Date: Section head Supervisor signature signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked g. ) Issuance signature Company name Date issued Date: TEL ( Submitted by Supervisor
g Customer
g 1. Confirmation Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted. Three EPROMs are required for each pattern. If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data. Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs. Microcomputer name : M38203M2LXXXFP Checksum code for entire EPROM EPROM type (indicate the type used) M38203M2LXXXGP M38203M2LXXXHP (hexadecimal notation)
27256
EPROM address 000016 Product name 000F16 001016 607F16 608016 7FFD16 7FFE16 7FFF16
ASCII code : `M38203M2L'
27512
EPROM address 000016 Product name 000F16 001016 E07F16 E08016 FFFD16 FFFE16 FFFF16
ASCII code : `M38203M2L'
In the address space of the microcomputer, the internal ROM area is from address E08016 to FFFD16. The reset vector is stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16.
data ROM 8062 bytes
data ROM 8062 bytes
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of the diagram) to "FF16". (2) The ASCII codes of the product name "M38203M2L" must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816. And set the data "FF16" in addresses 000916 to 000F16. The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right in hexadecimal notation.
Address 000016 000116 000216 000316 000416 000516 000616 000716
`M' = 4D16 `3' = 3316 `8' = 3816 `2' = 3216 `0' = 3016 `3' = 3316 `M' = 4D16 `2' = 3216
Address 000816 000916 000A16 000B16 000C16 000D16 000E16 000F16
` L ' = 4C16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16 FF16
(1/2)
3-50
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-46B<43B0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M2LXXXFP/GP/HP MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembier source program. assembler EPROM type The pseudo-command 27256 *= $8000 .BYTE `M38203M2L' 27512 *= $0000 .BYTE `M38203M2L'
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM will not be processed.
g 2. Mark specification Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark specification form (80P6N for M38203M2LXXXFP,80P6S for M38203M2LXXXGP,80P6D for M38203M2LXXXHP) and attach it to the mask ROM confirmation form. g 3. Usage conditions Please answer the following questions about usage for use in our product inspection : (1) How will you use the XIN-XOUT oscillator? Ceramic resonator External clock input At what frequency? Quartz crystal Other ( f(XIN) = ) MHz
(2) Which function will you use the pins P71/XCIN and P70/XCOUT as P71 and P70, or XCIN and XCOUT? Ports P71 and P70 function XCIN and XCOUT function (external resonator)
g 4. Comments
(2/2)
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-51
APPENDIX
3.7 Mark specification from
3.7 Mark specification from
3-52
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.7 Mark specification from
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-53
APPENDIX
3.8 Package outlines
3.8 Package outlines
3-54
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.8 Package outlines
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-55
APPENDIX
3.9 SFR Allocation
3.9 SFR Allocation
000016 000116 000216 000316 000416 000516 000616 000716 000816 000916 000A16 000B16 000C16 000D16 000E16 000F16 001016 001116 001216 001316 001416 001516 001616 001716 001816 001916 001A16 001B16 001C16 001D16 001E16 001F16
Port P0 (P0) Port P0 direction register (P0D) Port P1 (P1) Port P1 direction register (P1D) Port P2 (P2) Port P2 direction register (P2D) Port P3 (P3)
002016 002116 002216 002316 002416 002516 002616 002716
Timer X (low-order) (TXL) Timer X (high-order) (TXH) Timer Y (low-order) (TYL) Timer Y (high-order) (TYH) Timer 1 (T1) Timer 2 (T2) Timer 3 (T3) Timer X mode register (TXM) Timer Y mode register (TYM) Timer 123 mode register (T123M) output control register (CKOUT)
Port P4 (P4) Port P4 direction register (P4D) Port P5 (P5) Port P5 direction register (P5D) Port P6 (P6) Port P6 direction register (P6D) Port P7 (P7) Port P7 direction register (P7D)
002816 002916 002A16 002B16 002C16 002D16 002E16 002F16 003016 003116 003216 003316 003416 003516
PULL register A (PULL A) PULL register B (PULL B) Transmit/Receive buffer register (TB/RB) Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS) Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON) UART control register (UARTCON) Baud rate generator (BRG) Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON)
003616 003716 003816 003916 003A16 003B16 003C16 003D16 003E16 Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON) Segment output enable register (SEG) LCD mode register (LM) Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE) CPU mode register (CPUM) Interrupt request register 1(IREQ1) Interrupt request register 2(IREQ2) Interrupt control register 1(ICON1) Interrupt control register 2(ICON2)
Serial I/O2 register (SIO2)
003F16
Memory map of special function register (SFR)
3-56
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.10 Pin configuration
3.10 Pin configuration
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
P30/SEG16 P31/SEG17 P32/SEG18 P33/SEG19 P34/SEG20 P35/SEG21 P36/SEG22 P37/SEG23 P00/SEG24 P01/SEG25 P02/SEG26 P03/SEG27 P04/SEG28 P05/SEG29 P06/SEG30 P07/SEG31 P10/SEG32 P11/SEG33 P12/SEG34 P13/SEG35 P14/SEG36 P15/SEG37 P16/SEG38 P17/SEG39
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9 SEG8 VCC SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1
65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
40 39 38 37 36 35 34
M38203M4-XXXFP M38203M4-XXXFP
33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 VSS XOUT XIN P70/XCOUT P71/XCIN RESET P40 P41/
Pin configuration of M38203M4-XXXFP
SEG0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 VL3 VL2 VL1 P61/RTP1 P60/INT3/RTP0 P57/INT2 P56/TOUT P55/CNTR1 P54/CNTR0 P53/SRDY2 P52/SCLK2 P51/SOUT2 P50/SIN2 P47/SRDY1 P46/SCLK1 P45/TXD P44/RXD P43/INT1 P42/INT0
Package type : 80P6N-A 80-pin plastic-molded QFP
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
3-57
APPENDIX
3.10 Pin configuration
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
P32/SEG18 P33/SEG19 P34/SEG20 P35/SEG21 P36/SEG22 P37/SEG23 P00/SEG24 P01/SEG25 P02/SEG26 P03/SEG27 P04/SEG28 P05/SEG29 P06/SEG30 P07/SEG31 P10/SEG32 P11/SEG33 P12/SEG34 P13/SEG35 P14/SEG36 P15/SEG37
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
P31/SEG17 P30/SEG16 SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9 SEG8 VCC SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 COM3
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 1234567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
M38203M4-XXXGP M38203M4-XXXHP
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
P16/SEG38 P17/SEG39 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 VSS XOUT XIN P70/XCOUT P71/XCIN RESET P40 P41/ P42/INT0 P43/INT1
Package type : 80P6S-A/80P6D-A 80-pin plastic-molded QFP
Pin configuration of M38203M4-XXXGP/ HP
3-58
COM2 COM1 COM0 VL3 VL2 VL1 P61/RTP1 P60/INT3/RTP0 P57/INT2 P56/TOUT P55/CNTR1 P54/CNTR0 P53/SRDY2 P52/SCLK2 P51/SOUT2 P50/SIN2 P47/SRDY1 P46/SCLK1 P45/TXD P44/RXD
3820 GROUP USER'S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI SEMICONDUCTORS USER'S MANUAL 3820Group
Jul. First Edition 1995 Editioned by Committee of editing of Mitsubishi Semiconductor USER'S MANUAL Published by Mitsubishi Electric Corp., Semiconductor Marketing Division
This book, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
(c)1995 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
User's Manual 3820 Group
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFFICE: MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG., MARUNOUCHI, TOKYO 100. TELEX: J24532 CABLE: MELCO TOKYO
H-EE367-A KI-9507 Printed in Japan (ROD) (c) 1995 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
New publication, effective Jul. 1995. Specifications subject to change without notice.

▲Up To Search▲

Price & Availability of M38203M4-126FP

	To Download M38203M4-126FP Datasheet File
If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .